Operator's Manual Launching Station M901 Guided Missile Semitrailer Mounted, Patriot Air Defense Guided Missile System - TM 9-1440-600-10

Citation preview

TM 9-1440-600-10

DI01.11: 9-1440-600-10/rep.

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

LAUNCHING STATION M901

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GUIDED MISSILE SEMITRAILER MOUNTED HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA LIBRARY

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND

X004787122

INDICATORS

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES

EMPLACEMENT

MARCH ORDER

Y

R

A

R

B

I

L MAN ALDER D OCU P REF UBLIC DEPARMENTS ERE TME NCE NT

1 R 25 985

AP

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD

VE

IA

RS

IT

O Y

IN

F RG VI

OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS

This copy is a reprint which includes current

pages from

Change 1 .

PATRIOT AIR DEFENSE GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM HEADQUARTERS , DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

DECEMBER 1983

TM 9-1440-600-10

RECORD OF CHANGES

CHANGE NO.

DATE

TITLE OR BRIEF DESCRIPTION

ENTERED BY

TM 9-1440-600-10

WARNING

DANGEROUS VOLTAGE

is used to operate this equipment

DEATH ON CONTACT

may result if safety precautions are not observed .

Never work on electronic equipment unless there is another person nearby who is familiar with the

operation

and

hazards

of the

equipment and

is

able to give first aid . When the technician is aided by operators , he must warn them about dangerous areas .

When possible, shut off power to the equipment before beginning work on equipment. Ground every capacitor likely to hold a dangerous potential . When working inside equipment, after power has been turned off, always ground every part before touching it.

Be careful not to contact high-voltage connections when

installing or op-

erating this equipment.

When possible, keep one hand away from the equipment to reduce the hazard of current flowing through the vital organs of the body.

Do not be misled by the term "low voltage. " Under adverse WARNING

conditions potentials as low as 50 volts may cause death .

a

TM 9-1440-600-10

INSTRUCTIONS FOR ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION

(Extracted (with modifications ) from FM 21-11 , First Aid for Soldiers)

a.

Take a deep breath , open your mouth wide ,

and

make an airtight seal around the

casualty's nose , using one of the techniques shown in the figure.

b.

With your eyes focused on the casualty's chest , blow forcefully into the airway (mouth or nose). Rising of the casualty's chest indicates that the air is reaching the lungs . In this case, the procedure is continued . If the chest does not rise , corrective action must be taken . First , hold the jaw up more forcefully and blow harder , making sure that the air is not leaking from the mouth or nose . If the chest still does not rise , recheck the mouth for foreign matter. If necessary , turn the casualty on one side . Strike the casualty between the shoulders with considerable force , repeatedly if necessary , to dislodge obstruction in the airway; then resume attempts to inflate lungs .

C.

Remove your mouth from the casualty's airway opening and listen for the return of air . If the casualty's exhalation is noisy , elevate the jaw more.

d.

After each exhalation of air from the casualty's lungs , blow another deep breath into the airway. Make the first five to ten breaths deep and give them at a rapid rate in order to provide fast reoxygenation . Thereafter, give the breaths at a rate of 12 to 20 per minute until the casualty is able to breathe satisfactorily or until you are positive life is gone . A smooth rhythm is desired but split - second timing is not essential . As the casualty attempts to breathe , adjust the timing of your efforts to assist.

Le WARNING

After a period of resuscitation , the casualty's abdomen may bulge indicating that some of the air is going into the stomach . Since inflation of the stomach makes it more difficult to inflate the lungs , apply gentle pressure to the abdomen with your hand between inflations .

If your breathing at the start has been very deep and rapid , you may become faint , tingle , or even lose consciousness if you persist. After administering the first five to ten deep , rapid breaths , you should adjust your breathing to a rate of 12 to 20 times a minute , with only moderate increase in normal volume so that you will be able to continue to give artificial respiration for a long period without temporary ill effects .

b

TM 9-1440-600-10

a.

b.

a.

NOSE SEALED WITH THUMB AND FINGER

b.

NOSE SEALED WITH CHEEK

MOUTH-TO-MOUTH ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION

c

M 9-1440-600-10

A Le WARNING

HIGH NOISE LEVEL

When the radar set , engagement control station , electric power plant, electric power unit, communications relay group , and launching station are operating , potentially dangerous noise

levels exist. Without protection ,

to this noise may cause a hearing

loss .

long exposure

Use ear protectors when working

within 10 meters of any of the equipment. See AR 40-5 for additional formation .

in-

During live fire exercises or operations , approved ear protection must be worn by unsheltered personnel within 800 feet WARNING

(244 meters) of a launching station to prevent loss of hearing from missile launch impulse noise.

WARNING

HIGH TEMPERATURE

This equipment contains items which operate at temperatures above 140°F (60°C) . If maintenance gloves .

is

required when equipment is

hot, wear protective

TM 9-1440-600-

WARNING

EXPLOSIVES HAZARDS

Do not perform

electrical checks of the safety and arming devices or the

propulsion arming and firing units at any time during transportation , handling , or storage operations involving the guided missile. These safe/arm devices require no electrical checkout from the time of assembly until the missile is returned for surveillance or until the missile is loaded on the launcher. On the launcher, these devices are checked by BITE to insure their readiness for a launch operation . Air-defense guided missile MIM - 104 contains explosives . All applicable safety regulations will be strictly enforced . Explosive components containing electrical wiring must be protected at all times from stray voltages or induced electrical currents .

Le WARNING

Handling or reload operations must not be performed during electrical storms .

A Gas under high

pressure is stored

in

pressure vessels in

WARNING the guided missile .

Le WARNING

MECHANICAL HAZARDS

Before

raising

or lowering the

platform

or

rotating the

turntable , the

crewmember must insure that all personnel and equipment are clear of the LS. A person can turntable .

be crushed to death if struck by a moving

platform or

When any activity is to be performed in the vicinity of the launching station , the LOCAL- RMT

switch on LCU Display Panel A1A14 must be in the LOCAL

position. The local condition prevents remote training of the turntable .

TM 9-1440-600-10

Le

WARNING

MECHANICAL HAZARDS - Continued

The LOCAL- RMT keylock switch key on LCU Display Panel A1A14 must be removed and retained by a crewmember when the launching station is in the local mode and is manned.

Le

All personnel working on platforms and at elevated positions on the launching station must exercise extreme care to pre-

WARNING vent falling. Always insure solid footing and solid handholds before transferring body weight.

Before

using

hoisting

equipment,

certification data plate . Do not certification date has expired .

inspect the

use

any

equipment's

hoisting

periodic

load

equipment whose

load

Do not walk on cables between the generator set and the launcher electronics to avoid damaging equipment . Personnel must use the platforms provided .

Rotating equipment ( blower fans) is used in the operation of this equipment . When performing maintenance , know the location and status (operating/off) of the rotating equipment . Disable all rotating equipment before performing maintenance.

Avoid power, data , and control cables interconnecting emplaced equipment , and driven ground

rods to

prevent tripping

injuries and

possible damage

to equipment connectors.

Site survey reference stakes are driven into the ground in the emplacement area. They are a tripping

hazard

and

if dislodged

alinement of the firing platoon during emplacement.

or moved could affect

TM 9-1440-600-10

WARNING

COLD AND HOT WEATHER HAZARDS

Failure to comply with the content of this warning result in serious injury.

could

PROTECTING THE HANDS IN COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS

Observe normal precautions for cold weather operations and wear proper clothing as described in FM 31-70. For mechanical tasks , observe the following measures .

If hands feel rewarm .

numb or

painful ,

stop work.

Immediately take

measures to

Do not touch metal with bare (ungloved) hands at temperatures below + 32°F (0°C) .

At temperatures approaching -50°F (-45°C) , with

no wind , the glove liners

without arctic mittens may be worn to perform tasks for periods of no more than three minutes . After these brief exposures , rewarm the hands with vigorous exercise and/or return to a heated area. Do not remove the arctic mittens under windy conditions .

In the event of injury from

cold

or frostbite ,

immediately

perform

first

aid/recovery methods described in FM 21-11 .

g

TM 9-1440-600-10

WARNING

WORK TIME LIMITS IN HOT WEATHER OPERATIONS

If heat exhaustion ,

cramps ,

or heatstroke occur,

immediately perform

first

aid/recovery procedures described in FM 21-11 . Observe normal precautions for hot/humid weather operations and wear proper light clothing as described in TM 10-276. For the temperature- humidity combinations listed in the attached table , limit continuous work to the times shown with appropriate rest/recover periods and fluid replacement for tasks which take longer than the recommended time .

NOTE

Recommendations are approximately one - half the heat tolerance time values given in MIL-STD- 1472.

TEMP

RELATIVE HUMIDITY (%)

(°F)

(°C)

10

140

60

30 MIN

130❘

54

1 HR

120

49

30

50

70

90

100

NO WORK RECOMMENDED

2 HRS❘ 1 HR

110

43

6 HRS

100❘ 38

2 HRS

1 HR

30 MIN

6 HRS

2 HRS

1 HR

30 MIN

15 MIN

6 HRS

3 HRS

2 HRS

NO LIMIT

90

h

32

WITH PRECAUTIONS

TM 9-1440-600-10

TECHNICAL MANUAL

)

HEADQUARTERS

)

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

No. 9-1440-600-10

Washington, D.C. , 15 December 1983

OPERATOR'S MANUAL LAUNCHING STATION M901 GUIDED MISSILE SEMITRAILER MOUNTED PATRIOT AIR DEFENSE GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM

REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual . If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to

improve the procedures ,

please let us know.

Mail your letter,

DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) , or DA Form 2028-2 , located in back of this manual , direct to : Commander U.S. Army Missile Command ATTN : DRSMI-SNPM Redstone Arsenal , AL 35898

A reply will be furnished to you .

TABLE OF CONTENTS Paragraph

CHAPTER 1 Section I

Section II

CHAPTER 2 Section I

Page

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

iv

INTRODUCTION

1-1

General Information

1-1

Scope .....

1-1

1-1

Maintenance Forms, Records and Reports

1-2

1-1

Reporting of Equipment Improvement Recommendations

1-3

1-1

Nomenclature Cross-Reference .....

1-4

1-1 1-4

Equipment Description Equipment Purpose, Capabilities , and Features

1-5

1-4

Location and Description of Major Components

1-6

1-5

Differences Between Models ..........

1-7

1-13

Equipment Data ..........

1-8

1-14

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

2-1

Description and Use of Operator's Controls and Indicators

2-1

TM 9-1440-600-10

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Paragraph Description and Use of Operator's Controls and Indicators Section II

Section III

ii

2-1

Page

2-1 2-33

Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services General

2-2

2-33

Responsibility

2-3

2-33

Intervals

2-4

2-33

General Procedures for all Services and Inspections ........

2-5

2-33

Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services .......

2-6

2-35

Lubrication Instructions ..........

2-7

2-38

2-39

Operation Under Usual Conditions , Emplacement

2-8

2-39

Position of Controls Prior to Application of Power ......

2-9

2-123

Power-Up

2-10

2-132

Power-Down

2-11

2-152

Energize Launcher Electronics Module A1

2-12

2-161

Energize Data Link Terminal Module A2

2-13

2-167

Energize Generator Set A6 ....

2-14

2-169

Deenergize Launcher Electronics Module A1

2-15

2-175

Deenergize Data Link Terminal Module A2 .....

2-16

2-178

Deenergize Generator Set A6 .........

2-17

2-182

LCU Display Panel A1A14 Semiautomatic BITE Test ..........

2-18

2-183

Electrically Raise Launcher Platform ......

2-19

2-185

Electrically Lower Launcher Platform

2-20

2-190

Elevation Handcrank Operations ..

2-21

2-195

Electrically Rotate Launcher Mechanics .....

2-22

2-199

Azimuth Manual Operations

2-23

2-202

Data Link Terminal Turn - On ..........

2-24

2-205

Data Link Terminal Quick Start

2-25

2-209

Data Link Terminal Tuning ......

2-26

2-213

Data Link Terminal Loopback .........

2-27

2-227

Data Link Terminal Slave Synchronizing

2-28

2-235

Data Link Terminal Auto Synchronizing ....

2-29

2-243

March Order

2-30

2-247

Guided Missile Reload

2-31

2-283

TM 9-1440-600-10

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Paragraph

Section IV

Page

2-388

Operation Under Unusual Conditions Chemical , Biological , and Radiological Environment ..

2-32

2-388

High Velocity Winds .

2-33

2-388

Extreme Cold Weather Operation .....

2-34

2-388

Extreme Hot Weather Operation .....

2-35

2-394

Sandy or Dusty Conditions

2-36

2-394

High Humidity

2-37

2-397

Changing Weather ......

2-38

2-399

Weather Shield Assembly

2-39

2-401

Weather Shield Disassembly .

2-40

2-405

Lightning Safety Precautions

2-41

2-408

APPENDIX A

REFERENCES

A-1

APPENDIX B

COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS

B-1

APPENDIX C

ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST

C- 1

APPENDIX D

EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIELS LIST

D-1

GLOSSARY

Glossary 1

INDEX

Index 1

iii

TM 9-1440-600-10

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL In training you were told the best way to perform your duties is to

use your manual .

Become familiar with the

it to see what it

manual .

Spend some time

looking through

contains. Notice there are three ways to find information : Front cover index.

•

Table of contents . Index at the rear of the manual .

The best way to find what you want depends on how familiar you are with the manual and with the equipment . The fastest way usually is to use the front cover index.

1.

Using the Front Cover Index

Look at the cover of your

manual .

On

the right side you find a listing of important information in the manual . Bend

the pages a bit . See the blue bars that aline with the bars on the cover? Put your on the bar alined with EM-

TM 9-1440-600-10 OPERATOR'S MANUAL LAUNCHING STATION M901 GUIDED MISSILE SEMITRAILER MOUNTED

TABLE OF CONTENTS HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL

thumbnail

PLACEMENT You'll find

and

open the

paragraph

2-8

manual .

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

EMPLACE-

MENT where you opened the manual .

The cover index lists the manual you use most often .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

parts of the PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES EMPLACEMENT

MARCH ORDER GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS

PATRIOT AIR DEFENSE GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

iv

TM 9-1440-600-10

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL- Continued

2.

Using the table of contents . The index on the cover lists TABLE OF CONTENTS . Open the manual to the TABLE OF CONTENTS. It lists all the chapters, sections , and paragraphs and gives the page number they start on . Notice some of these titles are boxed in , the boxed titles are listed on the front cover.

3.

Using the index in the back of the manual. Index in the

back of the

alphabetical order. you

most likely

manual

Subjects you

use.

Each

lists

are

all the

that are

likely to look for are listed

subject is listed

will tell you where to find descriptions , cedures for the launching station (LS).

4.

subjects

in the

manual in

under the

names

under two or three topics . The index

preventive

maintenance , and operating pro-

All the indexing is O.K. , but how do I operate the LS? The LS is operated remotely , but you have to emplace it, prepare it for road march , and reload the guided missiles (GM) . You will also have to perform other operating procedures. You will find ATION

EMPLACEMENT,

UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS

MARCH

paragraphs

ORDER ,

using the

RELOAD and OPERindexes. A section for

operation under unusual conditions is also provided . You must become familiar with this section as it contains special procedures LS under the unusual conditions listed .

5.

required

to operate and

protect the

How do I know when the LS needs repair? All operating procedures give expected results for your actions. If the expected results do not occur, something is wrong . You should recheck all your steps to make sure you operated the LS according to procedure . If your operations were correct, a fault has occurred. Refer all faults to Organizational Maintenance for repair.

v/(vi blank)

C

TM 9-1440-600-10 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Section I.

1-1 .

GENERAL INFORMATION

SCOPE

This technical manual (TM ) contains operating instructions for the PATRIOT Semitrailer Mounted Guided Missile Launching Station M901 . The TM describes the launching station (LS) and tells how to operate it .

Procedures for emplacing an LS ,

preparing for march

order, and reloading guided missiles (GM ) are provided . Preventive maintenance performed by the crewmember is also included . This TM is one of a series of publications covering operation and maintenance of the PATRIOT Weapon System . A complete list of PATRIOT TMs appears on the back cover.

1-2 .

MAINTENANCE FORMS , RECORDS , AND REPORTS

Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by TM 38-750 , The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) .

1-3.

REPORTING OF EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS

If your launching station

( LS)

needs improvement ,

let us know.

Send

us a quality

deficiency report (QDR) . You , the user , are the only one who can tell us what you don't like about your equipment . Let us know why you don't like the design or performance . Put it on a QDR SF 368. Mail it to us at : Commander

U.S. Army Missile Command ATTN : DRSMI - SNEM Redstone Arsenal , AL 35898

1-4.

NOMENCLATURE CROSS- REFERENCE

Launching station ( LS) equipment or groups of equipment which have a common name that is different from its official nomenclature are listed in Table 1-1 . The common names of the equipment or groups of equipment are listed in the first column ; the reference designation and official nomenclature in the second and third columns .

related to the common

name of each are listed

CONTINUED

1-1

TM 9-1440-600-10

TABLE 1-1 . NOMENCLATURE CROSS- REFERENCE LIST

COMMON NAME

Azimuth Actuator

REFERENCE DESIGNATION

A7A13

Azimuth Bearing

OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE

Rotary Electro- Mechanical Actuator Azimuth Ball Bearing

Azimuth Drive Motor

A7B3

Direct Current Motor

CCW Limit Switch (No.

A7A4/A7A5

Sensitive Switch

A1A10/A2A10

Electronic Equipment Fan Assem-

1/No. 2) Centrifugal Fan

bly

Clock Power Supply

A2A9

General Purpose 28 VDC 20 A Power Supply

CW Limit Switch (No. 1 /No.

A7A2/A7A3

Sensitive Switch

A2A1

Electronic Key Generator KG-30

A2A2

Computer-To-Communications

2) Data Link Terminal (DLT)

Interface Processor (CCIP)

Data Link Terminal Power

A2A3

Radio Receiver-Transmitter

A2A5

Radio Frequency Tuner

A2A6

Power Supply Assembly ( DLT)

A2A6

Power Supply Assembly (DLT)

A7A6/A7A7

Linear Electro- Mechanical Actuator

A7B1 /A7B2

Direct Current Motor

A6

DOD Model MEP- 113A 120/208

Supply Elevation Actuator (Roadside/Curbside) Elevation Drive Motor ( No. 1 Roadside, No. 2 Curbside) Generator Set

and 240/416-volt, 3- phase , 400 Hz , 15 kw Tactical Skid Mounted Diesel Engine Driven Generator Set

Guided Missile (GM )

4A1 (All positions)

Aerial- Intercept Guided Missile MIM -104 CONTINUED

1-2

TM 9-1440-600-10

TABLE 1-1 . NOMENCLATURE CROSS- REFERENCE LIST - Continued

COMMON NAME

REFERENCE DESIGNATION

Launcher Base Launching Station ( LS)

OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE

Launcher Base Welded Assembly 5

Semitrailer Mounted Guided Missile Launching Station M901

Launching Station Test Set

29

Guided Missile Launching Station Test Set AN/TSM- 165

( LSTS) LCU Display Panel

A1A14

Display Panel Assembly

Motor Control Unit (MCU)

A1A9

Motor Controller

Pointer

Alignment Bracket Gage A1A2/A2A4

Power Distribution Drawer

Power Supply

A1A4/A1A8

Logic Power Supply

Power Supply

A1A5

Ordnance Power Supply

Power Supply

A1A6/A1A7

Selectable Voltage Power Supply

Power Supply

A1A12

TWT Power Supply

Power Supply

A1A13

General Purpose 28 VDC 20 A Power Supply

Receiver-Transmitter

A2A3

Radio Receiver-Transmitter

Relay Assembly

A2A11

Launcher Missile Round Distributor

Power Distribution Unit (PDU )

(LMRD) Relay Assembly Semitrailer

42

M860A1

Electrical Connector Plug

Shorting Plug Travel Lock Sensor Switch

Semitrailer

A7A8/A7A9

Sensitive Switch

(No. 1 Curbside , No. 2

Roadside) Travel Lock Pin

Quick Release Pin

Turntable

Launcher Platform Turntable

Zero Lock Sensor Switch

A7A10

Sensitive Switch

Change 1

1-3

TM 9-1440-600-10 Section II .

1-5 .

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

EQUIPMENT PURPOSE , CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES

Purpose of Launching Station (LS) A mobile tactical

element of the PATRIOT air defense fire

unit .

Used to transport,

aim and launch the guided missiles ( GM ) . Remotely operated , carrying its own generator set and up to four GMs.

1-4

Capabilities and Features Major LS components : M860A1 Semitrailer Generator Set, 15 kw

Launcher Mechanics ( LM ) Launcher Electronics (LE) Launcher Electronics Module ( LEM ) Data Link Terminal Module ( DLTM ) Launcher Missile Round Distributor (LMRD ) Missile Round Cable Test Set (MRCTS) Mobile. Towed by a 10-ton tractor. Can be emplaced on a 10° slope .

Leveled with outriggers . Remotely operated under control of the engagement control station ( ECS) via a VHF link. Manually raised to a fixed angle for firing . Cannot be remotely raised or lowered . Rotates (azimuth train) on remote command . Reloaded at firing platoon ( FP) station .

LS and GM can be remotely tested . Built-in-test-equipment . Standard circuit modules for maintenance .

Change 1

t

TM 9-1440-600-10

1-6 .

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS

The launching station

( LS)

is mounted

on

an

M860A1

Semitrailer and towed by

an M983 Tractor . The sides of the LS are assigned : front (end near the generator set); rear (end near the wheels) ; roadside (driver's side when tractor is connected ) ; curbside (passenger's side when tractor is connected) .

CURBSIDE

ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

Change 1

1-5

TM 9-1440-600-10

1-6 .

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS

Continued

1

2

3

5

ROADSIDE

1

TRACTOR

M983 .

electrical system .

Tows the launching station (LS) . Has a special 100 ampere Provides over-the- road electrical power and power for the out-

riggers.

2

SEMITRAILER

M860A1 . Arigid mobile platform built to carry the PATRIOT LS.

3

OUTRIGGERS. One on each corner to level the LS.

Electrically operated by 28

Vdc power from the tractor.

4

(Deleted ) .

5

GENERATOR SET A6.

Provides on - board 120/208 Vac , 3- phase, 4-wire , 400 Hz ,

15 kw electrical power.

CONTINUED

1-6

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

1-6 .

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS- Continued

D

7

ROADSIDE

6

7

FRONT STOWAGE CONTAINER . Contains the weather shield kit and range pole .

LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE (LEM ) A1 .

Control center for the LS and

the guided missiles (GM) houses :

•

Power Control Panel (PCP) A1A3

•

Power Distribution Unit (PDU) A1A2

Launch Control Unit (LCU ) Chassis A1A1 •

LCU Display Panel A1A14 Seven power supplies Motor Control Unit ( MCU ) A1A9 Fan A1A10

Pressure Switch A1A11 Cables (Interconnect harness)

CONTINUED

1-7

TM 9-1440-600-10 1-6 .

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - Continued

9

8

ROADSIDE

8

DATA LINK MAST ASSEMBLY. The receiving and transmitting antenna for data link communication with the engagement control station ( ECS) . Raises, lowers, and rotates with the launcher mechanics (LM ) . Consists of: Lower Mast Section A7A11

•

Upper Mast Section A7A12 Data link antenna RF cables

ROADSIDE STOWAGE BOX. Part of the semitrailer. Contains : 9 Handtools Elevation handcranks

Ground rod Ground cable 42W3 Guided missile ( GM) cable clamp assemblies when GMs are not aboard . Guardrail

CONTINUED

1-8

TM 9-1440-600-10 1-6.

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - Continued

-10

ROADSIDE

10

11

LAUNCHER MISSILE ROUND DISTRIBUTOR (LMRD) A3 . Distribution and control point between launcher electronics ( LE) and GM . Houses :

11

•

Four distributor modules A3A1 thru A3A4

•

Six circuit cards A3A5 thru A3A10

•

Relay assembly A3A11

•

Wiring harness

REAR STOWAGE CONTAINER . Contains the aiming circle tripod .

CONTINUED

1-9

TM 9-1440-600-10 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS- Continued

1-6.

12

13

CURBSIDE

12

OUTRIGGER CONTROL PANEL . Contains controls and indicators for leveling the

LS. DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE ( DLTM ) A2 . Secures radio digital data link be13 tween ECS and LS. Contains:

Filter and Connector Panel A2A8 Power Input Filter Assembly (PIFA) A2A7 •

Power Distribution Unit ( PDU ) A2A4 Two Power Supplies A2A6 and A2A9 Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 Receiver-Transmitter A2A3

•

Computer-To-Communications Interface Processor (CCIP) A2A2 Electronic Key Generator KG -30 A2A1

•

Centrifugal Fan A2A10 Pressure Switch A2A11

•

Cables (interconnect harness)

CONTINUED

1-10

TM 9-1440-600-10

1-6 .

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - Continued

14

15

ख CURBSIDE

be

14

CURBSIDE STOWAGE BOX . Contains :

Gunner's quadrant

15

•

Aiming circle

•

Rod level for the range pole

CANISTER

HEATER

POWER

CONTROL BOX 23A1 . Contains controls and

in-

dicators for the canisters ' heaters.

CONTINUED

1-11

TM 9-1440-600-10 1-6 .

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - Continued

CURBSIDE

2

1

ROADSIDE 4

1

STEADYREST . Supports and locks the platform when lowered .

2

ELEVATION ACTUATORS A7A6 AND A7A7 . Two identical actuators , roadside A7A6 and curbside A7A7 , raise the platform to the firing angle .

3

LAUNCHER

BASE . A steel assembly bolted to the semitrailer that supports the

other LM assemblies .

4

LAUNCHER

PLATFORM . A welded steel structure that supports and alines the

four GMs.

CONTINUED

1-12

TM 9-1440-600-10 1-6 .

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS - Continued

CURBSIDE

5

6

ROADSIDE

7

5

TURNTABLE . A welded steel structure that rotates on the azimuth bearing to train the GM in azimuth .

6

AZIMUTH DRIVE UNIT. Drives turntable in azimuth . Consists of:

Azimuth Actuator A7A13

7

•

Azimuth Drive Motor A7B3

•

Digital Encoder A7A1

AZIMUTH BEARING . A steel ball bearing with gear teeth that supports the turntable , platform , and up to four GMs.

1-7.

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS

There are no differences between models .

1-13

TM 9-1440-600-10 1-8 .

EQUIPMENT DATA

WEIGHT :

78,690 lb (35,694 kg ) with tractor and four guided missiles (GMs)

(approximate)

63,690 lb (28,890 kg) with tractor , but w/o GMs 48,000 lb (21,773 kg ) w/o tractor, but with GMs

33,000 lb ( 14,969 kg ) w/o tractor or GMs LENGTH :

55.33 ft ( 16.86 m) with tractor 33.08 ft ( 10.08 m ) w/o tractor

WIDTH :

19.00 ft (5.79 m) with outriggers lowered 9.42 ft (2.87 m) with outriggers raised

HEIGHT :

34.66 ft ( 10.57 m ) approximately , to top of antenna when raised 13.10 ft (3.99 m) lowered

CURBSIDE

ROADSIDE

NOTE Weights with tractor include self- recovery winch .

CONTINUED

1-14

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10 1-8 .

EQUIPMENT DATA - Continued

EMPLACEMENT SLOPE

Maximum Ground Slope

10°

Maximum Slope After Leveling

5°

MAXIMUM WIND VELOCITY Road March

51 MPH (45 knots)

Emplacement and Reload

62.5 MPH (55 knots) Gusts to 96.5 MPH (85 knots) Hold downs required over 96.5 MPH (85 knots)

TEMPERATURE LIMITS

-50°F (-45.6°C) to 120° F (48.9°C) Generator Set A6 requires preparation for temperature below -25°F (-31 °C)

ELECTRICAL POWER INPUT REQUIREMENTS

Launching Station

120/208 Vac, 3- phase, 4-wire , 400 Hz , 15 kw

Over-the-Road (Tractor supplies)

28 Vdc, not greater than 217 watts

POSITIONING RATES

Elevation

0° to 38° in 2 minutes 32 seconds

Azimuth

90° in 30 seconds

POSITIONING LIMITS

Elevation

38° ± 20.6 minutes above the payload bed reference

Azimuth

Approximately 110° cw and ccw from the travel position

1-15/(1-16 blank)

TM 9-1440-600-10

CHAPTER 2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Section I.

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

During tactical operation the LS is unmanned , under control of the engagement control station ( ECS) digital data link. In this remote mode of operation the ECS can : test the LS and GM, point the

GM for firing

(azimuth train) ; give the GM prelaunch data ; give

the firing command .

In the local mode the LS may be safely manned . A secure voice radio set in the tractor is used for voice contact with the ECS . The ECS cannot train the LS nor fire a GM when

in the

local

mode . The

ECS can

perform

some tests

in

local .

There is

a 1 - minute delay when the LS is changed from local to remote . This delay time is called remote enable .

C GENERATOR SET A6 A

DO

LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1

G OUTRIGGER CONTROL PANEL

E

B

MISSILE ROUND CABLE TEST SET A8

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2

D

FL

LAUNCHER MECHANICS A7

CANISTER HEATERS POWER CONTROL BOX 23A1

CONTINUED

2-1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

A

Launcher Electronics Module A1

Equipment Description . Control center for LS

and guided missiles ( GM ) . Sends LS and GM status to ECS by data link . Contains BITE controls for testing

Launcher

Electronics

Module

( LEM ) A1

and

Launcher

Missile Round Distributor ( LMRD) A3 circuits when in local mode . Contains circuit breakers for routing main generator set power to LS. Also contains controls to energize power supplies and operate azimuth and elevation circuits . Will trip main ac power off if blower in Data Link Terminal Module ( DLTM ) A2 or LEM A1 fails .

D ROTAR MOD JA 133

LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14 POWER CONTROL PANEL A1A3

POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT A1A2

LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1

CONTINUED

2-2

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

A

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

Launcher Electronics Module A1 Equipment Description - Continued.

(1)

Power Distribution Unit A1A2.

(a)

Technical

Principles of Operation .

Power Distribution

Unit

(PDU) A1A2

distributes main ac power through LEM A1 and provides circuit breaker protection . (b)

Controls and Indicators.

MISSILE

Panel lights : Light control

panel

when

LAMPS

HEATER

AC

circuit breakers :

Control ac power to missile heater.

switch is ON .

UPR L MSL upper left missile heat-

•

er control.

UPR R MSL heater control .

upper

right

missile

LWR L MSL lower left missile heater control.

BLOWER OPR light : On indicates :

LWR R MSL heater control .

lower right

missile

Fan is on. Pressure switch is actuated . LAMPS switch is ON .

O

LOIR ELEX OLOUR ELEX MDL POWER DISTABUTION UNIT BLOWER OP

Θ

BLOWER

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAINA

OFF

OFF

LCHR ELEX PWR SPLT

LOH ELEX

OFF

OFF

PWR SPLY

GYROCLOCK PWRSPLY

LWRL MSL

LWRA MSL

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

MOTCONT UNITAC ON

PAFURT PWRSPL ON

OFF

OFF

FWR SPLY ON OFF

LAMPS OFF TEST

O

Θ

O

CONTINUED

O

Θ OFF

OFF

Θ

CNVC OUT CAMSTERHTR

MISSILE HEATER AC LMSL UPAR MSL

2-3

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

A

Launcher Electronics Module A1 Equipment Description - Continued .

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC•

MAIN A circuit breaker: Controls ac power and provides overload protection for :

LCHR ELEX 5 VDC PWR SPLY circuit breaker: Controls ac power and protects Power Supply A1A8. •

ORD PWR SPLY circuit breaker: Controls ac power and protects Power Supply A1A5.

•

LCHR ELEX 28 VDC PWR SPLY circuit breaker: Controls ac power and protects Power Supply A1A13.

MAIN B circuit breaker : Controls ac power and provides overload protection for: LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT MSL 5 VDC PWR SPLY circuit

°

O BLOWER OFF

breaker:

Controls ac power and protects

BLOWER ON OFF

Power Supply A1A4. MSL

GYRO / CLOCK

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAIN A ON OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC UPR& MSL UPE ON OFF OFF

MAIN B

PWR

SPLY circuit breaker:

Controls ac power and protects

LCHRELEX PWR5 VDCSPLY

FWRORDSPLY

LCHRELEX 28VDC SPLY PWR

OFF

OFF

OFF

CNVCOUT MCONT CANISTERHTR AC

Power Supply A1A7.

MSI VDC PWRSPLY

MSLCLOCK GYROPWRSPLY OFF TWTSPL PWR

OFF

OFF

OFF

LAMPS

Θ

OFF

MSL PAFUITL SPLY PWR

OFF

MSL PAFUITL PWR SPLY cir-

TUST

O

cuit breaker:

OFF

Θ

Controls ac power and protects

O

0

O

6

O

Power Supply A1A6. MSL TWT FIL PWR SPLY circuit breaker: LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS AC -

Controls ac power and protects BLOWER circuit breaker: Controls

Power Supply A1A12.

ac power to Fan A1A10 .

CONTINUED

J

2-4

TM 9-1440-600-10

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS –

2-1 .

Continued Launcher Electronics Module A1 Equipment Description - Continued .

A

CNVC OUT CANISTER HTR AC circuit breaker:

MOT CONT UNIT AC circuit breaker :

Controls ac power to convenience outlets and to Canister Heater Power

Controls ac power to Motor Control Unit A1A9.

Control Box 23A1 .

0

LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

LAMPS switch :

O

O

O

O BLOWER OPE

ON lights panel lights and supplies O

O

ELDWEA ON OFF

power to BLOWER OPR light.

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC MAIN A

MAIN B

OFF

OFF

PWNORDSPLY

LCHRELEX 20VOC PWRSPLY

OFF

OFF

CNVC OUTHTR CANISTER

MOTCONT UNITAC ON OFF

OFF

O

MSL &VOC PW SPLY ON OFF

GYROCLOCK

LAN MEL

WRAMSL

OFF

OFF

OFF

PAFUSTL PWR SPLY

TWTFIL PWRSPLY ON OFF

OFF

LAMPS ON OFF TEST

O

TEST tests panel lights and BLOWER OPR light.

O

O

CHIBFLER VDC SPLY ON

MISSILE EATER AC, UPR1 ON OFF OFF

O

Power Control Panel A1A3.

(2)

(a)

Technical Principles of Operation . Power Control Panel ( PCP) A1A3 con-

trols main ac and vehicle dc power to LS. It also monitors system on time .

(b)

Controls and Indicators .

MAIN POWER — RUN TIME - M1 meter:

•

Indicates total system on time .

AC- CB1 circuit breaker: Controls main ac power from Generator Set

A6 .

Trips off for over-

voltage or if air pressure is low in LEM A1 or DLTM A2.

• RUN TIME

M1

MAIN POWER AC DC

CB1

DC- CB2 circuit breaker: Controls 28 Vdc tractor DLT clock.

power for

CB2 CONTINUED

2-5

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1.

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

A

Launcher Electronics Module A1 Equipment Description - Continued .

(3)

LCU Display Panel A1A14 .

(a)

Technical

Principles

of Operation .

LCU

Display Panel A1A14 provides

controls to select local or remote operation , connect GMs, perform local BITE test, select launching station and firing platoon addresses, elevate and rotate the launcher mechanics , and monitor GM condition .

(b)

Controls and Indicators.

BITE lights (Red) : A B C D E indicates

POWER SUPPLIES BITE test

+5 VDC light (Green) : On inresults .

Lights cycle

during

test . If

dicates Power Supply A1A8 is test fails , light pattern indicates test

good . number.

All lights

steady if test

± 15 VDC light (Green) : On in-

passes.

dicates

15- volt A1A5 is good .

Power Supply

+28 VDC light (Green) : On indicates Power Supply A1A13 is good .

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

O VDC18 MISSILE UPPERL UPPER I HAZARD Ο Ο 이이 이이

O

NEETED 0101010 e

O

O

RAISE STOP 10 10: START

O O

O

LAUNCHING STA

READY

O

READY PLATFORM RAISED AZMUTH READY

O

•

PLATFORM-

POWER SUPPLIES O

LAUNCHER. LOCAL

O

BITE

ODC O OFF

CONTINUED

O

O

6

0

BITETEST STATUSLAMPS OFF STATUS OMM LAMPTEST

109

FIRINGPLATOON

O O

2-6

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

A

Launcher Electronics Module A1 Equipment Description - Continued.

MISSILE

UPPER L - Upper left guided missile (GM). •

UPPER R- Upper right GM .

•

LWR L - Lower left GM .

•

LWR R - Lower right GM.

MISSILE HAZARD lights ( Red ) : On indicates an

unsafe

GM at the

indicated

position

is in that position . Also indicates an empty canister, GM cable at that position .

if a live round or disconnected

MISSILE READYlights (Green ) : On indicates GM at the indicated

is safe ,

position

is at temperature ,

is electrically connected , and restraint pin is unlocked .

DISCONNECTED

lights (Yellow) : On indicates GM

at the in-

LAUNCH CONTROL UN

electronics

(LE ) .

LE

will

BITE

POWER SUPPLIES

-PLATFORM

MISSILE A LIPPER LIPPER

O

dicated position is electrically disconnected from launcher dis-

connect when GM fired , or for GM failure in launch sequence .

O (

LOCAL

Oi

MISSILE

O

о

Ο อ

KAISE O

O

position .

O

10110

Electrically connects or disconnects GM at the indicated

0

MESSME READY 이이 이이 READY PLATFORM RAISED AJORUTH OSCON MECTED 이이이이

CONNECT- DISC switches :

EING PLATOON 4 101

O

CONTINUED

2-7

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS . Continued

A

Launcher Electronics Module A1 Equipment Description - Continued .

LAUNCHER •

PLATFORM -

LOCAL- RMT switch :

PLATFORM

Sets launch station (LS) mode to local or remote . Circuit has

(Green) : On indicates launcher platform

1 -minute delay from local mode

is

to remote mode . Requires key

(38°).

elevated

RAISED

to

launch

light

angle

to change position .

AZIMUTH LOCAL light (Green): On indicates LS is

READY

light

(Green) : in

local

On indicates turntable can be

mode .

rotated. •

LCHR READYlight (Green) : On indicates LS can launch a

RAISE - STOP-LWR switch :

•

RAISE selects up motion

GM . Platform is at launch an-

for platform . gle,

GM

and

LEM A1

power

LWR

supplies are good.

selects down

mo-

tion for platform . LAUNCHING STA switch :

•

Sets LS address for logic input data .

STOP

stops

platform

motion .

FIRING PLATOON switch :

START switch :

Sets firing platoon address for

Starts platform to raise or lower when platform is on a limit. Di-

logic input data .

rection selected by RAISESTOP-LWR switch .

•

CCW-STOP - CW switch : Controls turntable rotation .

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

PLATFORM-

O

LAUNCHER

O

OWER SUPPLIES 000 MISSILE MOSALE HAZARO

0

Ο

READY# 0000 LCHR PLATFORM RAISED ASMUTH READY READY DISCON Macrta 0101010

๑

STOP O

101

RAISE

O

0

LAUNCHING STA

START о

FIRING TOON

CONTINUED O

O

HITETEST STATUSLAMPS NORMAL STATUS LAMPYEST

O

:0

2-8

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

A

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

Launcher Electronics Module A1 Equipment Description - Continued .

0

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

BITE

Panel lights :

PLIES

Light display panel LAMPS switch is ON .

Ο LAUNCHER-

PLATFORM

when

PANEL

MISSILE UPPERL UPPERA HAZARD 0000 O O

MISSALE READY LOVE PLATFORM 이이 이이 RAISED ADMUTH READY READY O DISCON NECTED 이이 이이 อ e LAUNCHINGSTA RAISE STOP CONNECT CONVEY CONNECT

O

PANEL LAMPS switch : START O

Turns four panel lights on and off.

O

FRINGPLATOON

1

BITE TEST STATUSLAMPS PANEL LAMPS O OM STATUS OIFF LAMPTEST

O

O

O

STATUS LAMPS switch : NORMAL — Normal brightness level for status lights . DIM

Dims brightness level of status

lights.

BITE

TEST- OFF - STATUS

LAMP

TEST switch : BITE TEST - Starts BITE test. STATUS

LAMP

status lights .

TEST -

Tests

Spring loaded to

all

OFF

from this position .

CONTINUED

2-9

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

B

Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description . Data Link radio for communication between LS and ECS. Has BITE circuits for testing data link terminal (DLT) assemblies . The DLT assemblies are :

Electronic Key Generator KG-30 A2A1 Computer-To-Communications - Interface Processor A2A2 Receiver-Transmitter A2A3 Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 DLT Power Supply A2A6

Contains all controls for operating

DLTM . Tractor supplies 28-Vdc over-the- road

power to keep a clock running when on road march .

Blower must be operating

before turning LEM A1 28-Vdc power supply on .

ELECTRONIC KEY GENERATOR KG-30 A1A1 (BEHIND PANEL) A2A2

POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT A2A4

8

48

26te

00

000

RADIO FREQUENCY TUNER A2A5 DLT POWER SUPPLY A2A6 RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER A1A3

COMPUTER-TO-COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE PROCESSOR A2A2 DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2

CONTINUED

2-10

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

B

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued .

(1 )

Electronic Key Generator KG-30 A2A1 .

(a) Technical Principles of Operation . and decrypts data sent to and from the ECS.

(b)

Key Generator KG-30 A2A1

encrypts

Controls and Indicators.

Transmitter Permuter card plunger lever: XMTR -

Lowered

releases transmitter per-

BOTH OFF - LT OFF ALM ON- LT ON ALM OFF- BOTH ON switch : Controls audible alarm and all front

muter card . Fully pressed and released causes code to be reset to 0.

panel lights .

— XMTR OPR light: On indicates start sequence complete

XMTR LT ON LT OFF AMON ALM OFF BOTH ON BOTH OFF

RCVR

and transmitter can process data. OPER

ALARM

PREP

RESET

CS RESET

OPER

POWER

XMTR - ALARM light: On indicates transmitter is in alarm state . Transmitter output is inhibited .

XMTR — RESET switch : Resets audible and visual alarm .

CS RESET switch : Starts alarm check cycle . When cycle completed , begins transmitter restart.

Transmitter permuter card : Inserted into card slot after code is set.

CONTINUED

2-11

TM 9-1440-600-10

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

2-1 .

Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued.

B

Receiver permuter card ver:

plunger le-

Receiver permuter card : Inserted into card slot after code is set.

Lowered releases receiver permuter card . Fully pressed and released causes code to be reset to 0.

RCVR - OPR light: On indicates receiver can

process

data . XMTR LT OFFON LT ON ALM ALM OFF BOTH ON BOTH OFF OPER

ALARM

PREP

RESET

RCV CS RESET

OPER

PREP 10

POWER

ON

OFF RCVR - POWER light: O

On indicates power supply voltages are at operating values .

RCVR

Permuter Door:

ON- OFF switch :

Houses transmitter and receiver per-

Controls ac power to Key Generator

muter card plungers . codes are reset to 0.

A2A1 power supply.

When opened

CONTINUED

2-12

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

B

Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued.

(2)

Computer-To-Communications Interface Processor A2A2.

(a)

Technical Principles of Operation . Computer- To-Communications Interface

Processor (CCIP) A2A2 acts as a storage buffer , encoder, and multiplexer of digital data transferred between LEM A1 and the ECS. Contains DLT clock that provides timing between LEM A1 and DLT. Includes BITE circuits for DLT.

(b)

Controls and Indicators.

FAULT•

SUMMARY FAULT light (Red) : On indicates processor fault.

•

TIME OF DAY display:

KEY GEN FAULT light :

Flashing red indicates Generator A2A1 fault.

Light emitting diode (LED ) disKey

play indicates net time in days, hours, minutes and seconds.

RESET switch - Resets fault lights on processor , tuner , and receiver-transmitter. Also tests processor lights.

TIME OF AY MIN HOUR

FAULT DLT SUMMARY FAULT KEYGEN FALAY TEST DAY RESET

PROPAGATION DELAY REQUEST SEC

ALTERNATE MASTER

NORMAL TIME SET

MODE OPROCESSOR CONTROL OUTN KORY

DAY OSC CAL 88888 TIME CONTROL OPERATE NECOUT LOADNET

SYNC OSYNC AUTO ECS-O LEA

RADIO ID LEW BCS-C

LBE

e

PROCESSOR

CONTROL

DLT TEST switch :

switch :

Used for DLT self-test and anUsed with DLT TEST switch to allow DLT tests for fault isola-

tenna tuning . Enables PROCESSOR CONTROL switch .

tion . Also enables tuner for adjustment of band pass filters.

CONTINUED

2-13

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

B

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORSContinued

Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued .

PROPAGATION DELAY REQUEST-

ECS BLight (Green): On indicates measurement of propagation delay from ECS-B is complete . Switch: Used by DLT designated

ECS-A or ECS-C in mode 2 to

measure propagation delay from ECS- B.

ECS CLight (Green): On indicates measurement of propagation delay from ECS-C is complete . Switch : Used by DLT designated ECS-A or ECS- B in mode 2 to measure propagation delay from ECS-C.

KGBY light ( Red) : On

indicates

key

generator is

bypassed .

PROPAGATION DELAY REQUEST ALT DLT TIME OF DAYSUMMARY ICSB FALA TEST FAULT KEYGEN DAY HOUR MIN SEC TEST ALTERNATE MASTER KONY NORMAL K RESEY SYNC MODE TIME SET OFF OFF DAY RADIO ID PROCESSOR CONTROL O AUTO SYNC OSC CAL ECS-C HATE ECS-4 00 10 TIME L&C LSA CONTR 051 LOADNET OPERATE REIN OSC OUT ECSA on OFF w © O

MODE switch : Selects DLT mode 1 or mode 2 op-

RADIO ID switch :

eration .

Allows identification of DLT as either ECS or LS and particular net of operation .

ALTERNATE MASTER switch : In

mode 2 ,

when

net,

designates

DLT

as

net

ECS-A is not in

ECS- B

master.

or

Used

ECS-C in

DLT

tests to start clock for certain fault conditions .

2-14

CONTINUED

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

B

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued .

SYNC light (Green) : On indicates DLT is synchronized .

TIME SET switches:

AUTO SYNC - Light (Yellow) : Used to enter net start time and net

On

indicates

resynchronization of

entry time.

DLT after activating AUTO switch was not successful . Switch :

Used

at the

end

SYNC

of

road

march to allow processor to automatically resynchronize DLT.

FAULT DLT SUMMARY FAULT TEST FAULT KEYGEN DAY 2

RESEY

TIME DAY. HOUR O MIN

PROPAGATION DELAY REQUEST SEC ALTERNATE MASTER SNC

Θ

MODE TIME SET OFF OFF GAY HOUR RADIOID AUTO SYNC OSC CAL HATE 88888 TIME CONTROL O OPERATE REFIN OOCOUT LOADNET SCSA OFF

PROCESSOR CONTROL

OSC CAL TIME CONTROL -

RATE light (Yellow) : OPERATE switch : When alining master oscillator , blinking rate indicates differ-

In

external

test

equipment frequency.

•

REF IN connector: External test equipment connection .

Used

when

alining

causes TIME

OF

DAY display to run 128 times faster than real time.

ence between master oscillator frequency and

mode 2 ,

LOAD NET switch : In on , loads time entered by TIME SET switches into TIME OF DAY display .

master oscillator.

OSC OUT connector : External test equipment connection . Used to measure mas-

CONTINUED

ter oscillator frequency.

2-15

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

B

Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued.

(3)

(a)

Receiver-Transmitter A2A3.

Technical Principles of Operation .

Receiver-Transmitter A2A3 generates

and modulates carrier frequency and demodulates received signal . Transmitter output power is 25 watts.

(b)

Controls and Indicators .

FAULT•

RECEIVER A2 A1 thru A4, A7 LEDs ( Red) :

FREQUENCY SELECT switches:

On indicates card fault.

Manually selects inputs to frequency synthesizers .

•

applicable

circuit

TRANSMITTER A1 -

A10 thru A14 LEDs (Red) : On indicates card fault.

FREQUENCY SELECT

0 Θ FAULT RECEIVER TRANSMITTER A1 A2 A3 A11 A12 A13

8888

A7 A14 O →

applicable

circuit

A10

FAULT RESET Q

FAULT RESET switch : Resets fault LEDs.

CONTINUED

2-16

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued.

B

(4)

eras

Technical

(b)

ac

Principles of Operation .

power to

DLTM

A2 and

Power Distribution

provides circuit

Unit

( PDU) A2A4

breaker protection to the

Controls and Indicators.

MAIN A circuit breaker: Controls ac power to CLK PWR and PWR SPLY circuit breaker.

CNVC OUT circuit breaker: Controls ac power to convenience outlets.

PWR SPLY circuit breaker: Controls ac power to Power Supply A2A6 through MAIN A circuit breaker.

O Controls ac power to FAN A2A10 . Θ

CNVC OUT ON

O

O

OFF

G

о

G

OFF LAMPS TEST

о DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UIT O PROCESSOR MAINA ON ON ON C O Θ OFF OFF OFF BLOWEROP BLOWER CLKPAR ON ON

O

BLOWER circuit breaker :

→

O

cut

(a)

distributes main branch circuits .

ΤΟ

DOVE

Power Distribution Unit A2A4.

о

о

BLOWER OPR light: On indicates: •

CLK PWR circuit breaker:

Fan A2A10 is on . Pressure Switch A2A11

Controls ac power to Clock Power is ac-

Supply A2A9 through MAIN A circuit breaker.

tuated . LAMPS switch is ON.

CONTINUED

2-17

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

B

Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued .

LAMPS switch : ON

lights panel lights and supplies

ac power to BLOWER OPR light.

Panel Lights:

TEST - tests panel lights and BLOWER OPR light .

Light control switch is ON .

OFF BLOWER ON OFF

G

OFF LAMPS ON OFF TEST

→

0

Clock

LAMPS

OFF

OFF

О

28 VDC light (Green) : On indicates A1A9 is on .

OFF CLK PWR ON

BLOVER OPR

DGTL PROCESSOR ON

when

O

DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT → MAIN PWR SPLY ON A ON 28 VDC

CNVC OUT ON

panel

O

0

DGTL PROCESSOR circuit breaker:

Power Supply

Controls ac power to cessor A2A2.

Digital

Pro-

CONTINUED

2-18

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

B

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS – Continued

Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued .

(5)

Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5.

(a) Technical Principles of Operation . Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 is interface between Receiver-Transmitter A2A3 and the data link antenna . The tuner monitors power levels , filters the signal , and switches for transmit or receive functions .

(b)

Controls and Indicators.

POWER CONTROL·-

MANUAL control : Selected

by

MODE

TUNE-

switch .

Controls output power for tuning bandpass filter.

ANT switch : Allows tuning three filters for minimum reverse power.

MODE Switch : Selects either manual or auto•

matic

control

of

DLT output

Light (Yellow) : On indicates tuner controls en-

power. abled for bandpass filter tuning .

AUTO light (Green) : On indicates DLT output power

is on automatic control .

MODE AUTO

FAULT

TUNE

POWER CONTROL MANUAL

ANT

RESET

FREQ

Frequency Dial : Indicates operating frequency .

FORWARD POWER REVERSE POWER

TEST

DELAY

TUNE

DELAY control : Adjusts

rf phase .

Used with

TUNE

control to adjust for minimum reverse power.

FREQ control :

Selects operating frequency . CONTINUED

2-19

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1.

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

B

Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued .

FAULT•

•

FORWARD POWER -

RESET switch :

TEST switch :

Resets tuner fault latches and

When in TEST activates FOR-

tests all front panel lights.

WARD POWER meter. •

Light (Red) : On indicates tuner fault.

Meter: Indicates forward power measured at bandpass filter input.

POWER CONTROL MANUAL MODE AUTO

TUNE ANT

FAULT RESET

FORWARD POWER REVERSE POWER TEST

O

FREQ

DELAY

TUNE

Co の

REVERSE POWER meter: Indicates reverse power measured at bandpass filter input.

TUNE Control : Fine tunes

rf filters .

Used

with

DELAY control to adjust for minimum reverse power.

CONTINUED

2-20

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

B

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

Data Link Terminal Module A2 Equipment Description - Continued .

(6)

DLT Power Supply A2A6.

(a) Technical Principles of Operation . DLT Power Supply A2A6 provides dc power for DLT subassemblies.

(b)

Controls and Indicators.

POWER SUPPLY FAULT – PS1 thru PS5 LEDs (Red) : On indicates a fault in appli-

cable power supply . PS6 LED ( Red ) : On indicates a fault in DC to AC converter.

POWER SUPPLY FAULT

O PS1

O

O PS2

NON-INTERRUPT

PS3

LAMP TEST

PS4

O PS5

PS6

O

NONINTERRUPT LED :

LAMP TEST switch : (Red) : On indicates noninterrupt powTests LEDs . er is missing .

CONTINUED

2-21

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

C

Generator Set A6 Equipment Description .

(1 )

Technical Principles of Operation . Diesel driven Generator Set A6 supplies

on-board electrical power for launching station operation . Carries fuel for 8 hours operation . All controls located on control hours of fuel remains .

(2)

panel .

Sends fuel state to

ECS to alert

ECS when

1.5

Controls and Indicators.

Panel lights: Lights control

panel

when PANEL

LIGHTS switch is set to ON.

FAULT INDICATOR

O

e

GENERATOR

ENGINE

O

DOGARTTEMPERATURE

OKO

お ㅎ оо quneininon esto

(be

CCONTROL CIRCUITBREAKER LFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

CONTINUED

2-22

TM 9-1440-600-10

C

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

Generator Set A6 Equipment Description - Continued .

ENGINE -

AIR CLEANER

CONDITION light

(Red) :

On

indicates

engine

air

cleaner is clogged . •

OIL PRESSURE gage : Indicates engine lubricating oil pressure . COOLANT TEMPERATURE

Indicates engine

gage :

coolant tem-

perature . • •

FUEL LEVEL gage : Indicates main tank fuel level . BATTERY CHG AMMETER meter: Indicates dc current flow to and from battery .

•

RUNNING TIME hours.

•

ENGINE PRIMER switch : Actuates ether starting aid when STARTRUN-STOP switch held to START .

•

START-RUN - STOP switch :

meter: Indicates total

•

START - Starts engine.

•

STOP - Stops engine.

0 ·

2-1 .

system

FAULT INDICATOR

O

ENGINE

operating time in

GENERATOR

O

O

LONDITION

OPERATION

STOW

OPEN

OPERATION

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT PULLBREAKER FOR EMERGENCYSTOP

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-23

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

C

Generator Set A6 Equipment Description - Continued .

GENERATOR – HERTZ frequency meter: Indicates output frequency in Hertz.

PERCENT POWER kilowatt meter: Indicates power output in percent of rated power . PERCENT RATED CURRENT METER : Indicates percent of rated current output of phase selected by AMPS- VOLTS switch . •

VOLTS - AMPS switch : •

L1 - L2

L2- L3

selects line -to- neutral voltage to be in-

L3- L1

dicated on VOLTS A.C. meter.

L1 -LO

L2- LO

L3- LO : L1

L3 selects line-to- neutral volt-

L2

age to be indicated on VOLTS A.C. meter and line current to be indicated on PERCENT RATED CURRENT meter. •

VOLTS A.C. meter: Indicates line voltage output selected by AMPSVOLTS switch .

•

FREQUENCY ADJUST rheostat : Used to adjust generator set output frequency.

•

SYNCHRONIZING LIGHTS : Indicates frequency is synchronized between two parallel generator sets . VOLTAGE ADJUST rheostat : Used to adjust generator set output voltage .

O

o

PALLYINDICATOR O 301 * O

ENGINE

GENERATOR

111

O

оо

O

O

Q

お

Jo!

CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCY STOP

CONTINUED

2-24

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

C

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

Generator Set A6 Equipment Description - Continued .

O

FALAT INDICATOR

O

O Ꮻ

GENERATOR

ENGINE CONDON

O O

COOLMESFELPE

oo

ð GROT VOLTAOP

6546 BATTLESHER

FARMERS

BATTLAGE

OPERATION о

O

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREARER PULLFOR EMERGENCY STOP

GENERATOR - Continued CKT BRK light (Yellow) : LS.

•

On

indicates ac power is connected to

CKT BRK switch : CLOSE connects ac power to LS. OPEN disconnects ac power from LS.

•

PANEL LIGHT switch : Turns panel lights on and off. VOLTAGE SENSING switch : Permits local or remote monitoring of the voltage regulator circuit.

•

PARALLEL OPERATION - SINGLE UNIT OPERATION switch : Selects single unit or parallel unit operation . BATTLE SHORTlight (Red) : On indicates generator set is operating with BATTLE SHORT switch set to ON. BATTLE SHORT switch: ON

bypasses

protective

devices circuits

except overspeed and short circuit to allow emergency operation . Also locks out starter circuit.

CONTINUED

2-25

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

C

Generator Set A6 Equipment Description - Continued .

FAULT INDICATOR LOW OIL PRESS light (Red) : On indicates engine oil pressure less than 20 ± 2 psi . •

•

OVERSPEED light (Red ) : On indicates engine speed reached 2400 to 2450 rpm . COOLANT HIGH

TEMP light (Red ) :

On

indicates

engine

coolant

temperature above 217°F ± 3°F ( 102.8°C ± 167°C). NO FUEL light (Red ) : On indicates day tank contains fuel for about 30 seconds operation .

O

O

O

O

O

SHORT CIRCUIT light (Red): On indicates the

FAULT INDICATOR ·

GENERATOR

ENGINE

short circuit

protective

device has operated .

O

OVERLOAD light (Red): On indicates output load

SOOLAND "DWATE on any phase is 130% of rated load .

FREE ART UNDER (Red) : CIRCDCALLONTROL BREAKER ENCYFORSTOP

о

VOLT

On

light

indicates

in-

stantly if output voltage is below 48 volts , or in 6 ± 2 seconds if output voltage drops to 99 ± 4 volts.

1 AMP fuse : Protects fault light circuits .

UNDER

FREQ

light

(Red) : On indicates output frequency less than 370 ± 5 Hz .

TEST OR RESET switch : Tests and resets fault lights .

•

OVER VOLT light (Red) : On indicates output voltage above 153 ± 3 Hz for 180 milliseconds .

DC CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER : REVERSE POWER light Applies 24 Vdc to control circuits . Pull to remove 24 Vdc from control circuits .

(Red):

On

indicates re-

verse power is over 20 percent.

CONTINUED

2-26

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

D

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORSContinued

Launcher Mechanics A7 Equipment Description . Launcher Mechanics A7 is an electrically operated mechanical structure . It stores, aims , and serves as a stable platform for firing up to four GM .

(1 )

Engagement Control Handle.

(a)

Technical Principles of Operation . The engagement control handle is used

to select operating modes for Launcher Mechanics A7. It must be in for the ECS to train the LS when in remote operation .

(b)

ROTATE position

Controls and Indicators.

5T

ROTATE ELE >

nile tripia Muot

ROADMARCH ROADSIDE

ROTATE position :

Disengages zero lock plunger and engages azimuth

drive gears . Must be in this position to rotate launcher mechanics . Engages zero lock plunger and engages azimuth drive gears. Must be in this position to elevate launcher mechanics. ELEV position :

ROAD MARCH : Engages zero lock plunger and disengages azimuth drive gears. Must be in this position to safely perform road march .

CONTINUED

2-27

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

D

Launcher Mechanics A7 Equipment Description - Continued .

(2)

Steadyrest. A travel lock pin on each steadyrest locks platform down . When

pins are inserted they press travel lock sensor switches plunger. This signals launcher electronics that platform is locked down and stops platform from being raised .

(3) erated by

Elevation Actuators A7A6 and A7A7. Raise platform to firing position . OpRAISE - STOP - LWR switch and

An extend limit switch

in

START switch on

LCU

Display Panel A1A14 .

roadside Actuator A6 automatically stops drive

motors when

raised to 38°. Limit switch in curbside Actuator A7A7 is a backup switch . If backup switch operates , power to azimuth and elevation drives stop . Both actuators retract limit switches operate at 0° (platform on steadyrest) and stop drive motors when lowering . Covers over handcrank extension hold handcrank safety switches closed . When covers are removed , safety switches open and remove power to azimuth and elevation drive motors.

(4)

Launcher Base . Supports other LM assemblies . CW and ccw limit switches

limit turntable rotation .

First ,

No.

1 , switch in either direction stops azimuth drive motor

110° from 180° position . Second , No. 2 , switch is a backup to prevent damage . Switches are operated by switch bracket on azimuth bearing . When either No. 1

switch operates ,

azimuth drive in that direction stops . If either No. 2 switch is operated , power to azimuth and elevation drives is stopped .

(5)

Launcher Platform . Supports , alines and raises the four GM . Eight alinement

pins aline the two bottom GM . Four pins for each GM . Each GM canister has four alinement pins on top to aline top GM .

(6)

Turntable.

Bolted

between platform and

azimuth bearing .

Rear of elevation

actuators are bolted to turntable to allow them to rotate . Actuating arm for antenna lower mast assembly is also bolted to turntable . This allows antenna to turn with the GM. An ALIGNMENT DATUM is used

as a reference point when

measuring

LS angle with the

gunner's quadrant .

CONTINUED

2-28

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

D

Launcher Mechanics A7 Equipment Description - Continued .

(7) Platform

Azimuth Drive Unit .

Drives turntable through azimuth bearing to point GM .

has to be elevated to get dc power to motor. In

local mode , CCW- STOP- CW

switch on LCU Display Panel A1A14 operates this unit . In remote mode ,

ECS can train

GM. Gear trains inside actuator are connected and disconnected by engagement control handle. This handle operates an arm on actuator through a push - pull control cable . When engagement control handle is in ROTATE or ELEV position gear train is connected . When engagement control handle is in ROADMARCH position gear train is disconnected . When gear train is disconnected LM is not held in azimuth by azimuth drive unit . An overspeed switch in actuator stops

electric

power to dc motor if motor overspeeds .

Switch resets

automatically . Digital Encoder A7A1 sends azimuth position to ECS by digital data link .

(8)

Azimuth Bearing . Supports load of turntable , launcher platform , and four GM .

Zero lock plunger locks bearing

in

180° position .

Plunger is engaged when turntable is

positioned at 180° and engagement control handle is in ELEV or ROADMARCH

position .

Plunger is disengaged in ROTATE position . Zero lock sensor switch signals LE that zero lock plunger is locked or unlocked . When 180° pointer is alined with alinement strip gage on base, turntable is at 180° position .

(9)

Data Link Mast Assembly.

Used to receive and transmit data between LS

and ECS . Mast assembly raises and rotates with launcher platform .

CONTINUED

2-29

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

E

Missile Round Cable Test Set A8 Equipment Description .

(1 )

Technical Principles of Operation . Portable test set used to insure that sys-

tem is safe before connecting a signal cable to GM . Has self-test feature . Requires power from LE to operate .

(2)

Controls and Indicators .

NO GO light ( Red) : On indicates test failed . STEP

SAFE TO TEST light (Green) : On indicates LE safe to test.

dis-

plays test number.

POWER ON light : Indicates power on .

GO light (Green) : On indicates tests passed . STEP displays 99.

POWER switch :

POWER ON

Turns power on.

OFF

OWER BETO NOO

GO RESET

START START switch :

STEP Starts test when STEP reset to 00 . ⚫

Θ

RESET switch : Resets STEP to 00 .

Θ

Θ STEP display: Displays test number 00 to 99. When test fails , displays failed test number and NO GO light is on . When test passes , displays 99 and GO light is on.

CONTINUED

2-30

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

F

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Continued

Canister Heaters Power Control Box 23A1 Equipment Description .

(1 ) heaters.

Technical Principles of Operation . Controls ac power to each of the canister

(2)

Controls and Indicators.

CANISTER HEATER POWER UPR L light (Green ) : On indicates power applied to upper left canister heater. UPR L switch: Controls ac power to upper left canister heater . LWRL light (Green ) : On indicates power applied to lower left canister heater. LWR L switch: Controls ac power to lower left canister heater. UPR R light (Green) : canister heater.

On

indicates

power applied to

upper right

• UPR R switch: Controls ac power to upper right canister heater. LWR R light (Green) : canister heater.

On

indicates

power applied to lower right

• LWR R switch: Controls ac power to lower right canister heater.

0

UPA L LWRL UPR R LWR R

O

O TTETT TT

0

O

CANISTER HEATER POWER

CONTINUED

T

2-31

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-1 .

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR'S CONTROLS AND INDICATORSContinued

G

Outrigger Control Panel Description .

(1 )

Technical Principles of Operation . Controls 28 Vdc power to semitrailer out-

rigger motors . Power supplied by tractor.

(2)

Controls and Indicators.

OUTRIGGERS -

REAR switches :

POWER switch : Controls power to OUTRIGGERS switches and LEVELING DIAL

Up raises outrigger. Down lowLIGHT.

er outrigger. Top switch controls roadside . Bottom switch controls curbside . FRONT switches: Up raises outrigger. Down lowers outrigger. Top switch controls roadside . Bottom switch

OFF

ON

POWER

controls curbside .

REAR OUTRIGGERS FRONT

Leveling Dial Light : Lights leveling device when POWER

switch is ON .

LEVELING DEVICE : Circular bubble -type launching station in center of five

level .

When

is level , bubble is circles marked on

glass . Each circle indicates 1 ° off level .

2-32

TM 9-1440-600-10

Section II .

2-2.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES

GENERAL

The

purpose

of preventive

maintenance

checks

and

services

( PMCS)

is to detect

the first signs of defects and to insure that corrective action is taken before serious equipment damage or faults occur.

2-3.

RESPONSIBILITY

Crewmembers are responsible for performing PMCS in accordance with the following paragraphs .

2-4.

INTERVALS

The standards for determining frequency of PMCS are operating hours and road movement. Since operating time and mileage in the field cannot be accurately predicted , calendar intervals are used . The calendar intervals are based on frequent use . Operation

under

unusual conditions , such as extreme temperature or abnormal operating periods , may require that intervals the

need.

During

be adjusted .

long

Reduce the intervals when

inactive periods extend the

unusual conditions indicate

intervals when authorized

by higher

authority.

2-5.

GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR ALL SERVICES AND INSPECTIONS

General . The general

procedures defined

In addition to any specific procedures given ,

in this paragraph apply to all

general

PMCS.

procedures that apply to an item

will be performed without instructions .

b.

Definition of Terms . General inspection of each item

is a check to see if the

item is in good condition , correctly assembled or stowed , secure ,

not excessively worn ,

not leaking , and properly lubricated . Inspection of each item applies to supporting or connecting materiel associated with it.

CONTINUED

T

2-33

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-5.

GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR ALL SERVICES AND INSPECTIONS- Continued

Terms associated with inspections are defined below:

(1 )

Inspection for good condition

is usually an external visual inspection to de-

termine if the unit is damaged beyond safe or serviceable limits . Good condition is defined further as meaning

not

bent or twisted ,

chafed or burred ,

broken or cracked ,

bare or

frayed , dented or collapsed , torn or cut, or deteriorated .

(2)

Inspection of a unit to see that it is correctly assembled or stowed is usually

a visual inspection to see if the

unit is in its normal

position

in the materiel and if all

its parts are present and in their correct relative position .

(3) inspection

Inspection of a unit to determine if it is secure is usually an external visual or a check by hand

or wrench for looseness .

Such an

inspection

includes

brackets , lockwashers , locknuts , locking wires, or cotter pins as well as connecting tubes , hoses, or electrical cables.

(4)

Excessively worn means beyond serviceable limits , or worn to a point where

the unit is likely to fail if it is not replaced before the next scheduled inspection . Excessive wear of mating

parts

motion). It includes

or

linkage

is

usually

evidenced

by too

not readable as applied to markings ,

much

play (lash

data and caution

or lost

plates, and

printer matter.

(5)

Such expressions as " adjust if necessary" or " replace if necessary" are not

used in PMCS procedures . It is understood that whenever inspection

reveals the need

for adjustment , repair, or replacement , the necessary action will be taken .

STAY CLEAR OF LAUNCHER MECHANICS PLANE OF ROTATION UNTIL KEYSWITCH IS SET TO LOCAL, LOCAL LIGHT IS ON, AND KEY IS REMOVED . WHEN KEYSWITCH IS SET

WARNING TO RMT, TURNTABLE CAN BE ROTATED REMOTELY CAUSING INJURY TO PERSONNEL WITHIN PLANE OF ROTATION .

CONTINUED )

2-34

TM 9-1440-600-10 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR ALL SERVICES AND INSPECTIONS - Continued

2-5.

Conditions. Before starting PMCS you must verify that the

LOCAL- RMT switch

on LCU Display Panel A1A14 is set to LOCAL and the key is removed . If the system is energized verify that the

LOCAL lamp is on . When PMCS is complete the launching

station (LS) may rejoin the firing platoon or execute road march .

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES

2-6 .

Preventive

maintenance

crewmember are listed

checks

below .

These

and

services

( PMCS)

procedures are to be

to

be

performed

performed

by the

at the intervals

listed . All faults found will be reported in accordance with TM 38-750.

W = Weekly

M = Monthly

Q = Quarterly

S

Semiannually

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE CHECKED

ITEM NO.

PROCEDURE WMQS

1

GENERATOR SET (GS) A6 Refer to TM 5-6115-464-12 for PMCS .

1.1

SEMITRAILER , FLATBED , LAUNCHER GROUP Refer to TM 9-2330-357-14& P for PMCS.

1.2

LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE (LEM ) A1 and DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE ( DLTM ) A2 Drain water from module .

NOTES

1.

Do this step daily if humidity is high.

2.

Drain plug is captive . It does not come out .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-35

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-6 .

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES - Continued

M = Monthly

W = Weekly

Q = Quarterly

S = Semiannually

INTERVAL

ITEM NO.

ITEM TO BE CHECKED PROCEDURE WMQS

Under front center of each module , loosen drain plug , using 3/4-inch wrench . Leave drain plug loose until all water drains . Tighten drain plug . If water is in

either access door channel ,

remove it with

a rag or sponge . Inspect external surfaces of each module for:

Cleanliness •

Chipped paint Corrosion Breaks or cracks

2

LAUNCHER MISSILE ROUND DISTRIBUTOR ( LMRD) A3 Drain water from module .

NOTES

1.

Do this step daily if humidity is high.

2.

Drain plug is captive . They do not come out.

CONTINUED

2-36

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-6 .

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES - Continued

W = Weekly

M = Monthly

Q = Quarterly

S = Semiannually

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE CHECKED PROCEDURE

ITEM NO. WMQS

Under front of module , 3/4-inch wrench .

loosen three

drain

plugs ,

using

Leave drain plugs loose until all water drains . Tighten three drain plugs .

Inspect external surfaces for: Cleanliness •

Chipped paint Corrosion

Breaks or cracks

3

EXTERNAL CABLES , CONNECTORS , AND RECEPTACLES

NOTE

Do not disconnect cable connectors for this inspection .

Inspect for breaks , tears , and physical damage.

4

LAUNCHER MECHANICS ( LM ) Inspect external surfaces for: •

•

Cleanliness

Chipped paint Corrosion

Breaks or cracks

CONTINUED

2-37

TM 9-1440-600-10

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES - Continued

2-6.

W = Weekly

M = Monthly

Q = Quarterly

S = Semiannually

INTERVAL ITEM TO BE CHECKED ITEM NO. WMQS

PROCEDURE AZIMUTH BEARING

5 Oil gear teeth per LO 9-1440-600-14. Grease bearings per LO 9-1440-600-14 . ELEVATION ACTUATORS

6 Grease rod-end fitting bearings per LO 9-1440-600-14. ANTENNA MAST EJECTION LINK 7 Grease rod-end fitting bearings per LO 9-1440-600-14 .

2-7.

LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS

Lubrication instructions are in LO 9-1440-600-14.

2-38

TM 9-1440-600-10

Section III .

2-8.

OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS

EMPLACEMENT

SITE PREPARATION — A site selection the emplacement site .

and

This team will position

evaluation team will select and mark

marker stakes for launching station

( LS)

location and orientation . The LS crewmembers will position the LS exactly on these markers . Refer to TM 9-1425-600-10 for site preparation information . ORIENTING AND ALINING - Accurate target firing data and

successful target en-

gagement largely depend on alinement of the firing platoon (FP) . The LS is alined after the radar set ( RS) has been oriented to a north reference . The preferred emplacement position for the LS is with its rear end toward the RS. The RS should be within a 30° arc centered on the LS. If the proper procedures are not carefully followed , effective target engagement will be degraded . The FP is normally oriented so that north , east, south , and west coordinates are accurately displayed at the engagement control station (ECS) . The north reference is necessary for radar location and orientation and for generating remote azimuth training commands. The LS is oriented with the FP by determining

its

position relative to the RS. To determine this position the following angles must be measured with an aiming circle . •

Azimuth angle between LS and RS.

•

Azimuth angle between LS and north reference .

•

Elevation angle between LS and RS .

ROADSIDE

30°

LAUNCHING STATION

RADAR SET

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-39

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

LAUNCHER LOCATION/ALINEMENT DATA

(1 )

LS NUMBER

zz

heeeeeennnnnnn

(2)

UTM

(3)

METERS ALTITUDE

(4)

BRNG NREF TO LS Bearing of Reference M2 Sighted on Launcher M2

(5)

(6)

•

0

BRNG LS TO NREF Bearing of Launcher Sighted on Reference M2

0

BRNG LS TO RDR Bearing of Launcher M2 Sighted on Radar M2

(7)

0

0

EL LS TO RDR Elevation of Launcher M2 •

0

·

0

Sighted on Radar M2

(8)

(9)

(10)

ROLL

CROSS ROLL

MISSILE UMBILICALS CONNECTED

0

UL

UR

LL

LR

NOTE UTM Emplacement , Fill in items 1 , 2, 3 , 4 , 5 , 8 , 9 , 10 LOS Emplacement, Fill in items 1 , 4, 5, 6 , 7 , 8, 9 , 10

2-40

CONTINUED

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

The procedure in this paragraph is used when line-of-sight ( LOS) exists between the LS and the RS. If LOS does not exist , the crewmembers will have to perform field survey and traverse as described in FM 6-2 , Field Artillery Survey. The data from the field survey and traverse

operation

will have to be converted

into the form

required

for

LOS em-

placement.

LS roll and cross- roll angles must be measured with a gunner's quadrant to determine LS attitude. Instructions for measuring these angles are included in this paragraph .

All data required for orienting and alining the LS must be entered on the LAUNCHER LOCATION /ALINEMENT DATA FORM . The form

must be accurately completed

and the

information promptly given to the ECS . A sample of the form is on the opposite page . BLACKOUT CONDITIONS - Emplacement is essentially the same during

daylight,

nighttime , and blackout conditions . Nighttime does not always mean blackout . When blackout conditions are in effect blackout flashlights must be used . At night when blackout conditions are

not in

effect

regular lights

may be

used . The following

general

precautions

must

be observed when emplacing under nighttime or blackout conditions.

Use signals per FM 21-60.

Use flashlights . Be aware of each crewmember's position . Get help when tasks cannot be easily performed in the dark. Put tools and equipment away after using them . Make all movements sure and deliberate . Do not climb on the LS unless required . Crewmembers on the LS must be watched by another crewmember and warned of unsafe conditions . • •

Do not move vehicles without a guide . Observe all cautions and warnings called out in the procedure and

marked

on the equipment . Do not rush .

When light is limited , guides must be used to direct the driver to the site . Guide's general instructions are as follows :

•

Inspect the path the LS must follow for soft spots , shoulders, and obstructions . Either clear the area or guide the driver around the hazards. Describe the approach to the driver. The guide's position

is left-front of the vehicle ,

at a safe distance from the

vehicle , in sight of the driver . If visibility is bad , use two guides , one in front and one by the side of the driver.

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-41

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

Do not lose visual contact with the driver. If visual contact is lost , the driver must stop the vehicle. Orientation and alinement at night are essentially the same as during daylight .

GENERATOR SET A6

OUTRIGGER CONTROL PANEL

CURBSIDE

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2

FRONT STOWAGE CONTAINER

CURBSIDE STOWAGE BOX CANISTER HEATERS POWER CONTROL BOX 23A1

CONTINUED

2-42

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

E: DATA LINK MAST ASSEMBLY

GUIDED MISSILE (4)

ROADSIDE

LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE

ROADSIDE STOWAGE BOX ENGAGEMENT CONTROL HANDLE

REAR STOWAGE CONTAINER

Personnel Required . Three Tools and Equipment Required . Aiming Circle, M2, with equipment Quadrant, Gunner's Rod , Ground , with attachments ( MIL- R- 11461 , STYLE 2 , TYPE 2)

Lead , Electrical (Grounding Cable) , 42W3 ( 10253829-9) Pole , Range

Level , Rod Hammer, Hand Sledge , 6- Lb Pliers, Slip Joint, 12-In . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1 /4- In .

CONTINUED

T

2-43

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8.

EMPLACEMENT Continued

MISSILES DROPPED ACCIDENTALLY MAY BE DANGEROUS.

La REPORT ANY DROP OF 12 INCHES OR MORE IMMEDIATELY WARNING

AND PROCEED AS FOLLOWS :

IF MISSILE IS STILL IN CANISTER , CONSIDER MISSILE TO BE UNARMED. DO NOT MOVE MISSILE FOR 1 HOUR AFTER INCIDENT. AFTER 1 HOUR , UNIT COMMANDER MAY DIRECT MISSILE TO BE REMOVED TO DEPOT. IF

MISSILE

IS

PARTLY

OR

COMPLETELY

OUT

OF

CANISTER, CONSIDER MISSILE TO BE ARMED. TELL YOUR UNIT COMMANDER AND EVACUATE AREA.

DEATH MAY RESULT FROM EXPLOSION .

Le WARNING

CREWMEMBERS ON LAUNCHING STATION (LS) MUST WATCHED BY OTHER CREWMEMBERS AND WARNED

BE OF

UNSAFE CONDITIONS TO PREVENT INJURY.

A DAMAGED CANISTER CAN INDICATE AN UNUSABLE MISSILE . REPORT ANY CANISTER DAMAGE IMMEDIATELY. UNIT COMMANDER WILL DECIDE IF MISSILE IS TO BE REPLACED OR USED.

CAUTION

DO NOT MOVE GUIDED MISSILE (GM ) WITHIN 50 FEET OF AN RF SOURCE THAT RADIATES 50 WATTS OR MORE .

CAUTION

1

POSITION LS AT PREPARED SITE .

a.

One crewmember guide driver to position LS exactly on markers.

DO NOT LEAVE TRACTOR UNATTENDED WITHOUT CHOCK-

Le WARNING

ING WHEELS . TRACTOR MAY ROLL , RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

CONTINUED 2-44

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

-

Continued .

1

b.

Pull out tractor PARKING BRAKE control , place transmission range selector lever in neutral (N ) , and leave engine running .

C.

Remove chock blocks from stowage in tractor roadside stowage box and chock tractor rear wheels as follows:

STOWAGE eee

(1 )

eee

ee

If tractor is facing uphill , place chock blocks behind tractor rear wheels ,

both

curbside

and

roadside .

ROADSIDE

(2)

If tractor is facing downhill , place chock blocks in front of rear wheels, both curbside and roadside .

OMUORO ROADSIDE

(3)

If tractor is level , place chock block in front of rear wheel on curbside and behind rear wheel

CURBSIDE ONLY

on roadside .

ROADSIDE ONLY

ROADSIDE

Through remainder of this procedure , chock blocks will be shown

NOTE

for tractor as in level position Chock as described in step c.

above

unless grade

is shown .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-45

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

ELECTRICAL POWER MUST NOT BE APPLIED TO LS UNTIL

Le

LS IS SUITABLY GROUNDED. DEATH BY ELECTROCUTION WARNING CAN RESULT FROM OPERATING AN UNGROUNDED LS .

2

INSTALL GROUND ROD.

a.

Get two ground rod sections , two couplings , a driving stud , a grounding clamp, and Grounding Cable 42W3 from roadside stowage box .

GROUND ROD ROADSIDE

DRIVING STUD

b.

Connect coupling to ground section

and

install

driving

rod -COUPLING

stud .

Make sure driving stud seats on ground rod . GROUND ROD SECTION

C.

Locate ground rod no farther than 25 feet from

LS Ground Connector 42J3.

Using 6- pound sledge hammer , drive ground rod section into ground until coupling is just above surface .

d.

Remove driving pling . Install

stud from

second

cou-

section

of

ground rod . Make sure second section seats on first section .

e.

Install another coupling and driving stud on top of second section of ground rod. Make sure driving stud seats on second section .

CONTINUED

2-46

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

2

f.

Continued .

Drive second section of ground rod into ground until coupling is just above surface .

Ground rod must be driven to minimum depth of 5 feet ( 1.52 NOTE meters) to provide effective ground .

g.

Remove driving stud and top coupling from ground rod .

h.

Connect ground bolt.

clamp and Grounding

Cable 42W3 to ground

rod . Tighten

GROUNDING 'CABLE 42W3

GROUND CLAMP

i.

Connect Grounding Cable 42W3 to LS semitrailer Connector 42J3.

64

DAIRE JACIRY?

42J3

42W3

ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-47

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

3

EXTEND WORK PLATFORMS .

a.

At curbside and roadside gooseneck platforms :

(1 )

Raise and hold latch handle to release work platform .

LATCH HANDLE

GOOSENECK WORK PLATFORM

ROADSIDE

TYPICAL 2 PLACES

SIDE WORK PLATFORM

HOOD LATCH TYPICAL 2 PLACES

(2)

Carefully fold out work platform .

(3)

Release latch handle

b.

FENDER WORK PLATFORM

At fender work platform and side work platform :

(1 )

Release hood latch .

(2)

Fold out work platform .

CONTINUED

2-48

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10 EMPLACEMENT — Continued

2-8 .

DO NOT START GENERATOR SET A6

UNTIL

LS IS CON-

NECTED TO SUITABLE GROUND . DEATH BY ELECTROCUWARNING

TION CAN

RESULT FROM OPERATING

AN

UNGROUNDED

LS.

GENERATOR SET A6 MAY BE DAMAGED IF SLAVE RECEPTACLE IS USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN SLAVE STARTING . REFER TO TM 5-6115-464-12 FOR GENERATOR CAUTION

4

SET OPERATION BEYOND THAT COVERED IN THIS TM.

START GENERATOR SET A6.

a.

Perform before operation checks and services in TM 5-6115-464-12 .

b.

Open and latch Generator Set A6 control cubicle and air vent doors.

CONTINUED

2-49

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

4

C.

Continued.

Verify that DC CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER is pushed in (closed) .

FAULT INDICATOR

O Ꮻ

GENERATOR

ENGINE

O O O

GODLAND DC CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULL FOR EMERGENCY STOP

ō

оо

UPEN

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

O

d.

Set START- RUN - STOP switch to START

RUN . RUN

STOP

e.

Set BATTLESHORT switch to ON.

ON

OFF BATTLE SHORT

1.

Fuel transfer pump makes clicking sounds when transfering fuel into day tank. Pump will stop when day tank is full .

NOTES 2.

START- RUN - STOP switch must remain in

RUN ,

and BATTLE-

SHORT switch must remain ON until day tank is filled.

CONTINUED

2-50

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

Continued .

4

f.

Check that FUEL LEVEL gage indicates acceptable fuel level .

FAULT INDICATOR

о GENERATOR

O

O

LEVEL

FUEL LEVEL DCCONTROL CIRCUIT FORSTOP FULLBREAKER EMERGENCY

g.

Check that LOW OIL PRESS UNDER VOLT and UNDER

LOW OIL PRESS

UNDER VOLT

UNDER FREQ

FREQ lights are on .

h.

When day tank is full

(about 2

ON

minutes) , clicking sound stops . Set BATTLESHORT switch to

10

FAULT INDICATOR O

LOW OIL PRESS

COOLANT HIGH TEMP

OVER SPEED

NO FUEL

SHORT CIRCUIT

OVER LOAD

UNDER VOLT

UNDER FREQ

REVERSE POWER

OVER VOLT

OFF OFF . Lower safety guard. BATTLE SHORT

i.

Hold

TEST OR

RESET switch

down and check that all INDICATOR lights

FAULT

are

on .

TEST OR RESET

Release switch .

DO NOT CRANK

ENGINE FOR

MORE THAN

15 SECONDS

AT A TIME . ALLOW STARTER TO COOL AT LEAST 3 MINUTES BETWEEN TRIES . CAUTION

CONTINUED

2-51

TM 9-1440-600-10

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

2-8.

— 4

Continued .

If outside temperature NOTE

j.

is

50°F

( 10°C)

or

below,

perform

step

j . If temperature is above 50° F ( 10°C) , perform step k .

If temperature is 50° F ( 10°C) or below, start Generator Set A6 with start aid procedure as follows:

(1 )

Hold START- RUN -STOP switch to START for 15 seconds or until OIL PRESSURE gage indicates oil pressure and VOLTS A.C. meter indicates voltage .

FAULT INDICATOR O GENERATOR

ENGINE

OVER SPEED

ENGINE PRIMER ON

START

RUN お

O STOP OPENTION O

press

о

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT PULLBREAKER FORSTOP EMERGENCY

(2)

While engine is cranking , ether, then release switch .

ENGINE PRIMER switch to

ON to inject

(3)

Release switch to RUN after 15 seconds or when engine starts . When engine starts , go to step 5.

DO NOT INJECT ETHER MORE THAN THREE TIMES.

CAUTION

(4)

If engine does not start within 15 seconds, release START- RUN - STOP switch . Allow starter to cool for 3 minutes.

CONTINUED

2-52

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

-

Continued .

4

(5)

Repeat steps

( 1 ) and

(3) .

If engine does

not start after three tries ,

call

Engineer Maintenance .

137

k.

If temperature is above 50° F ( 10°C) , start engine normally.

(1 )

Hold START- RUN - STOP switch to START for 15 seconds or until OIL PRESSURE gage indicates oil pressure and VOLTS A.C. meter indicates voltage .

FAULTINDICATOR 2

GENERATOR #

ENGINE

120

AIRCLESSER

VOLTIJETER O

POWER

PRESS DOGLANTTEMPERATURE

OIL PRESSURE

оо

IMOLENDSAD

お O BATTLE SHO

START RUN

CEED O

DCCONTROL CIRCLAY PLALBREAKER FORSTOP EMERGENCY

O

STOP

012

335

ES

(2)

If engine does not start within 15 seconds , release START- RUN - STOP switch . Allow starter to cool for 3 minutes.

(3)

Repeat step ( 1 ) . If engine does Maintenance .

not start

after three tries ,

call

Engineer

CONTINUED

2-53

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT- Continued

Le WARNING

5

TO AVOID INJURY, DO NOT STEP ON LS CABLES OR BUNDLES.

PREPARE MODULES AND OUTRIGGERS FOR OPERATION .

a.

At rear of Launcher

Electronics

Module (LEM ) A1

and

Data

Link Terminal

Module ( DLTM) A2 , unsnap six snap fasteners at bottom and sides inlet cover. Roll up and tie each cover.

of air

16 Wher

TYPICAL LEM A1 DLTM A2

b.

On both sides of each module ,

origns wollA

(S)

unsnap eight snap fasteners at bottom and

sides of air exhaust cover. Roll up and tie each cover.

CONTINUED

2-54

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

5

-

C.

Continued .

Unhook snap hook and release front curbside outrigger safety chain. TRA VEL FOR TLAO CTOICA L

2-8.

SAFETY CHAIN/

CURBSIDE

d.

Remove curbside travel lockpin .

(1 )

Press and button.

(2)

Pull lockpin out of steadyrest.

(3)

Install lockpin in stowage bracket.

hold

lockpin

push-

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-55

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued —

5

Continued .

USE WHEEL CHOCK BLOCKS WHEN UNCOUPLING TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO SEMITRAILER .

CAUTION

Remove chock blocks from stowage and chock semitrailer wheels as follows:

e.

(1 )

If LS is facing

uphill ,

place

chock blocks

behind semitrailer rear wheels ,

both curbside and roadside .

CHOCK BLOCK -reuq

miqpisol blor

bre

STOWAGE CHOCK BOTH SIDES ROADSIDE

(2)

If LS is facing downhill, place chock blocks in front of semitrailer rear wheels, both curbside and roadside .

CHOCK BOTH SIDES

ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

2-56

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

EMPLACEMENT

2-8 .

-

Continued .

5

(3)

If LS is level , place chock block in front of rear wheel behind rear wheel on roadside .

on curbside and

CHOCK ROADSIDE ONLY CHOCK CURBSIDE ONLY ROADSIDE

Through remainder of this procedure , chock blocks will be shown

NOTE

for LS as in level position above unless grade is shown . Chock as described in step e.

f.

Unhook snap hooks and release rear curbside and roadside safety chains .

g.

( Deleted) .

h.

(Deleted) .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-56.1 /(2-56.2 blank)

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

5

6

—

Continued .

i.

Remove roadside travel lockpin .

j.

(Deleted)

VERIFY LAUNCHING STA AND FIRING PLATOON SWITCHES ARE SET TO CORRECT ADDRESSES .

a.

Open both

LEM

A1

doors . If wind

is

over 45

knots ,

insert locking

pin in

hole at top of door.

b.

If water is in channel at bottom of either LEM door, remove water with cloth or sponge.

B

CONTINUED

T

Change 1

2-57

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

Continued .

6

C.

On LCU Display Panel A1A14, verify that LAUNCHING STA and FIRING PLATOON Switches are set to correct addresses. O BITE PLATFORM

3

O

LAUNCHER

7

POWER SUPPLIES -n UNDER MISSILE MISSAL NAZARO

O

LAUNCHING STA 1 2

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

0

FIRING PLATOON 1

STOP

O

START

10

6

RAISE

O

5

O

READY LCMB PLATFORM 이이 이이 RAIDED AZMUTH MEADY READY OOO DISCOR MECTED 0101010

2 B

ODO

O

ATOON

5

3

7

оо

O OFF

o

0

TETEST STATUS LAR STATUS LAMPTEST

UNHOOK SNAP HOOK AND RELEASE FRONT ROADSIDE OUTRIGGER SAFETY CHAIN .

8

CLOSE GENERATOR SET A6 CIRCUIT BREAKER AS FOLLOWS .

a.

Check output voltage.

(1 )

Set VOLT-AMPS switch to positions L1 - LO , L2- LO , and L3 - LO . VOLTS A.C. meter should indicate 120 Vac red line in each position .

PALLY INDICATOR

GENERATOR

ENGINE

L1-LO

L3-L1

OOO

#

A.C. VOLTMETER

500 -LL1

LLO3-

AMPS VOLTS

ㅎ

оо

INCREASE

SATELE SHOR START

88

G

SROLEUNEY OPERATION

OPEN O

DCCONTROK CHICLIT PULLBREAKER FORSTOP EMERGENCY

VOLTAGE ADJUST

CONTINUED

2-58

TM 9-1440-600-10

EMPLACEMENT — Continued

2-8 .

—

Continued .

8

(2)

Set VOLTS- AMPS switch to positions L1 - L2 , L2- L3 , and L3- L1 . VOLTS A.C. meter should indicate 208 Vac red line in each position .

(3)

If voltage in any position is wrong , set VOLTS-AMPS switch to that position and use VOLTAGE ADJUST rheostat to adjust to correct voltage .

(4) b.

If voltage had to be adjusted , repeat steps ( 1 ) and (2) .

Check HERTZ frequency meter for 400 Hz indication . If necessary, use FREQUENCY ADJUST rheostat to adjust frequency to 400 Hz.

FAULTINDICATOR GENERATOR

ENGINE

IPLES

ARCLEANER

HE TZ

COOLANTCEMPERATU

09

お

INCREASE ON

O

O

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT PULLBREAKER FORSTOP EMERGENCY

FREQUENCY ADJUST

GENERATOR SET A6 MUST RUN AT LEAST 3 MINUTES TO CAUTION

NOTE

WARM UP BEFORE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED.

Step 8c applies power to the LS.

CONTINUED

2-59

TM 9-1440-600-10 EMPLACEMENT — Continued

2-8 .

-

Continued .

8

C.

After 3 minutes engine warmup,

O CKT BRK

press CKT BRK switch to CLOSE until CKT BRK light comes on.

CKT BRK CLOSE

OPEN

IF

ANY GENERATOR

SET A6 FAULT

INDICATOR

LIGHT

COMES ON, SHUT DOWN GENERATOR SET A6 AND CALL ENGINEER MAINTENANCE .

CAUTION

Check indicators for normal in-

d.

dications :

All FAULT INDICATOR lights off.

(1 )

FAULT INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESS

COOLANT HIGH TEMP

OVER SPEED

NO FUEL

SHORT CIRCUIT

OVER LOAD

UNDER VOLT

UNDER FREQ

REVERSE POWER

OVER VOLT

FAULT INDICATOR

O GENERATOR

ENGINE

ARGLEANER COMPTAIN

O O

EVERSI

COOLANT TEMPERATU · ㅎ

09

お BATTLESHOR

START

ON OFF

O

O

OPERATION

DCCONTROL BREAKER CIRCUIT PULLFOR EMERGENCY STOP

O

A.C. VOLTMETER

meter

(2)

VOLTS A.C. 120 Vac.

(3)

HERTZ frequency dicates 400 Hz.

indicates

meter

in-

HE TZ 500

CONTINUED

2-60

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

— 8

Continued .

(4)

OIL PRESSURE gage indicates 30 to 55 psig .

(5)

COOLANT TEMPERATURE gage indicates 170°F to 200°F.

OOOO

O

FAULTINDICATOR ·

O GENERATOR

ENGINE ARCLEANER

120 T PRESS

Lhen

120 TEMP F

O

FREUENCYAUST

854 OIL PRESSURE

BATTLEMOR

COOLANT TEMPERATURE START SPOR

9

AT LEM POWER CONTROL PANEL

OPENFOR OPEN

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCY STOP

RUN TIME

MAIN POWER AC DC Θ

(PCP ) A1A3 , RAISE COVER AND SET MAIN POWER - AC CB1 TO

10

M1

CB2

CB1

ge

ON.

ENERGIZE DLTM A2.

a.

Remove padlock and open DLTM A2 doors. If wind is over 45 knots , insert locking pin of door.

in

hole at top

88

Se

CONTINUED

2-61

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

10

b.

Continued .

If water is in channel at bottom of either DLTM , A2 door, remove water with cloth or sponge .

LAMPS

On Power Distribution Unit (PDU )

C.

ON A2A4, press and switch to TEST.

OFF TEST

LAMPS

O

O

O OAS

о

O O DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O CAVC PROCESSOR OUT MAIN A PWXONSPL ON 20VDC OFF OFF GIFF OFF OBLOWER OPE LAMPSON BLOWER ON OCLXONPWR O TEST OFF OFF OFF

O

0 O

d.

hold

O

O

O

O

Check that the two panel lights and BLOWER OPR light come

28 VDC

on . Release switch . BLOWER OPR e.

+

Set LAMPS switch to ON . Check that two panel lights are on .

Logo →

→

+

CONTINUED)

2-62

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

10

EMPLACEMENT- Continued -

Continued .

f.

Set

O O

OFF

O

O

OFF CLKONPWR

BLOWER OPR

O O

O

O

о

O

O

BLOWER circuit breaker to BLOWER ON

ON. g.

о

G

O

OFF OFF LOWER LAMPS ON TEST ค OFF

10

O CNVC OUT ON

о 0 O 0 O O DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O DOTL PROCESSOR MAIN ON ON ON →

Check that

BLOWER

BLOWER OPR

OPR light

is on before continuing . OFF

h.

Set MAIN A circuit breaker to ON.

ග

MAIN A ON +

OFF

i.

Set CLK PWR circuit breaker to ON. +

CLK PWR ON 28 VDC

j.

Check that 28 VDClight is on .

OFF

k.

Set PWR SPLY circuit breaker to

DGTL PROCESSOR

ON. PWR SPLY ON O

I.

Set

DGTL

PROCESSOR circuit

+

ON

+ (

breaker to ON. OFF

OFF

CONTINUED

2-63

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8. 11

EMPLACEMENT - Continued AT PCP A1A3, RAISE COVER AND SET MAIN POWER — DC CB2 TO

MAIN POWER/ DC AC

RUN TIME

OFF . CB1

M1

12

CB2

AT COMPUTER -TO-COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE PROCESSOR (CCIP) A2A2, VERIFY THAT TIME OF DAY CLOCK IS COUNTING .

TIME OF DAY

PROPAGATION DELAYREQUEST

OLY

DAY OSC

88 THECONTROL

HOUR

SEC

MIN

5.

If clock is counting , go to step 13.

If clock is not counting , go to step 12a. a.

On CCIP A2A2:

(1 ) (2)

Set OPERATE switch to OFF. Set LOAD NET switch to OFF.

TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE OFF

OFF

CONTINUED

2-64

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8.

12

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

Continued.

(3)

Set ALTERNATE MASTER switch to OFF .

PROPAGATION LAYREQUEST

TEST PROCESSORCONTROL

8 88 89 AUTOS

ALTERNATE MASTER

RADIO D

O OFF

DLT TEST

(4)

Set DLT TEST switch to TEST .

(5)

Set PROCESSOR switch to NORM .

TEST NORMAL

PROCESSOR CONTROL

CONTROL

DL TN TRBY

NORM

KGBY

CONTINUED

1 2-65

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

Continued .

12

Select any convenient net start time using TIME SET switches .

b.

TIME OF DAY DAY

HOUR

PROPAGATION DELAYREQUEST YEST DAY

DAY

MIN

TIME SET HOUR

SEC

MIN

RADIO O

PROCESSORCONTROL

AUTOSYNE

OSCCAL

88888 TIME CONTROL LOAD NET

ICONTROL

S

OFF

Set LOAD NET switch to LOAD NET then to OFF. (1 ) (2)

C.

Verify that net start time entered above appears on TIME OF DAY display.

At Key Generator KG -30 A2A1 , loosen 16 captive screws and open panel .

้

ไต

CONTINUED

2-66

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

12

d.

Continued .

On

Electronic Key Generator KG-30 A2A1 , set

POWER switch to OFF and

Verify that proper code has been keyed per SOP. Refer to manual KAO- 137E/TSEC for procedure . Close panel and secure, with

initialize key generator.

2 captive screws.

XMTR ALM

WARNING

POWER

WARNING

RCVR POWER O

PUSH TO ZERO

PUSH TO ZERO

ON

OFF

e.

On CCIP A2A2 :

(1)

Press and release RESET switch .

(2)

Set OPERATE switch to OPERATE . If TIME OF DAY clock starts , press and release RESET switch , and then go to step 13. If TIME OF DAY clock does not start, go to step f.

18

TEST

RESET

PROCESSORCONTROL

DAY

MODE OOCCAL 8 98 99 AUTOSYNC WTHOL

PROPAGATION DELAY REQUEST

RADNO10

@

OPERATE OFF

CONTINUED

9

2-67

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

12

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

f.

Continued .

Check that the fault lights at the following locations are off:

(1 )

Data Link Terminal Power Supply A2A6.

POWER SUPPLY FAULT-

O PS3

O PS2

O PS1

NON-INTERRUPT

LAMP TEST

O PS4

O PS5 PS6

T

(2)

Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5.

FAULT

RESET DELAY TURE

FREO

+

(3)

Receiver-Transmitter A2A3 .

FAULT RECEIVER

RECEIVER FAULTTRANSMITTE A

A1

A2

A3

: O

O

8888

: 0

FREQUENCYSELECT

TRANSMITTER

FRAT

A11 A12

A13

OOO

A4 O

A7

A14

Olo

A10 o

CONTINUED

2-68

TM 9-1440-600-10

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

2-8 .

12

-

Continued.

(4)

CCIP A2A2 .

@ FAULT KEY GEN SUMMARY FAULT FAULT ⚫

g.

PROCESSORCONTROL

GSC CAL 8 88 89 AUTOSYNC THE CONTACK

RADIO&

On CCIP A2A2, set OPERATE switch to OFF and ALTERNATE MASTER switch to

ALTERNATE MASTER OPERATE

ALTERNATE OFF

OFF

MASTER. Repeat steps b thru f.

h.

At Key Generator KG-30 A2A1 , secure panel with 14 remaining captive screws.

CONTINUED

2-69

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT ·- Continued ENERGIZE LEM A1 .

13

a.

On LEM -PDU A1A2 , hold LAMPS switch to TEST.

b.

Check that the two panel lights and BLOWER OPR light come on.

Release

switch .

Θ

O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O BLOWER OPE

BLOWER OPR

O LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC. MAIN A CIN OFF

BLOWER ON O OFF

Θ

LCHRELEX PARSVDCSPLY ON OFF

PWRORDSPLY ON OFF

LCHRELEX PWR29 vocSPLY O OFF

AS: VDC PWR$SPLY GN OFF

MSL GYRO-CLOCK WR MEL PAR SPLY ON O O

PAFUTTL PAIR SPLY On

M31 TWTFIL PWR SPLY ON Ꮎ OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

LAMPS

ON OFF TEST

BLOWER ON + OFF

O

O

O

ON OFF LAMPS ON OFF TEST

Θ

CNVCOUTTH MOTCONT CANISTER UNOT AC O ON ON OFF OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC UPRL MSL ON ON OFF OFF

MAIN 8 ON OFF

о

O ‫فن‬ ‫نه‬

C.

Set LAMPS switch to ON . Check that two panel lights are on .

d.

Set BLOWER circuit breaker to ON .

e.

Check that BLOWER OPR light is on before continuing .

CONTINUED

2-70

TM 9-1440-600-

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued Continued .

13

f.

In the sequence listed below, set the following circuit breakers to ON.

1

O O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

2

O BLOWEN OPS

+ TRONCS AC,

LAUNCH «

BLOWER ON OFF 3

MISSILE HEATER AC, UPRA MSL 2 Θ LPR&MGI ON OFF CHFF OFF

OFF MS45 VDC PWR SPLY ON OFF

MSL GYROCLOCK PWR SPLY ON OFF

CONT MOT UNITAC ON

PAFUITL PWRSPLY ON

OFF

OFF

MEL TWTFIL PWRSPLY ON OFF

4

5 →

OFF

OFF

(WR& MSL ON OFF

MAIN A

MAIN B

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

WRRMSL

OFF 3

CAVE GUTHTR CANISTER AC OFF

+ O

O

+

ON

ON

+

LCHR ELEX 28 VDC PWR SPLY +

ON

+

о OFF

OFF

g.

ORD PWR SPLY

C

O

5

4

LCHR ELEX 5 VDC PWR SPLY

LAMPS ON OFF TEST

On PCP A1A3, check that MAIN POWER - AC CB1 set to ON.

RUN TIME

M1

OFF

circuit breaker is st

MAIN POWER AC DC

CB2

CONTINUED

2-7

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

13

h.

Continued.

On LCU Display Panel A1A14, check that all three POWER SUPPLIES lights are on .

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

LAUNCHERLOCAL

O

O

POWER SUPPLIES OO MISSILE PLATFORMUPPER HAZARD

O

O

LOHR READY

0000

PLATFORM READY RAISED AZMUTH

O

0

POWER SUPPLIES

NECTED80101010

の

LAUNCH

101 10

RAISE

STOP O

ООО 15 +5 +28 VDC VDC VDC

O

START O

FIRINGPLATOON

On LEM - PDU A1A2 , breakers to ON.

1

below,

set the following circuit

2

MSL GYRO/CLOCK PWR SPLY

MSL 5 VDC PWR SPLY +

in the sequence listed

ON

+

+

O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O

O

i.

O

NORMAL FANEL LAMPY CITE TEST STATUSLAMPS OW OFF STATUS LAMPYEST

0

OBLOWER OPA

ON LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC MAIN A ON OFF

BLOWER ON OFF OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC, UPD I MEL UPA8 MEL ON OFF OFF

MAINO OFF

OFF

→

ON

+

3 ON OFF

OFF

MSL

2)

OFF MSL TWTFIL PWRSPLY ON OFF

OFF

LWRAMS ON OFF

O

LAMPS ON O OPP TEST

O

о

MOT CONT UNIT AC

OFF

LCHR ELEX 28 VDC PWRSPLY (1 ) ON OFF OFF MS PAFUITL PWR SPLY

O

CNVC OUTHTR CANISTER AC ON OFF

3

+

PWRORDSPLY

Θ

LOMASVOCELEX PAR SPLY GN OFF

O

O

O

O

O

OFF CONTINUED

2-72

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

13

Continued .

DLT TIME

Le WARNING

OF DAY CLOCK MUST BE COUNTING

PROPER INDICATION CAN PLAY PANEL A1A14

BEFORE

BE OBTAINED FROM LCU DIS-

MISSILE HAZARD LIGHTS. A MISSILE

HAZARD LIGHT ON INDICATES A HAZARDOUS CONDITION ONLY FOR LIVE GM POSITIONS WITH UMBILICAL CONNECTED. MISSILE HAZARD LIGHT WILL NORMALLY BE ON FOR : GM POSITIONS HAVING A DUMMY MISSILE . EMPTY CANISTER . EMPTY POSITION . LIVE MISSILE WITH UMBILICAL DISCONNECTED .

THESE CONDITIONS DO NOT CONSTITUTE A HAZARD . IF ANY MISSILE HAZARD LIGHT IS ON , VISUALLY CHECK THAT POSITION . IF THAT POSITION

HAS A LIVE

MISSILE WITH

UMBILICAL CONNECTED , NOTIFY ECS IMMEDIATELY. ADVISE ECS THAT LS WILL REMAIN IN LOCAL MODE . AFTER NOTIFYING

ECS,

LEAVE AREA AND AWAIT FURTHER IN-

STRUCTIONS . ORDNANCE DEVICES RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

MAY

EXPLODE ,

CONTINUED

2-73

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 . 13

EMPLACEMENT - Continued —

j.

Continued .

On LCU Display Panel A1A14, check the following :

(1 )

LOCAL- RMT switch set to LOCAL. LOCAL light on and key removed .

ΤΟ

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT O

BITE

POWER SUPPLIES

PLATFORM

LO

VDC UPPER HAJAND

MISSILE O

CA

0

O LAUNCHERL

RM

O

MISSALE READY 이이 이이 O

LO PLATFORM READY RAISED AZMUTH MADY ооо

T

0101010

e

LAUNCHING STA

©

©

© O

e

0 • FIRINGPLATOON

O

RAISE 10 10 START

O

O

оо

LAMPS HITETEST STATUS NORMAL STATUS LAMPTEST

O

(2)

All MISSILE HAZARD lights off at all live GM positions.

UPPER L

MISSILE UPPER R LWR L

LWR R

MISSILE HAZARD 0000

(3)

All

four

MISSILE

CONNECTED lights on .

DISMISSILE DISCONNECTED 0101010

(4)

Verify that status lights are not flashing on and off.

CONTINUED

2-74

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

13

k.

Continued .

At LEM- PDU A1A2 , in sequence listed below , set the following circuit breakers to ON .

1

2

MSL PAFU/ITL PWR SPLY

+

ON

O

Θ

+

O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O O OBLOWER O O OPR

O

ON

MSL TWT FIL PWR SPLY +

©

อ O

LCHAELEX PWR5VDCSPLT ON OFF

MARORDSPLY GN OFF

O

IF CANISTER HEAT IS REQUIRED :

3

LCHR ELEX 38 VDC PAR SPLY ON OFF

CONT 3 HTB MOT UNITAC Ꮎ ON ON OFF OFF

OFF

1 ON OFF

LINAL MSL O

LWRR MSU ON OFF

OFF

2

LAMPS

O

ON OFF TEST

OFF

O

O

CNVC OUT CANISTER HTR AC Θ ON

MSL GYRO-CLOCK PWRSPLY

MBL& VDC PWR SPLV ON OFF

о

OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC,‫י‬ UPALMSI UPG A MSL ON O OFF OFF

MAIN 8 Of OFF

O

OFF

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC O MAINON A GIFF

BLOWER ON OFF

O

Θ

O

O

O

O

OFF

Check with ECS to determine if missile heaters are to be turned NOTE

I.

Set the four

on . If missile heaters are not to be turned on , go to step m .

MISSILE

O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O

HEATER

BLOWER OPR

O

AC circuit breakers to ON.

MISSILE HEATER AC UPR L MSL UPR R MSL ON ON

BLOWER ON OFF

LCHR5VDCFLEX PWR SPLY ON O GIFF

O OFF

OFF

OFF

GYROCLOCK PWR SPLY

IWR& MBL + ON

OFF MS TWYFIL PWR SPLY ON OFF

OFF

0

OFF

MOT UNITCONT AC ON OFF

VDC MSI PWR SSPLY ON OFF

MSL L PARUIT SPLY PWR

O

o

OFF

LCHERFLEX PWR29VDC SPLY O OFF

PWRORDSPLY ON OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC. LIPH &MEST UPA & MISA ON OFF OFF

MAIN 8 ON OFF

O

WARME ON OFF LAMPS ON OFF TEST

Q

LWR R MSL ON

CNVC OUTMTR CANISTER ON OFF

OFF

Θ

LWR L MSL Θ ON

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC MAIN A O ON

O

LAMPS m.

Set LAMPS switch to OFF .

ON OFF TEST

CONTINUED

T

2-75

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT- Continued

13

-

Continued .

LEM-PDU A1A2 DOOR MUST REMAIN CLOSED AFTER PDU A1A2

IS

ENERGIZED

TO

PREVENT

DEGRADING

EMI

SHIELDING .

CAUTION

n.

14

Close and secure LEM A1 left-hand door.

PERFORM LOCAL BITE TEST AT LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14 .

If panel lighting

a.

is

required ,

set

PANEL

LAMPS switch to

ON .

Check that

all four panel lights are on. b.

Set STATUS LAMPS switch to NORMAL or DIM as desired .

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

PANEL LAMPS ON

STATUS LAMPS NORMAL

OFF

DIM

POWER SUPPLIES O

LAUNCHERLOCAL

VOX MISSILE A UPPER LIPPER

PLATFORM HAZARO

O

LONE PLATFORM RAISED AUTH MAST MADY

HOSSAI LADY 이이 이이 이이 이이

о O B C

O O O O O +28 E V+5 D ±15 E VDC VDC VDC

O

.0

A O

"

RAISE STOP 00: START

POWER SUPPLIES-

O

Ø

LAUNCHING STA

BITE

O

DISCON MECTED

O

PIRINGPLATOON

O

o

NORMAL PANEL LAMPS WIFE TEST STATUSLAM STATUS LAMPTEST

O

Θ

CONTINUED

2-76

TM 9-1440-600-10

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

C.

Continued .

Check that all five BITElights are off.

이

-

14

BITE

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLIES

O

PLATFORM

AUNCHER

BITE

MISSILE O

HAZARD 000 LOMB

RAISED

A

ООО D C B

E

이이 이이 0

о O

NECTED 0101010

BITE TEST OFF STATUS LAMP TEST

IO !

2-8 .

:0

0

ROOM

0

BITY TEST

d.

Set BITE TEST-OFF- STATUS LAMP TEST switch to STATUS LAMP TEST . Check that all statuslights are on .

e.

Set switch to

BITE TEST.

BITElights cycle on and off for 6 seconds .

All

BITE lights are on ; test has passed .

f.

g.

Set BITE TEST- OFF - STATUS LAMP TEST switch to OFF .

On CCIP A2A2, check SUMMARY FAULTlight. If light is on ,

hold RESET

switch momentarily to RESET . SUMMARY FAULTlight will go off.

FAU SUMMARY FAULT

Θ

PROPAGAHOM DELAY REQUEST

TEST

S

SEC Θ

RESET

PROCESSOR CONTREX 10 00 00

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-77

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

15

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

If GMs are to be electrically connected , proceed as follows:

IF ANY MISSILE HAZARD LIGHT IS ON, VISUALLY CHECK THAT POSITION.

IF THAT POSITION

HAS A LIVE MISSILE

WITH UMBILICAL CONNECTED , NOTIFY ECS IMMEDIATELY. ADVISE ECS THAT LS WILL REMAIN IN LOCAL MODE. AF-

@ WARNING

TER NOTIFYING INSTRUCTIONS .

ECS, LEAVE AREA AND AWAIT FURTHER ORDNANCE DEVICES MAY EXPLODE ,

RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

a.

On LCU

Display

Panel A1A14 ,

verify that all

MISSILE

HAZARDlights are

off at all missile positions that have a live missile with umbilical connected .

POWER SUPPLIES VDC VOC UPPER MISSILE

PLATFORM

LWR R

MISSILE HAZARD C0000

O

O

• LAUNCHER LOCAL

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

MISSILE UPPER R LWR L

O

UPPER L

VIDOLI HAZARD O

O

MADY

이이 이이 ・ O

PLATFORM RAINED MADY ölöö

HECTED 0101010

MISSILE DISCONNECTED

101

STOP

Θ

O

Ø

0101010 LAUNCHING STA

Θ

START o

BITE FEST STATUS LANDTEST

O

PLATOON

CONNECT CONNECT

DISC

DISC

CONNECT CONNECT

DISC

DISC

O

b.

Raise cover over CONNECT- DISC switches .

C.

Hold CONNECT- DISC switches to CONNECT until corresponding MISSILE DISCONNECTEDlights go off.

CONTINUED

2-78

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

2-8 .

1.

At night crewmembers must be very careful to coordinate their work and signals while lowering outriggers and uncoupling tractor from semitrailer. Uselights to insure area is clear before starting .

DE

Use lights to signal for all operations that require signals . Make all movements sure and deliberate . Do not rush .

NOTES

PLC

2.

One

crewmember

operate

outrigger

controls .

crewmember observe outrigger and semitrailer.

Another

Observer signal

operator when area is clear and keep operator informed of outrigger and semitrailer condition .

16

LOWER OUTRIGGERS AND UNCOUPLE TRACTOR .

La

KEEP FINGERS OUTSIDE OUTRIGGER CONTROL BOX COVER UNTIL IT IS LOCKED OPEN . COVER SNAPS OPEN AND

WARNING CAN INJURE FINGERS.

a.

Remove locking hook from ccw and open cover.

outrigger control

box cover handle , turn

handle

O

CURBSIDE

CONTINUED

1

Change 1

2-79

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

16

Continued.

OFF b.

Lower cover until

spring -loaded

POWER plungers engage rods and cover is locked open .

C.

Set POWER switch to ON . Verify that leveling on.

device light comes

REAR OUTRIGGERS FRONT

ว

VERIFY THAT AREA IS CLEAR AND OUTRIGGER SAFETY CHAINS WARNING

ARE

RELEASED

BEFORE

OPERATING

OUT-

RIGGERS . INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT IF STRUCK BY OUTRIGGER .

• VERIFY THAT

OUTRIGGER

LIMIT SWITCHES

ARE

FREE

FROM DEBRIS , MUD , AND OTHER SUBSTANCES THAT COULD PREVENT PROPER OPERATION OF SWITCHES . CAUTIONS

• TO PREVENT TWISTING SEMITRAILER FRAME, DO NOT OPERATE DIAGONAL PAIRS OF OUTRIGGERS AT THE SAME TIME .

CONTINUED

2-80

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued —

Continued.

16

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT SEMITRAILER FIFTH WHEEL WITH OUTRIGGERS .

OFF TRACTOR

CAUTION

1.

For unlevel sites ,

outriggers may have to be operated one at

a time . Use single control switch if required . Upper switches control

roadside

outriggers .

Lower switches control

curbside

out-

NOTES riggers. 2.

d.

One crewmember observe outriggers and signal crewmember at control panel .

Using two REAR outrigger switches, lower rear outriggers until they touch ground .

OFF

ON POWER

e.

Using two FRONT outrigger switches, lower front outriggers until they touch ground .

O REAR OUTRIGGERS FRONT

Pause .

Continue to lower front outriggers to

slightly

relieve

semitrailer

weight from tractor.

AOR

DO WARNING

NOT STAND IN

PATH

OF TRACTOR

WHEELS

WHEN

RELEASING KINGPIN . TRACTOR COULD MOVE, RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

68

CONTINUED

1 2-81

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

Continued .

16

f.

Release kingpin .

(1 )

Pull out secondary lock release handle and hook in out position .

(2)

Pull out primary lock release handle all the way.

(3)

Coupling jaws will open and release kingpin .

SECONDARY LOCK RELEASE

LAUNCHING STATION

FIFTH WHEEL

PRIMARY LOCK RELEASE

ROADSIDE

DO NOT DRIVE TRACTOR TOO FAR FORWARD . AIR AND ELECTRICAL LINES MAY BE DAMAGED IF YOU DO. CAUTION

g.

Remove chock blocks from tractor wheels .

One crewmember drive tractor . Second crewmember observe and NOTE

signal driver.

CONTINUED

2-82

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT- Continued -

Continued .

16

h.

Push in tractor PARKING BRAKE control and drive tractor forward approximately 4 feet ( 1.22 meters) from

semitrailer. Insure that electrical and air lines are

not snagged or stretched .

i.

Visually check clearance

between

kingpin

and

rear frame crossmembers of

tractor. Adjust trailer height as needed by lowering outriggers if kingpin will catch on crossmember.

DO NOT LEAVE TRACTOR UNATTENDED BEFORE CHOCKLe WARNING

i.1 .

ING WHEELS . TRACTOR MAY ROLL, RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

Pull out tractor PARKING BRAKE control , place transmission range selector lever in neutral (N) . Leave engine running .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-82.1 /(2-82.2 blank)

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

16

EMPLACEMENT - Continued —

j.

17

Continued .

Chock tractor rear wheels .

LEVEL LS .

ALL FOUR OUTRIGGERS MUST HAVE FIRM CONTACT WITH

L GROUND WHEN LS IS LEVELED . OTHERWISE LS MAY TILT,

WARNING RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

TO PREVENT TWISTING SEMITRAILER FRAME , DO NOT OPERATE DIAGONAL PAIRS OF OUTRIGGERS AT THE SAME TIME .

CAUTION

LS must be leveled to not more than 5°.

NOTE

Each ring on leveling

device is 1 °. Outer ring is 6°. When leveling on slope greater than 5°, high side outriggers extension arms must be below horizontal to actuate interlock switches .

a.

Using no more than two outrigger switches at a time , observe leveling device and level LS. Bring bubble in leveling device as near center as possible . LS is leveled within 5° when bubble is in 5° leveling ring.

WEAR OUTRIGGERS

LEVELING DEVICE

CONTINUED

2-83

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

-

Continued .

17

b.

Verify with observer that :

(1 )

LS is as level as possible .

(2)

Leveling device bubble is inside 5° ring.

NOTE

C.

Wheel bogies float . wheel on ground .

One wheel

may be off ground and other

(3)

At least one wheel on each side of LS is off ground.

(4)

All four outriggers have firm contact with ground.

Verify that interlock switch plungers on all four outriggers are pressed .

SWITCH GUARD

INTERLOCK SWITCH PLUNGER

CONTINUED

2-84

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

117

—

Continued .

d.

On outrigger control panel , set POWER switch to OFF and lower safety guard .

KEEP FINGERS OUTSIDE OUTRIGGER CONTROL BOX COVLe ER WHILE CLOSING . COVER SNAPS SHUT AND CAN INJURE

WARNING

e.

FINGERS .

Close cover and turn handle cw to secure . Install locking hook to secure handle .

18

DISCONNECT AND STOW ELECTRICAL CABLES AND AIR LINES.

a.

Inside tractor cab :

(1 )

Place trailer handbrake control all the way forward in OFF position .

(2)

Pull out PARKING BRAKE control .

(3)

Pull out TRAILER AIR SUPPLY control .

b.

Uncouple EMERGENCY (red) and SERVICE (blue) airbrake lines from LS glad hand connectors .

00

2000 000000

AIR BRAKE LINES

AP CURBSIDE

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-85

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT- Continued —

Continued .

18

c

e

e

e

c e

e

c

from fifth wheel on air lines.

( c ( )) )

my couplings on tractor connector tree . Be careful not to get grease

e

connecting line couplings to dum-

e

airbrake lines by

Stow the two

c

C.

DUMMY COUPLING

d.

Connect airbrake coupling covers to airbrake couplings on LS.

COVER

50

CURBSIDE

e.

Disconnect electrical cables .

MS elquoor

(1 )

On LS , raise retaining spring on outrigger cable

connector

OUTRIGGER CABLE

and

pull connector straight out to disconnect . (2)

On LS , raise spring - loaded dust cap and pull intervehicular light cable connector straight out to disconnect.

(3)

Install or seat dust caps on the two LS electrical connectors .

INTERVEHICULAR LIGHT CABLE

CONTINUED

2-86

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT- Continued —

18

L c

c

c

e

e

c

e

c

of

c

base

c

at

s

s

e

c

ble from receptacle connector tree.

e

Disconnect intervehicular light ca-

c

f.

Continued.

INTERVEHICULAR LIGHT CABLE

CURBSIDE

BATTERY BOX

g.

h.

Disconnect outrigger cable from tractor slave connector.

Disengage

both

electrical cables

from connector mast and stow in tractor roadside stowage box. i.

Unchock tractor wheels.

SLAVE CONNECTOR OUTRIGGER CABLE

j.

Crewmember on ground , observe LS kingpin to insure that it clears tractor cross-frame member as tractor is driven forward .

k.

Tractor driver,

drive tractor forward

until it is clear of LS .

Stop tractor and

chock wheels . I.

Verify that all LS outriggers rest firmly on ground .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-87

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

19

MATE DATA LINK MAST ASSEMBLY.

DATA WARNING

LINK ANTENNA

MAY

BE

HOT.

USE

PROTECTIVE

GLOVES IF NECESSARY TO KEEP FROM INJURING HANDS.

HANDLE ANTENNA CAREFULLY TO PREVENT DAMAGE.

CAUTION

1.

At night, crewmembers must be very careful to coordinate their work and signals while

mating

data link

mast assembly.

Use

lights to insure that area is clear before starting . Make all movements sure and deliberate . Do not rush .

NOTES 2.

Two crewmembers are needed to perform this procedure . One on roadside work platform front roadside outrigger.

by Generator Set A6 and

one on

Release two hood latches securing Upper Mast Section A7A12 to Lower Mast

a.

Section A7A11 .

CLAMP UPPER MAST

HOOD LATCH

CRADLE LOWER MAST

ROADSIDE B 30051

T

CONTINUED

2-88

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

19

EMPLACEMENT - Continued —

b.

Continued .

Lift upper mast and walk it forward until it rests in forward cradle . Close top clamp to secure upper mast.

UPPER MAST

FORWARD CRADLE LOWER MAST

ROADSIDE

C.

One crewmember move to forward roadside outrigger.

d.

Two crewmembers working together, release top clamps ,lift upper mast, and move forward until upper mast flange is slightly forward of lower mast flange .

LOWER MAST

UPPER MAST

LOCATOR PIN

CONTINUED

53 2-89

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT- Continued —

19

e.

Continued .

Slide upper mast into lower mast,

alined so upper mast flange

is

secured

by locator pin on lower mast flange .

LOWER MAST

UPPER MAST

LOCATOR PIN

When mast sections are properly mated ,

dummy connector on

NOTE upper mast flange is beside rf adapter on lower mast flange .

f.

Remove

Grounding

Cable LOWER MAST

A7A12W2 from spring clip on upper mast flange and connect to Ground Connector A7A11J2 on lower mast flange .

SPRING CLIP

UPPER MAST

A7A12W2-

CONTINUED

2-90

TM 9-1440-600-10

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

2-8 .

19

Continued . LOWER MAST

g.

Disconnect

RF Cable A7A12W1

from dummy connector on upper UPPER MAST

mast flange .

A7A12W1

LOWER MAST

UPPER MAST

h.

Remove dust cap from RF Adapter A7A11J1

and

connect Cable

A7A12W1 to RF Adapter A7A11J1 .

LOWER MAST.

UPPER MAST

i.

Install dust cap on dummy connector on upper mast flange .

INSURE THAT AREA IS CLEAR BEFORE RAISING PLATFORM WARNING

TO PREVENT INJURY .

CONTINUED

2-91

T TM 9-1440-600-10 2

2-8.

20

EMPLACEMENT - Continued RAISE PLATFORM .

[ a.

Set engagement control handle to ELEV

ROADSIDE

www ROTATE

ELEV

ROADMARCH

NOTE

Launcher platform may be stopped at any position between limits by setting RAISE - STOP- LWR switch to STOP .

On LCU Display panel A1A14 , set RAISE - STOP - LWR switch to RAISE .

Hold START switch

up O

momentarily. Platform will raise to

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

O

launch angle and stop.

BITE

POWER SUPPLIES O

O O

00 LAUNCHER

VDC VDX MISSILE UPPERL UPPERS

PLATFORM HAZARD

RAISE

O

O

STOP

O

LCHR READY Ο

LWR

LAUNCHING STA

ANGSALE READY 0 |0 |0 |0 PLATFORM RAISED AZMUTH READY MISSALE Co НЕСТЕР 0101010 STOP

0

RAISE

O

b.

83990 T2AM

START 10

O

START

FIRINGPLATOON

O

O

O

BITE TEST STATUSLAM STATUS LAMPYEST

HO

O Ο

CONTINUED

2-1

2-92

TM 9-1440-600-10

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

O

Verify that PLATFORM RAISED and LCHR READY lights are on.

O

C.

Continued .

BITE

LAUNCHERLOCAL

O

POWER SUPPLIES 615 O VDC VDC PLATFORMMISSILE UPPER LIPPERA HAZARD

O

-

O

READY LCH PLATFORM 이이 이이 ・ READY RADED AUMUTH READT O

PLATFORM RAISED

о

0101010

Ø

LAUNCHINGSTA STOP нист START

O

RAISE ölö

O

O

e

FIRINGPLATOON BITE TEST STATUSLAMPS NORMAL FANEL LAMPS O STATUS OFF LAMPTEST

оо

O

LCHR READY

O

20

EMPLACEMENT- Continued

O

2-8.

O

이

d.

Set RAISE- STOP - LWR to STOP.

RAISE STOP

LWR

e.

AZIMUTH READY

Set engagement control handle to ROTATE Verify that READY light is on .

AZIMUTH O

ROADMARCH

ELEV

ROTATE

CONTINUED

T

2-93

TI

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

21

ALINE LS USING M2 AIMING CIRCLE .

[

a.

Set up aiming rod level . (1 )

Open curbside stowage box and remove aiming circle and range pole rod level .

Ho

STRAP

AIMING CIRCLE

CURBSIDE

(2)

On

curbside ,

open

front

stowage container and remove canvas

case

containing

2-

section range pole. 8

(3)

On curbside , open rear stowage container and remove aiming circle tripod .

CONTINUED

22-94

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

21

Continued .

(4)

Carry tripod and aiming circle about 26 feet (8.0 meters ) directly behind LS.

26 FT

(5)

Upend tripod .

Unbuckle retain-

ing strap and secure strap to leg to which it is attached .

CHIAT

(6)

Loosen leg clamp wing screws and extend tripod legs to desired length (convenient height for sighting LS) . Tighten clamp wing screws. Do not force wing screws .

CLAMP WING SCREW

TYPICAL 3 PLACES

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-95

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

21

Continued .

(7)

Turn tripod upright and test ad-

45°

justment of each leg by elevating each leg to horizontal position and releasing it. If leg is properly adjusted , it will fall to approximately 45° and stop . If it does not stop at about 45°, adjust it by loosening or tight-

TRIPOD CLAMPING SCREW

ening tripod clamping screw . Repeat until test is successful .

(8)

Spread tripod legs and place tripod at rear of LS in position to allow alinement with two inboard alining pins on either upper GM.

1

LAUNCHING STATION

༢. TRIPOD

RADAR SET (9)

LAUNCHING STATION

Check that tripod is at a convenient height for operator and that one leg of tripod is about in middle of angle between LS and radar set (RS) .

CONTINUED

2-96

TM 9-1440-600-10

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

2-8.

— 21

Continued. COVER

(10)

Unhook cover strap and remove HEAD

STRAP

tripod head cover.

AIMING CIRCLE AND COVER

(11 )

With aiming circle cover on , pull hinged cap

HINGED CAP

FIXING SCREW

on

bottom all the

way back.

Place

aiming circle

on tripod

head

and

thread

tripod fixing screw into bottom of aiming circle.

(12)

Release aiming circle carrying case cover latches by pulling out on strap at each side . Re-

TRIPOD HEAD COVER

move cover and hang on tripod head cover.

CONTINUED

2-97

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued —

21

Continued .

If lighting is limited , install instrument light in eyepiece slot . Hand-

NOTE

b.

light can be used for leveling and reading scales and lighting reticle . Place handlight on plastic reflector on top of telescope .

Level aiming circle .

(1 )

Curl index finger over azimuth micrometer knob and brace GM

thumb against screw on

main

housing . Squeeze , pulling azimuth knob toward you to dis-

(2)

AZIMUTH MICROMETER KNOB

r

micrometer

fo

engage azimuth knob gear.

While holding knob disengaged , rotate main body so that telescope points toward rear of GMs . Release knob and make

030914

sure that it locks in place . (3)

Loosen

the three

screws to

leveling

expose

about

1 /4-inch (0.64 mm ) of thread .

LEVELING SCREW (3 PLACES)

DO

NOT CLIMB

UP

ON

LS AT

1/4 IN.

NIGHT TO

LIGHT

UP GM

ALINEMENT PINS. INJURY OR DEATH WILL RESULT FROM

WARNING A FALL .

CONTINUED

2-98

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8.

21

EMPLACEMENT- Continued -

Continued .

At night,

NOTE

use flashlights from ground tolight up GM alinement pins . During blackout , use blackout flashlights (with red lens).

ELEVATION KNOB (4)

Pull hinged cap away from each

TELESCOPE

orienting knob . (5) (6)

Sight through telescope at GM . Using the two orienting knobs (nonrecording) and the elevation knob, aline vertical line of telescope reticle approximately on forward and rear inboard alinement pins of either upper GM. Move tripod if necessary .

GM CIRCULAR LEVEL INDICATOR

ORIENTING KNOB (NONRECORDING ) (2 PLACES) CAP

(7)

Using the three leveling screws ,

(2 PLACES)

two at a time , center bubble in circular level indicator on main body.

(8)

Close knobs.

caps

over

orienting

LEVELING SCREW (3 PLACES)

VERTICAL LINE OF RETICLE

10 20 30 40 5060 80 ‫ יוידיויוידיוידידי‬-10 AO 4050 40 30 20 10 -20 30 30 60

NOTE

Make sure tripod is steady. adjustment if necessary.

Use

tripod

legs to

make

coarse

CONTINUED

2-99

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT- Continued —

21

Continued .

Aiming circle main

NOTE

body rests on three leveling screws (a, b,

and c) that form a triangular pattern on base . established along each side of this triangle .

(9)

Disengage azimuth micrometer knob.

(10)

While holding knob disengaged , rotate main body so that main body tubular level is centered

Level

must be

between leveling screws a and b. Release knob and make sure TUBULAR LEVEL

it locks in place . (11 )

Using leveling screws a and b, center bubble in tubular level . Grasp leveling

screws with

thumb and forefinger and move

LEVELING SCREW

the two leveling screws at the same time .

(12)

(13)

Disengage azimuth knob.

micrometer

While holding knob disengaged , rotate main body so that main body tubular level is centered between leveling screws b and c. Release knob and make sure

TOP VIEW WITH MAIN BODY OMITTED

a. G

C. TUBULAR LEVEL (REF)

it locks in place .

b.

CONTINUED

2-100

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT – Continued -

21

Continued .

(14)

Using leveling screw c , center bubble in tubular level .

(15)

Disengage azimuth micrometer knob.

(16)

While holding knob disengaged , rotate main body so that main body tubular level is centered between leveling screws c and a. Release knob and make sure it locks in place.

(17)

Using leveling screws c and a , center bubble in tubular level . Grasp leveling screws between thumb and forefinger and at the same time.

NOTE

move the two leveling screws

Bubble in tubular level must be centered within one graduation through 360 degrees of travel .

(18)

Disengage azimuth micrometer knob and rotate main body through 360°, checking level at 1600 , 3200, 4800 , and 6400 mils. Tubular level bubble must be centered within one graduation at each checkpoint. Adjust if necessary . ELEVATION MICROMETER

(19)

Using

elevation

micrometer

knob, center bubble in elevation tubular level . (20)

ELEVATION TUBULAR LEVEL

Read and record elevation micrometer scale . If micrometer scale is not at 0 , use this plus

T

(+) or minus (-) reading to adjust all elevation measurements .

CREWMEMBERS

ON LS MUST BE WATCHED

CREWMEMBERS

AND WARNED

OF

UNSAFE

BY OTHER

CONDITIONS

WARNING TO PREVENT INJURY .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-101

TM 9-1440-600-10

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

2-8.

21

-

C.

Continued .

Aline aiming circle with GM alining pins .

(1 )

Disengage aiming circle azimuth micrometer knob .

(2)

While holding knob disengaged , rotate main body to set azimuth main scale and azimuth micrometer scale both to (black) 0.

Release knob and make

sure it locks in place.

Last motion coming onto alining pins must be from left to right NOTE to reduce gear backlash .

WARNING

CREWMEMBERS

ON

CREWMEMBERS

AND WARNED

LS

MUST BE WATCHED OF

BY OTHER

UNSAFE CONDITIONS

TO PREVENT INJURY.

ELEVATION KNOB TELESCOPE ORIENTING KNOB (NON RECORDING) (2 PLACES) (3)

Pull hinged cap away from each orienting knob.

CAP (2 PLACES)

CONTINUED

2-102

Change 1

e

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

21

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

Continued.

(4)

Sight through telescope at GM .

FORWARD PIN

FORWARD PIN

PERFECT ALINEMENT

MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE ALINEMENT

REAR PIN

REAR PIN

VIEW

пох OF GM

PERFECT ALINEMENT

MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE ALINEMENT

(5)

Using the two orienting knobs (nonrecording) and the elevation knob, aline vertical line of telescope

reticle on forward

and

rear inboard

alining

pins

of either upper GM . If alinement cannot be made , another crewmember must

經

rotate LS turntable manually per para 2-23 in direction shown to get alinement.

ROTATE ΤΟ ALINE

(6)

Request that another crewmember verify aiming circle alinement .

(7)

Verify that azimuth scale is set to 0.

(8)

Close caps over orienting knobs .

main scale is set to

black

0 and azimuth

micrometer

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-103

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

21

Continued .

Set up range pole only when and if requested by radar set ( RS)

NOTE

d.

crew . Range pole must not be raised except when being used as aiming point.

Set up range pole.

(1)

Remove range pole from canvas case.

(2)

Join and interlock two range pole sections .

(3)

When requested , place tapered point of range pole on ground near aiming circle.

(4)

Place angular portion of rod level against range pole circular level indicator up.

(5)

with

Move top of range pole to center the bubble in level indicator. When bubble is centered , range

RANGE POLE

CIRCULAR LEVEL INDICATOR

pole is vertical . (6)

Move rod level up and down range pole . Check that bubble is centered at all locations .

(7)

When

RS crew has measured

angle , take range pole down .

NOTE

e.

When sighting on RS aiming circle , a range pole may have to be used at the RS aiming circle.

Orient LS aiming circle with RS aiming circle .

NOTE

Last motion coming onto aiming point must be from left to right to reduce gear backlash .

(1 )

Disengage azimuth micrometer knob . CONTINUED

2-104

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

21

Continued .

(2)

While holding knob disengaged , rotate main body cw (recording , fast motion) toward RS aiming circle . Uselugs holding elevation tubular level as a rough sighting device . Stay to left of RS aiming circle . Release knob and make sure it locks in place.

NORTH REFERENCE AIMING CIRCLE

TELESCOPE

ELEVATION MICROMETER

LS AIMING CIRCLE

ELEVATION MAINSCALE

RS AIMING CIRCLE

AZIMUTH MICROMETER

LAUNCHING AZIMUTH MAIN SCALE

STATION

RADAR SET

(3)

Sight in telescope and use azimuth micrometer knob (recording , slow motion) and elevation micrometer knob if necessary, bring vertical line exactly to center of RS aiming circle.

Azimuth main scale is

NOTE

marked in hundreds and numbered at 200 -mil increments . Azimuth micrometer scale is marked in mils

and numbered at 10- mil increments .

(4)

Read value of angle on azimuth main scale in hundreds of mils and azimuth micrometer scale in mils .

(5)

Add azimuth main scale value to azimuth micrometer scale value , and record the total reading .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-105

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

21

Continued .

(5.1 )

Repeat steps ( 1 ) through (5) to obtain second azimuth reading .

(5.2)

Add first and second azimuth readings and divide by two to get azimuth mean value. If mean value is within 0.5 mil of first azimuth reading , proceed to step (5.3 ) below . If not , return to step 1 above and remeasure azimuth angle .

(5.3)

Record azimuth mean value on BRG LS TO RDR line on Launcher Location/Alinement Data Form.

NOTE Leave azimuth angle on scale while measuring elevation angle .

(6)

Sight through telescope and

using

elevation

knob,

bring

horizontal line of

reticle to touch top of RS aiming circle .

1.

Use any plus ( + ) or minus (-) number obtained when aiming circle was leveled in step 21 b to adjust elevation angle measured in following steps .

NOTES

Subtract any plus ( + ) number , and add any

minus (-) number to all elevation readings. 2.

Elevation

main

scale is

marked

and

numbered

in

100 - mil in-

crements . Elevation micrometer scale is marked in mils and numbered at 10- mil increments .

(7)

Read elevation

main

scale

in

hundreds of mils and

elevation

micrometer

scale in mils . (8)

Add elevation main scale value to elevation micrometer scale value .

(9)

Adjust elevation

angle

measured

by adding

or subtracting value

recorded

when aiming circle was leveled in step 21 b. (10)

Determine polarity of elevation angle . If elevation angle is

minus (-). If

elevation

reading is on

reading is on red scale,

black scale ,

angle

is plus

( +). (11 )

Record elevation angle with proper sign , plus ( + ) or minus (−) .

CONTINUED

2-106

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

21

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

Continued .

(12 )

Repeat steps (6) through ( 11 ) to obtain second elevation reading .

(13)

Add first and second elevation readings and divide by 2 to get mean value . If mean value is within

0.5 mil of first elevation

reading ,

proceed to ( 14)

below. If not, return to step (6) above and remeasure elevation angle. (14 )

Record mean elevation value on tion/Alinement Data Form .

EL LS TO RDR line on Launcher Loca-

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-106.1 /(2-106.2 blank)

TI

2-

[

49T

2-1

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8 .

21

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

-

Continued .

Orient LS aiming circle with north reference aiming circle.

f.

(1 )

Disengage azimuth micrometer knob.

(2)

While holding knob disengaged , rotate main body cw (recording , fast motion) toward north reference aiming circle . Use lugs holding elevation tubular level as a rough sighting device . Stay to left of north Release knob and make sure it locks in place.

reference

aiming

circle .

NORTH REFERENCE AIMING CIRCLE

LS AIMING CIRCLE RS AIMING CIRCLE

LAUNCHING STATION

RADAR SET

(3)

Sight in telescope and use azimuth micrometer knob ( recording , slow motion) , and elevation micrometer knob if necessary, to bring vertical line of telescope reticle exactly to center of north reference aiming circle.

Azimuth

main scale is

marked in

200 - mil increments . Azimuth

hundreds and

numbered

micrometer is marked in

at

mils and

NOTE numbered at 10- mil increments .

(4)

Read and record value of angle on azimuth main scale in hundreds of mils and azimuth micrometer scale in mils.

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-107

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8.

EMPLACEMENT – Continued -

21

Continued .

(5)

Add azimuth main scale value to azimuth micrometer scale value , and record .

(6)

Repeat steps ( 1 ) through (5 ) to get second azimuth reading .

(7)

Add first and second azimuth readings and divide by 2 to get mean value . If mean value is within 0.5 mil of first azimuth reading above , (8) below.

(8)

g.

proceed to

Record azimuth mean value on BRNG LS TO NREF line on Launcher Location/Alinement Data Form.

Stow aiming circle .

(1 )

(2)

Verify that compass

needle is

locked and locking vertical .

handle

Slide

covers

is TUBULAR LEVELS

over the two

tubular levels to closed position . (3)

COMPASS LOCKING HANDLE

Verify that caps on orienting knobs are closed , covering

NOTE PAD PLATE

knobs. (4)

Set elevation

scale to 3

and

elevation micrometer to 0 .

(5)

Disengage azimuth micrometer knob. ORIENTING KNOB (NONRECORDING ) (2 PLACES)

(6)

While holding knob disengaged , rotate main body to position azimuth micrometer knob approximately over lower right corner of note pad plate .

(7)

Set azimuth micrometer knob to 0. Release knob .

CONTINUED

2-108

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8.

21

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

COVER

Continued .

(8)

Place carrying case cover over aiming

circle and latch cover locks by pressing in .

wore

AIMING CIRCLE

AIMING CIRCLE AND COVER

TRIPOD

HINGED CAP

FIXING SCREW (9)

Loosen tripod fixing screw and remove aiming circle from tripod .

Make sure that

cap on bottom

hinged

covers tripod

mounting screw hole.

COVER

HEAD

(10)

Install tripod head fasten with strap.

STRAP

cover and

CLAMP WING SCREW

(11 )

Loosen tripod screws,

leg clamp wing

collapse tripod legs ,

and tighten screws .

leg

extension

TYPICAL 3 PLACES

CONTINUED

2-109

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8.

EMPLACEMENT- Continued -

21

22

Continued.

TRIPOD

STRAP

(12)

Strap tripod legs together.

(13)

Stow tripod in rear stowage container and close container.

(14)

Disassemble two piece range pole and stow in front stowage container. Close container.

(15)

Stow aiming circle and range rod level in curbside stowage box.

DETERMINE LS ATTITUDE .

a.

At curbside stowage

box , release strap and remove gunner's quadrant from

door rack .

Hel

LEVEL INDICATOR

FLINT HERE

MAIN SCALE

POINTER EAD O BLACK FIGURES OF FIRE

RADIAL ARM PLUNGER

CURBSIDE MICROMETER

‫نف‬ ‫ة‬

b.

Remove gunner's quadrant from case.

C.

Pull back on radial arm plunger and set pointer to 0 mark on main scale .

d.

Rotate micrometer to black 0 line.

CONTINUED

2-110

TM 9-1440-600-10 EMPLACEMENT - Continued

2-8.

22

-

e.

Continued .

Set gunner's quadrant on the two cross- roll measurement bolt heads of the ALIGNMENT DATUM with LINE OF FIRE arrow pointing up-slope . Make sure gunner's quadrant frame shoes rest squarely on bolt heads .

ALI

GNA

RNY

CROSS-ROLL MEASUREMENT

SIDE OF TURNTABLE TU A

BA

ROLL MEASUREMENT ALIGNMENT DATUM

LEVEL INDICATOR

MAIN SCALE MICROMETER FRAME SHOES MAS BLACE FIGURES LINË OFFORE

ALIGNMENT DATUM

NOTE

f.

If unable to center bubble in step f, turn gunner's quadrant end for end and center bubble .

Center bubble in level indicator using radial arm plunger for coarse adjustment and micrometer for fine adjustment.

CONTINUED

2-111

TM 9-1440-600-10 EMPLACEMENT - Continued

2-8.

222

-

Continued.

Gunner's quadrant main scale is marked in 10- mil increments and numbered at 50- mil increments . Micrometer is marked in NOTE 0.2-mil increments and numbered in 1 - mil increments .

g.

Read cross roll angle from main scale and micrometer. If LINE OF FIRE arrow points forward (toward Generator Set A6) , sign is plus ( + ) . If LINE OF FIRE arrow points toward rear of LS , sign is minus (−) .

h.

Add main scale value to micrometer value . Record total with proper sign plus (+) or minus (-) on CROSS ROLL line on Launcher Location/Alinement Data Form .

i.

Set gunner's quadrant on the two roll measurement bolt heads of

SIDE OF TURNTABLE

the ALIGNMENT DATUM with LINE OF FIRE arrow pointing upslope .

Make

sure

HA

BA

CA

T

TU

A

gunner's

quadrant frame shoes squarely on bolt heads.

rest

ROLL MEASUREMENT

ALIGNMENT DATUM CROSS-ROLL MEASUREMENT

NOTE

j.

If unable to center bubble in step j , turn gunner's quadrant end for end and center bubble .

Center bubble in level indicator using radial arm plunger for coarse adjustment and micrometer for fine adjustment .

CONTINUED

2-112

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

Continued .

k.

Read roll

22

angle from

main

scale

and

micrometer.

If LINE

OF

FIRE

arrow

points curbside , the sign is plus ( + ) . If LINE OF FIRE arrow points roadside , the sign is minus (−) . Add main scale value to micrometer value . Record total with proper sign plus

I.

(+) or minus (-) on ROLL line on Launcher Location/Alinement Data Form. m.

Pull back on radial arm

plunger and set pointer to 0 mark on main scale.

Install gunner's quadrant in case.

n.

23

Stow gunner's quadrant in curbside stowage box door rack. Secure with strap .

SYNCHRONIZE DLT.

This step will resynchronize DLT after roadmarch if march order NOTE

was followed . If this is an initial emplacement or if DLT clock power was lost, synchronize DLT using DLT slave synchronizing procedure per para 2-28.

a.

On CCIP A2A2, verify that TIME OF DAY display is counting .

TIME OF DAY PROPAGATION REQUEST DELAY

DAY

HOUR

MIN

SEC

RADEDO

PROCESSOR CONTROL —

-OSCCAL 88888 TRE CONTROL

CONTINUED

2-113

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

23

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

Continued .

On

Receiver-Transmitter A2A3,

RECEIVER - A1

LED

may be

on. This is not a fault. Receiver-Transmitter A2A3 requires ap-

NOTE

proximately 45 seconds to obtain

lock after DLTM - PDU A2A4

is energized .

b.

On CCIP A2A2, momentarily hold RESET switch to up and CEIVER - A1 LED will go off.

release it .

RE-

00 :1

A1 FREQUENCYSELECT

RESET

RECEIVER 21 2

IMA! FRANGARTER

8888 FALAY 10387

FAIR

PROPAGATION GELAYREQUEST

YEST

PROCESSORCONTROL

MODE OBC CAL

AUTO SYNC

RADIO S

TRE CONTRO

SYNC DL TN

DLT TEST

TRBY NORM

KGBY

O AUTO SYNC

TEST NORMAL

O

PROCESSOR CONTROL

OFF

On CCIP A2A2:

C.

(1 )

Check that PROCESSOR CONTROL switch is set to NORM and DLT TEST switch is set to NORMAL

(2)

Set AUTO SYNC switch to up position . After 1 display will advance 9 seconds and stop.

second the TIME OF DAY

CONTINUED

2-114

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

23

EMPLACEMENT - Continued -

Continued .

Within 3 OF

minutes

after setting AUTO

SYNC

switch

up, TIME

DAY display will advance and either SYNC light or AUTO

NOTE SYNC light will come on .

During this 3- minute

interval , TIME

OF DAY display may advance 9 seconds and stop . This cycle may be repeated up to 6 times.

d.

If TIME OF

DAY

display advances and SYNC light comes on ,

go to step

f. If AUTO SYNC lamp comes on , go to step e. e.

If AUTO SYNC light comes on , set OPERATE and AUTO to OFF . Perform DLT slave synchronizing per para 2-28 .

SYNC

switches

TIME OF DAY RESET

DAY

HOUR

MIN

SEC

SYNC

PROPAGATION DELAY NOUEST

OPROCESSORCONTRO

GCCAL 88888 AUTOSYNE CONTRO

O AUTO SYNC

RADIOO

O OPERATE OFF

f.

OFF

Set AUTO SYNC switch to OFF and verify that ECS and LS TIME OF DAY clocks indicate same time . If clocks do not indicate same time ,

perform DLT

slave synchronizing per para 2-28.

g.

Hold RESET switch to RESET momentarily.

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-115

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

223

-

Continued .

Check that fault lights at the following locations are off.

h.

(1 )

DLT Power Supply A2A6.

POWER SUPPLY FAULT-

O PS1

O PS2

O PS3 LAMP TEST

NON-INTERRUPT

O PS4

O PS5 PS6

O

(2)

Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5.

FAULT POWER CONTROL MARKJAL MODE AUTO ANY

! O

TRO? RESET DELAY TUME O

+

(3)

Receiver-Transmitter A2A3.

Θ FAULT RECEIVER

FREQUENCYSELECT

RECEIVER 8888

A1

TRANSMITTER

A O oo o FALL RESET!

A2

TRANSMITTER A3

A11 A12

A7

A14

A13

Θ A4

DO A10 O

CONTINUED

2-116

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-8.

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

23

-

Continued.

(4)

CCIP A2A2 .

PROPAGATION DELAY REQUEST

TEST

FAULT KEY GEN SUMMARY FAULT FAULT PROCESSOR CONTREX

RAD G OBCCAL 888 88 ●TIME CONTROL

i.

24

-

Close and secure both DLTM A2 doors . Lock left door with padlock.

CHECK GENERATOR VOLTAGES AND FREQUENCY.

Check output voltage.

a.

(1 )

Set VOLTS-AMPS switch to positions L1 - LO, L2- LO, and L3-LO . VOLTS A.C. meter should indicate 120 vac red line in each position .

O oooo

A.C. VOLTMETER

-

13

GENERATOR

ENGINE

L1 - LO

FAULT INDICATOR

O

O

O 11 -3- .

O

. 12

L- 12 L

*1i

500

AMPS VOLTS

оо

INCREASE O 88

O

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCY STOP

VOLTAGE ADJUST

(2)

Set VOLTS-AMPS switch to positions L1 - L2, L2- L3 , and L3- L1 . VOLTS A.C meter should indicate 208 vac red line in each position .

CONTINUED

2-117

TM 9-1440-600-10

TM

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

2-1 . -

Continued.

24 E

(3)

If voltage in any position is wrong , set VOLTS-AMPS switch to that position and use VOLTAGE ADJUST rheostat to adjust correct voltage.

(4)

If voltage had to be adjusted , repeat steps ( 1 ) and (2).

b.

Check HERTZ frequency meter for 400 Hz indication . If necessary , use FREQUENCY ADJUST rheostat to adjust frequency to 400 Hz.

O

O

FAULT INDICATOR

GENERATOR

ENGINE

О

HE TZ

ㅎ

O

O

お

INCREASE

O

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT PULL BREAKER FORSTOP EMERGENCY FREQUENCY ADJUST

IF ANY FAULT INDICATOR LIGHT COMES ON, STOP ENGINE AND CALL ENGINEER MAINTENANCE .

CAUTION

C.

Close

Generator Set A6 control

cubicle doors .

CONTINUED

2-1

2-118

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-8 .

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

24

Continued .

1.

Check with ECS if GM torque tube handles are to be unlocked . If they are not to be unlocked , go to step 26.

NOTES 2.

Unlock GMs in following order: Upper Right ( UR) ,

Lower Right

(LR) , Upper Left ( UL) , Lower Left (LL) .

25

UNLOCK GM TORQUE TUBE HANDLE ON EACH CANISTER .

a.

b.

Remove quick release pin by GM torque tube handle .

Pull

and

hold

O DESSICANT HOLDER

RECORDS

spring - loaded J2

plunger. Rotate torque tube han-

UNLOCK

DO NOT LATCH OR UNLATCH UNLESS GM ELEVATED

dle ccw to UNLOCK position .

RELIEF VALVE PUSHTO RELEASE PRESSURE O

O

0 DESSICANT HOLDER

RECORDS

J2 C.

OCK

UNL

DONOT LATCH OR UNLATCH UNLESS GM ELEVATED

Release

plunger .

Check that

plunger seats in right detent hole

RELIEF VALVE PUSH TO RELEASE PRESSURE

to secure torque tube handle . d.

1

Check that red paint shows to left of torque tube handle.

e.

Insert quick release pin in hole to left of torque tube handle .

f.

Repeat steps a thru e for LR , UL, and LL.

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-119

TM

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 .

2-8. 26

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

TRANSFER LS CONTROL TO ECS.

E a.

One crewmember (driver) get in tractor.

b.

One crewmember remove wheel chocks from tractor.

TURNTABLE CAN BE REMOTELY TRAINED 1 MINUTE AFTER

WARNING

LOCAL- RMT SWITCH IS SET TO RMT. SERIOUS INJURY CAN RESULT IF STRUCK BY THE MOVING PLATFORM .

NOTE

C.

Check with ECS to determine if they are ready before placing LS in remote .

On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , verify the following:

(1 )

All BITE lights off.

(2)

All POWER on.

BITE

POWER SUPPLIES

SUPPLIES lights

O

O c

O

O

O +5 VDC

O 15 VDC

O +28 VDC

Το

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT の O

BITE

POWER SUPPLIES

MISSILE

PLATFORM.

MAGT ・이이 이이

O

PLATFORM RAMED AZBAUTH

O

HAZARD

READT

O

O LAUNCHER LOCAL

O

DISCON MECTED 0101010 RAME

STOP O

LAUNCHINGSTA

O

START PRING PLATOON • 5

BITE TEST O STAFUR LAMP TEST

PANE: O OFF

O CONTINUED

2-11

2-120

TM 9-1440-600-10

Continued .

(3)

LOCAL

and

LCHR

READY

LAUNCHER LOCAL- RMT

lights on . (4)

PLATFORM ‫ר‬

PLATFORM RAISED and AZIMUTH READY lights on.

PLATFORM RAISED

AZIMUTH READY

O

LCHR READY LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

OOO BITE

POWER SUPPLIES O

O MISSILE UPPER UPPER

PLATFORM-

Θ O

HER

= 0 | 0 |0 | 0 O 0101010

LAUNCHING STA

STOP O

-

START O

(5)

MISSILE READY lights on if missile heaters turned on and

O

FRING

GMs at operating temperature .

BITETEST STATUS LAMPTEST

STATUSLAMPs NORMAL O

O

O

26

EMPLACEMENT - Continued

O

2-8.

(6)

MISSILE HAZARD lights off at

O

all positions having live missiles with umbilicals connected . (7)

MISSILE HAZARD lights on at all positions having dummy missiles , empty canisters , empty

UPPER L

MISSILE UPPER R LWR L

locations , or live missiles with disconnected umbilicals .

LWR R

MISSILE HAZARD 0000

(8)

MISSILE

DISCONNECTED

lights off at all positions having live missiles with umbilicals

MISSILE READY

0

| 0

| 0 | 0

connected .

MISSILE DISCONNECTED

0101010

CONTINUED

2-121

TM

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-1

2-8.

EMPLACEMENT- Continued -

Continued.

26 [

LAUNCHING STA switch set to correct address . (9)

(10)

FIRING PLATOON switch set to correct address.

Install key and set LOCAL- RMT switch to RMT.

d.

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

LAUNCHER RMT LOCAL

2

Ο

LAUNCHERLOCAL

O

POWER SUPPLIES

BITE

LAUNCHING STA

O

MISSILE UPPER L UPPERR 0000

PLATFORM

O

7 MADS 6

이이 이이

O

LOB PLATFORM RAISED ADRAUTH MADY READY 00

0101010

5 Ø

SAI O

FIRING PLATOON 1

O

START 2

O

6

STATUS LAMPTEXT

10

0 [

оо

o

:0

10

Ø

3

O

e.

27

Close and secure LEM A1 right- hand door.

LEAVE SITE .

a.

All crewmembers get in tractor and drive to assigned remote area.

b.

Report to ECS that area is clear.

CONTINUED

2-12

2-122

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-9 .

POSITION OF CONTROLS PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF POWER

STEP

A

LOCATION

CONTROL POSITION

CONTROL

LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS

MODULE (LEM) A1

1

MAIN POWER - AC

Power Control Panel ( PCP)

OFF

CB1 circuit breaker

MAIN POWER DC AC Θ

RUN TIME

→ CB1

M1

Insert Key

LOCAL - RMT

LCU Display Panel A1A14

LOCAL

Keyswitch O

Remove LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLIES

LOCAL

-LAUNCHERPLATFORMLOCAL RMT

Key

O

LAUNCHERBITE

RMT

1.48 VDC VEC MISSILE UPPERL UPPERR MISSILE HAZARD 0

MISSALE READY

O

LOHR PLATFORM SAISED AZIMISH READY READY

이이 이이

O

Ο

DISCON NECTED 0101010

Θ

LAUNCHINGSTA

STOP

O

RAISE

O

START O

FIRINGPLATOON LAMPS PANELLAMPS NORMAL BITE TEST STATUS OFF DIN OFF STATUS LAMPTEST

O

2

CB2

O

CONTINUED

2-123

TM

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1

2-9.

POSITION OF CONTROLS PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF POWER - Continued

STEP

3

CONTROL

LOCATION

RAISE-STOP- LWR

LCU Display Panel A1A14

CONTROL POSITION

STOP

switch LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

RAISE BITE

401P

O

O LAUNCHERLOCAL

POWER SUPPLIES

MISSILE

LWR

O

PLATFORM-

の

LAUNCHINGSTA 2

RAISE

O

O

NEADY LOR PLATFORM 이이 이이 MARY RAISED AZMUTH READY DISCON MECTED 0101010

STOP O

FRINGPLATOON

4

оо

STATUSLAMPS NORMAL PANEL OFF LAMPTEST

101

:0

% 10

2

O

O

START

BITE TEST -OFF-

OFF

STATUS LAMP TEST switch BITE TEST

OFF STATUS LAMP TEST

5

PANEL LAMPS switch

OFF

PANEL LAMPS ON

OFF

CONTINUED

2-1 :

2-124

TM 9-1440-600-10 POSITION OF CONTROLS PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF POWER - Continued

2-9 .

STEP

6

LOCATION

CONTROL POSITION

CONTROL

LAUNCHING STA

LCU Display Panel A1A14

ASSIGNED ADDRESS

O

BITE

LAUNCHING STA 1

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLIES

2

8

о

O

MISSILE PLATFORM . UPPERL UPPERA HAZARD

LAUNCHER LOCAL C

3

7 0| 0 |0 |0 O

BAMBO READY PLAYPOR ööö

6

# 0000 LAURICHING STA

5

O

STOP START O

NORMAL DIFE TENY STATUSLAMPS O STATUS LAMPTEST

©

оо

O

ATOON

e

7

FIRING PLATOON

AS-

SIGNED ADDRESS FIRING PLATOON 1

2

6

3

5 Ô 4

CONTINUED

2-125

TN TM 9-1440-600-10 2-1

[

POSITION OF CONTROLS PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF POWER · Continued

2-9 .

LOCATION

STEP

8

CONTROL POSITION

CONTROL

Power Distribution Unit

All circuit breakers

(PDU) A1A2

and switches.

OFF

LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Θ Θ →

O Θ

BLOWER OPR

O

BLOWER ON

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAIN A Θ ON Θ

OFF

OFF

Θ MISSILE HEATER AC, UPR R MSL UPRL MSL MAIN B ON Θ ON ээ ON OFF

OFF

OFF

O

LCHR ELEX 5 VDC PWR SPLY ON

PWRORD SPLY ON

LCHR ELEX 28 VDC PWR SPLY ON

MSL VDC PWR5SPLY ON

MSL GYRO/CLOCK PWR SPLY ON

LWR L MSL ON

LWR R MSL ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

MSL PAFUTL PWRSPLY ON

MSL TWT FIL PWR SPLY ON

OFF

OFF

CNVCOUT MOT CONT CANISTER UNITAC AC HTR Ꮎ ON Ꮎ Ꮎ ON OFF

OFF

LAMPS ON OFF TEST Θ

O

O CONTINUED

2-11 2-126

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-9.

POSITION OF CONTROLS PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF POWER - Continued

STEP

B

LOCATION

CONTROL POSITION

CONTROL

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE (DLTM) A2 Power Distribution Unit

All circuit breakers

(PDU) A2

and switches.

OFF

O DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

CNVC OUT ON

MAIN ON A

OFF LAMPS

OFF BLOWER ON

ON OFF TEST

28 VDC O BLOWER OPR

O →

Ꮎ

OFF CLKONPWR

DGTL PROCESSOR ON O OFF

OFF

0

O

OFF

PWR SPLY O ON

O

O

C

0

O

GENERATOR SET A6

DO NOT START GENERATOR SET A6 UNTIL LAUNCHING STATION IS

WARNING

CONNECTED TO A SUITABLE GROUND .

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH CAN RESULT FROM OPERATING AN UNGROUNDED LAUNCHING STATION .

CONTINUED

2-127

TM TM 9-1440-600-10 2-1

2-9.

POSITION OF CONTROLS PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF POWER - Continued

STEP

1

LOCATION

Launching station ( LS ) ground terminal 42J3

CONTROL

Ground cable 42W3

CONTROL POSITIONS

Connected between

semitrailer connector

42J3 and ground rod

2

TM 5-6115-464-12

Perform generator set BEFORE OPERATION

All complete

CHECKS AND SERVICES

CONTINUED

2-1

2-128

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-9 .

POSITION OF CONTROLS PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF POWER

STEP

3

LOCATION

- Continued

CONTROL

Generator Set A6 , roadside

FUEL SELECTOR VALVE

CONTROL POSITION

SET TANK

LECTOR VALW RUB SUPPLY

4

Control panel

DC CONTROL

Pushed in

circuit breaker

(closed)

GENERATOR

O! DC CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULL FOR EMERGENCY STOP DECONTRO PULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

CONTINUED

2-129

TN

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1

2-9 .

[

POSITION OF CONTROLS PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF POWER- Continued

STEP

5

CONTROL

LOCATION

ENGINE PRIMER switch

Control panel

O

CONTROL POSITION

OFF

FALLTIDEATOR

O

10

GENERATION ENGINE PRIMER ON

DCCONTROL

6

START- RUN - STOP

STOP switch

START

RUN STOP

7

CKT BRK switch

OPEN

CKT BRK CKT BRK CLOSE

OPEN

8

PANEL LIGHT switch

OFF

PANEL LIGHT ON

OFF

CONTINUED

2-1

2-130

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-9 .

POSITION OF CONTROLS PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF POWER- Continued

STEP

9

LOCATION

CONTROL

VOLTAGE SENSING

Control panel

CONTROL POSITION

LOCAL

switch

SENSING

VOLTAGE

V REMOTES

LOCAL G

09

CONFRO

10

10

PARALLEL OPERA-

SINGLE

TION - SINGLE

UNIT

UNIT OPERATION

OPERA-

switch

TION

PARALLEL OPERATION

SINGLEUNIT OPERATION

11

BATTLE SHORT

OFF

switch

KC

ON

OFF BATTLE SHORT

2-131

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-10 .

POWER - UP

Use this procedure to power-up the launching station ( LS) after NOTE a complete power-down . A typical use is after refueling Generator Set A6.

1

Open and latch Generator Set A6 control cubicle and air vent doors.

2

Roll up air inlet and air outlet covers on Launcher Electronics Module ( LEM) A1 and Data Link Terminal Module ( DLTM ) A2.

a.

At rear of each module ,

unsnap

six snap fasteners at bottom and sides of air inlet cover. Roll up and tie each cover. b.

On

both sides of each

unsnap bottom

eight snap

module ,

fasteners

at

and sides of air exhaust

cover. Roll up and tie each cover .

TYPICAL LEM A1 DLTM A2

CONTINUED

2-132

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-10. 3

POWER- UP- Continued

Remove padlock and open DLTM A2 doors. If wind is over 45 knots , insert locking pin in hole at top of door.

198

4

Open LEM A1 doors . Same as DLTM A2 access doors , except there is no padlock.

5

Position controls on LEM A1 , DLTM A2, and Generator Set A6 per para 2-9.

6 START

On Generator Set A6 , set STARTRUN -STOP switch to RUN .

STOP

Ο

о

O e

ENGINE

OOOOOO !.

RUN

FAULTINDICATOR ·

GENERATOR

O

7

Raise safety guard and set BATTLESHORT switch to ON .

OO

STOP

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP ON ତ OFF BATTLE SHORT

CONTINUED

2-133

TM

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1

2-10 .

POWER - UP- Continued

1.

[

Fuel transfer pump makes clicking sounds when transferring fuel into day tank. Pump will stop when day tank is full .

NOTES 2.

START- RUN - STOP switch

must remain in

RUN and

BATTLE-

SHORT switch must remain ON until day tank is filled .

Check that FUEL LEVEL gage indicates an acceptable fuel level .

olgo

8

FAULTINDICATOR

GENERATOR

6 0

OO

O

LEVEL

FUEL LEVEL

9

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

O

Ο

Check that LOW OIL PRESS , UNDER VOLT, and

UNDER FREQ lights are

LOW OIL PRESS

UNDER FREQ

UNDER VOLT

on .

ON

When day tank is full (about 2 minutes, clicking sound stops) set BATTLESHORT switch to OFF . Lower

- ) (

10

OFF BATTLE SHORT

safety guard .

11

Hold TEST OR RESET switch down and check that all FAULT INDICATOR lights are on . Release switch .

TEST OR RESET

CONTINUED

2-1

2-134

TM 9-1440-600-10

POWER - UP- Continued

2-10.

DO NOT CRANK

ENGINE FOR MORE THAN

15 SECONDS

AT A TIME . ALLOW STARTER TO COOL AT LEAST 3 MINUTES BETWEEN TRIES.

CAUTION

If outside temperature

is

50° F

( 10°C) or

below ,

perform

step

NOTE 12. If temperature is above 50°F ( 10°C) , perform step 13.

12

If temperature is 50°F ( 10°C) or below , start Generator Set A6 with start aid procedure as follows.

a.

Hold

START- RUN - STOP switch

to START to crank engine . Do not

START

hold for more than 15 seconds.

OOOOOO!

RUN STOP

FAULTINDICATOR

O GENERATOR

ENGINE O

O

о

REVERSE

OVER

b.

While engine is cranking , hold ENGINE PRIMER switch to ON to inject ether , then switch.

ㅎ

お

09

O

C.

release

DCCONTROL CIRCUITBREAKER PULLFORSTOP EMERGENCY

ENGINE PRIMER ON

Release switch to RUN after 15 seconds or when engine starts . When engine starts go to step 14.

DO NOT INJECT ETHER MORE THAN THREE TIMES . IF ENGINE DOES NOT START AFTER THREE TRIES , NOTIFY ENGINEER MAINTENANCE .

CAUTION

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-135

TM 9-1440-600-10

TM

2-1 .

2-10.

POWER - UP- Continued -

12

Continued .

B

13

d.

If engine does not start within 15 seconds , release START- RUN -STOP Switch. Allow starter to cool for 3 minutes.

e.

Repeat steps a and b . If engine does not start after three tries notify Engineer Maintenance .

If temperature is over 50°F ( 10°C) start engine normally as follows.

a.

Hold START- RUN -STOP switch to START for 15 seconds or until OIL PRESSURE gage indicates oil pressure and VOLTS A.C. meter indicates voltage .

L

START

A.C. VOLTMETER

120

RUN

STOP

PRESS OIL PRESSURE

о

FAULT INDICATOR

о GENERATOR

ENGINE O b.

Release switch to RUN when engine starts .

ㅎ

OO

O

ORCUIT BREAKER EMERGENCY STOP

CONTINUED

2-1

2-136

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-10.

14

POWER - UP- Continued

Check output voltage.

a.

Set VOLTS-AMPS switch to positions L1 - LO,

L2- LO, and L3- LO. VOLTS A.C.

meter should indicate 120 Vac red line in each position .

b. Elo

L1-LO L1

L3-L1

tions L1 - L2, L2- L3 , and L3- L1 . VOLTS A.C. meter should in-

500

position.

A.C VO METER

dicate 208 Vac red line in each

LL3O

C.

AMPS VOLTS

Set VOLTS-AMPS switch to posi-

INCREASE

If voltage in any position is wrong , set VOLTS -AMPS switch to that position and use VOLTAGE ADJUST rheostat to adjust to correct voltage .

d.

VOLTAGE ADJUST

Ο

If voltage had to be adjusted , repeat steps a and b.

FAULT INDICATOR O

о e

GENERATOR

O

お

ㅎ

SROLEUNT OPERATION

WATTLEWORY

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

INCREASE 15

Check HERTZ frequency meter for 400 Hz indication . If necessary use FREQUENCY ADJUST rheostat to ad-

ō FREQUENCY ADJUST

just frequency to 400 Hz.

CONTINUED

2-137

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-10 .

POWER- UP - Continued

IF ANY FAULT INDICATOR LIGHT COMES ON, STOP ENGINE AND NOTIFY ENGINEER MAINTENANCE . CAUTION

NOTE

Step 16 applies power to the LS.

16

After 3 minutes engine warmup, hold CKT BRK switch to CLOSE until CKT BRK light comes on . Release CKT BRK switch .

FAULT INDICATOR

GENERATOR

ENGINE

O

OOOOO OOOOOO

O

о

·

O

O CKT BRK CKT BRK CLOSE

OPER

17

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT FULLBREAKER FOR EMERGENCYSTOP

OPEN

Check indicators for normal indications as follows:

a.

All FAULT INDICATOR lights off.

FAULT INDICATOR

2-138

LOW OIL PRESS

COOLANT HIGH TEMP

OVER SPEED

NO FUEL

SHORT CIRCUIT

OVER LOAD

UNDER VOLT

UNDER FREQ

REVERSE POWER

OVER VOLT CONTINUED

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-10.

POWER-UP - Continued

17

b.

Continued.

VOLTS A.C. meter indicates 120 Vac.

FAULTINDICATOR wtro SHORT

O

60

O GENERATOR

ENGINE

A.C. VOLTMETER

ㅎ

09

OPERATION

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

HE TZ C.

HERTZ frequency meter indicates 400 Hz.

お

160 200 d.

120

120

240

T PRESS

T TEMP F

OIL PRESSURE

COOLANT TEMPERATURE

OIL PRESSURE gage

indicates

30 to 60 psig .

e.

COOLANT TEMPERATURE gage indicates 170°F to 200°F .

CONTINUED

2-139

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-10.

18

POWER- UP - Continued Close Generator Set A6 control cubicle doors .

19

On LEM Power Control Panel ( PCP) A1A3 , raise cover and set MAIN POWER - AC CB1 to ON.

MAIN POWER AC DC

RUN TIME

Θ

Θ

20

CB2

CB1

M1

Energize DLTM A2 .

On Power Distribution Unit ( PDU) A2A4, hold LAMPS switch to TEST .

O

O CNVC OUT ON

O

OFF OFF LAMPS BLOWER OFF O TEST

O

O

O.BLOWER OPE O

G

O

O

о

LAMPS ON OFF TEST

O

b.

Θ O

O

fie

@! @

O 0 DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT → MAINA ON C

O

a.

о

O

Check that the two panel lights and

BLOWER

OPR light come BLOWER OPR

on . Release switch . C.

Set LAMPS switch to ON.

ㅇㅎㅇ

CONTINUED

2-140

TM 9-1440-600-10

20

POWER - UP - Continued -

Continued . Ο

d.

Set

BLOWER circuit breaker to

ON O

O O O O DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT " CNVC OUT MARIA PROCESSOR ON ON ON C OFF OFF OFF OFF O-BLOWER OP LAMPS ON BLOWER ON OFF O TEST → OFF

Ο

O

2-10

BLOWER ON

OFF

BLOWER OPR e.

Check that BLOWER OPR light is on before continuing .

O

MAIN A ON + f.

Set MAIN A circuit breaker to ON.

OFF

+ g.

Set

CLK PWR circuit breaker to

CLK PWR ON

ON OFF

28 VDC h.

Check that 28 VDClight is on.

O

NOTE

Tractor over-the- road power is not required for clock synchronization when CLK PWR circuit breaker is ON and 28 VDC light is on.

CONTINUED

2-141

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-10.

20

POWER - UP - Continued -

Continued .

O

CNVC OUT

о O O O O DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O PROCESSOR MAIN ON

O

OFF AMPS

OFF BLOWER ON

0

O i.

Set PWR SPLY circuit breaker to

ON. OFF

OFF

BLOWEROP O

Ο

о O

O

PWR SPLY ON +

O

0 O

о

OFF DGTL PROCESSOR +

j.

Set

DGTL PROCESSOR

ON

+

circuit

breaker to ON.

OFF 21

Energize LEM - PDU A1A2 blower.

a.

O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Θ Θ

Hold LAMPS switch to TEST. BLOWER OPR

Θ

9

LAMPS

MISSILE HEATER AC

OFF

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAINA ON OFF

LCHRSLEX SVDC PWRSPLY

LOW ELEX PWR SPLY

MSL&VOC PWSSPLY

GYROCLOCK PWR SPLY

OFF

OFF

OFF

BLOWER

MAIN OFF

ON OFF

OFF

CNVCOUT

MOT CONT UNITAC ON OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF TEST

PW

OFF

OFF

LAMPS O

OFF

PAPURTL PWRSPLY

Θ

b.

Check that the two panellights and BLOWER OPR lights come

O

O

BLOWER OPR

on. Release switch . Ö C.

Set LAMPS switch to ON.

CONTINUED

2-142

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-10.

POWER-UP - Continued

21

Continued .

Set

d.

BLOWER circuit breaker to

ON .

BLOWER +

ON

+

O O O LCHR ELEX MOL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Θ Θ BLOWER OPR

OFF

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAIN A ON OFF

BLOWER ON OFF

CNVC OUTHTR CANISTER ON OFF

Check that BLOWER

MSL VDC PWR SPLY

OFF

OFF

MSL GYROCLOCK PWR SPLY ON O OFF

PAFURTL SPLY PWR ON OFF

TWTPSPLY PWR ON OFF

MOTCONT UNIT AC ON OFF

O

e.

LCHA ELEX 2 VDC PWR SPLY Ꮎ

LCHRVDCELEX PWR SPLY ON OFF

MAIN B ON OFF

O

O

MISSILE HEATER AC . LPHI MISL UPR & MISL ON ON OFF ON OFF

LAMPS ON

O

O

OPR light

is on before continuing .

BLOWER OPR

22

Set MAIN A and MAIN B circuit breakers to ON .

MAIN B

MAIN A +

ON

OFF

+

+

ON

+

OFF

CONTINUED

2-143

TM 9-1440-600-10

POWER- UP - Continued

2-10 . 23

In the sequence listed below, set the following circuit breakers to ON

1 LCHR ELEX 5 VDC PWR SPLY +

3

2

ON

ORD PWR SPLY +

+

ON

4

LCHR ELEX 28 VDC PWR SPLY

+

+

ON

OFF

OFF

+

6

MSL GYRO/CLOCK PWR SPLY

MOT CONT UNIT AC ON

O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O O O BLOWER OPE

0

+

BLOWER

MISSILE HEATER AC,

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC MAIN A O

OFF

OFF

2

9

8

7

MSL TWT FIL PWR SPLY

6

ON

OFF

OFF

+

5

1 ON

LAMPS

OFF

O

O

ON

3

O

MSL PAFU/ITL PWR SPLY

+

Θ

OFF

Θ

+

ON

OFF

5

ON

MSL 5 VDC PWR SPLY

O

IF CANISTER HEAT IS REQUIRED :

9 CNVC OUT CANISTER HTR AC + ON

OFF

CONTINUED)

2-144

TM 9-1440-600-10

POWER - UP - Continued

2-10 .

24

MAIN POWER DC AC

RUN TIME O

On LEM - PCP A1A3, raise cover and set MAIN POWER - DC CB2 to OFF

CB2

M1

25

Θ

On DLTM Digital Processor A2A2, check TIME OF DAY display.

TIME OF DAY

PROPAGATION DELAYREQUEST

YEST DAY

HOUR

MIN

SEC PROCESSORCONTROL OSC CAL

O AUTOSYNC 88 88 TIMECONTROL

DLT TEST

a.

If counting , set DLT TEST switch TEST

to

NORMAL and

perform

DLT

auto synchronizing per para 2-29.

NORMAL

Go to step 26 below.

• DLT TIME OF DAY CLOCK MUST BE COUNTING La

WARNINGS

BEFORE

PROPER INDICATION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14 MISSILE HAZARD LIGHTS. A MISSILE HAZARD LIGHT ON INDICATES A HAZARDOUS CONDITION ONLY FOR LIVE GM POSITIONS WITH UMBILICAL CONNECTED. MISSILE HAZARD LIGHT WILL NORMALLY BE ON FOR : •

GM POSITIONS HAVING A DUMMY MISSILE . EMPTY CANISTER . EMPTY POSITION . LIVE MISSILE WITH UMBILICAL DISCONNECTED .

• THESE CONDITIONS DO NOT CONSTITUTE A HAZARD. IF ANY MISSILE HAZARD LIGHT IS ON , VISUALLY CHECK THAT POSITION.

IF THAT POSITION

HAS A LIVE

MISSILE WITH

NOTIFY ECS IMMEDIATELY. ADVISE ECS THAT LS WILL REMAIN IN LOCAL MODE. AFTER UMBILICAL

CONNECTED ,

NOTIFYING

ECS,

STRUCTIONS .

LEAVE AREA AND AWAIT FURTHER INDEVICES MAY EXPLODE ,

ORDNANCE

RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-145

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-10 .

POWER - UP - Continued -

25

b.

Continued .

If not counting , perform DLT quick start per para 2-25 and DLT slave synchronizing per para 2-28 . Go to step 26 below .

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , check that all MISSILE HAZARDlights are

BITE

O

POWER SUPPLIES

off at live GM positions .

O

O

READY 0000 O

LCH PLATFORM MEADE RAISED AZMUTH READY ööö

MISSILE UPPER UPPER& HAZAR 010

0

O

PLATFORM

LAUNCHER

O

26

0000

LWR R

STOP

O

MISSILE UPPER R LWR L

UPPER L

101

LAUNCHINGSTA

START

MISSILE HAZARD

0 O

0000

e

FRINGPLATOON

O

оо

OFTETEST STATUSLAMP STATUS LAMPTEST

O

NOTE

O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

On LEM - PDU A1A2 , set MISSILE HEATER AC circuit breakers at live

O

27

Omit step 27 below if GM heat is not required .

Θ

O

G

BLOWER OPR

GM positions to ON if directed by engagement control station ( ECS) .

BLOWER ON OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC, UPR L MSL UPR R MSL‫י‬ O ON ON Θ

OFF

LCHRELEX PWBSVDCSPLY ON OFF

OFF

CNVC OUT CANISTERHTR LWR L MSL Θ ON

LWR R MSL ON Θ

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAINA ON OFF

ORD PWRSPLY ON OFF MOT UNITCONT AC ON OFF

LCHRELEX FAR28VDC SPLY ON OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC, e MAIN ON OFF

MSL5VDC PWRSPLY

GYRO-CLOCK

OFF

OFF

MSI PARUITL PWR SPLY

TWTF FWR

OFF

OFF

OIFF

OFF LAMPS OFF

O OFF

OFF

LAMPS 28

Set LAMPS switch to OFF.

ON OFF TEST CONTINUED

2-146

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-10.

POWER - UP - Continued

p of Jon lut LEM-PDU A1A2 DOOR MUST REMAIN CLOSED AFTER PDU A1A2 IS ENERGIZED SHIELDING .

TO

PREVENT

DEGRADING

EMI

CAUTION

29

Close door.

and

secure

LEM- PDU

A1A2

30

Disconnect outrigger electrical cable from Semitrailer Connector 42W2P1 .

Is Sent Your

‫فن‬

b.

‫ن‬

a.

CURBSIDE

Raise retaining clip to release connector.

Pull connector straight out to free it. Install dust cover on semitrailer connector 42W2P1 . CONTINUED

Change 1

2-147

TM

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-1 . 2-10.

POWER - UP - Continued

31

Disconnect outrigger cable from tractor slave connector . Be careful not to get grease from fifth wheel on cable .

Stow cable in

31.1

tractor roadside BATTERY BOX

stowage box .

L

SLAVE CONNECTOR CURBSIDE OUTRIGGER CABLE

32

At LCU Display Panel A1A14 , perform local BITE test.

a.

b.

Check that all five BITE lights are off.

BITE

Set BITE TEST- OFF - STATUS LAMP TEST switch to

STATUS

LAMP TEST. Check that all BITE lights are on .

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLIES

BITE TEST OFF STATUS LAMP TEST

O

od LAUNCHER LOCAL

PLATFORM-

MISSILE LIPPERA

# 0000

C

LCH PLATFORM RAISED AZMUTH HEADY READY O

O

0000

MECTED 0101010 อ

START

O

:0

O

BITE

STOP 10:

O

Set switch to BITE TEST.

RAISE

10

C.

LAURICHINGSTA

FRINGPLATOON ETATUSLA NORMAN

O

STATUR LANDYERY

JO

0

Fol

lights cycle on and off for 6 seconds. All BITE lights cycle on , test passed .

d.

Set switch to OFF

CONTINUED

2-12 2-148

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-13

POWER -UP - Continued

32.1

On CCIP A2A2, check SUMMARY FAULTlight . If light is on , switch momentarily to RESET SUMMARY FAULT light will go off.

FAU SUMMARY FAULT

hold

RESET

PROPAGATIN

PROCESSOR CONTROL

RESET

10 00 00 Θ

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-148.1 /(2-148.2 blank)

TM

2-1

2-1:

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-10 .

POWER-UP - Continued

GUIDED MISSILES MUST NOT BE CONNECTED IF MISSILE HAZARD LIGHT IS ON AT A LIVE GM POSITION WITH CABLE

La

WARNING

33

On LCU

CONNECTED .

ORDNANCE DEVICES RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

Display Panel A1A14, raise cover and

MAY

EXPLODE ,

hold CONNECT- DISC

switches

to CONNECT at all positions , except where MISSILE HAZARDlights are on , having live GMs with umbilicals connected until corresponding MISSILE DISCONNECTED lights go off.

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT O POWER SUPPLIES

UPPER L

PLATFORM-

LWR R

MISSILE HAZARD C0000

O LAUNCHER

MISSILE UPPER R LWR L

O

BITE

VPC VDC MISSILE LIPPERA MOSLE HAZARD

O

O

MISSILE READY LEN PLATICIUM 이이 이이 RAIDED ATMUTH READY READY OOO DISCON MECTED 0 |0 |0 |0 LAUNCHING STA RAIDE STOP 2

MISSILE DISCONNECTED 0101010

O Θ

C

O

START O

O

:0 0 FRINGPLATOON

NORMAL SITETEST STATUSLAMPS STATUS LAMPTEST

CONNECT CONNECT

O

10

CONNECT CONNECT

DISC

DISC

DISC

DISC

の

34

On DLTM- PDU A2A4, set LAMPS switch to OFF .

о O о

0

ON OFF TEST

fee

0

LAMPS

O

O

O O о DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O O CNVC DGTL MAINON A OUT PROCESSOR ON 28 VDC O ค OFF OFF OFF LAMPSON BLOWER OBLOWEROP ON OTEST OFF O OFF O о о

CONTINUED

2-149

TN

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-1

2-10.

POWER - UP - Continued

35

Close and secure both DLTM A2 doors . Lock left door with padlock .

36

Set engagement control handle to ROTATE

C

ELEV

ROTATE

ROADMARCH

37

On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , check the following conditions.

a.

All BITE lights off. b.

All POWER SUPPLIESlights off.

BITE

POWER SUPPLIES

ОО 00

OOO ОО +5 ±15 +28 VDC VDC VDC 10

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT C. O LAUNCHERLOCAL

C PLATFORM-

POWER SUPPLIES O VDC VDC MISSILE UPPERL UPPER B HAZARD O

O

All

MISSILE

HAZARD lights off.

MISSILE READY lights on . MS-

O

BITE

SILE DISCONNECTED lights off .

O

Ol

MECTED 0101010

UPPER L

MISSILE LWR L UPPER R

LWR R

MISSILE HAZARD 0000

STOP

O

SAIBE

이이 이이 O

LAUNCHINGSTA

MISSLE READY

O

RAISED ADMUTH READY READY PLATFORM

0 | 0 | 0 | 0

START

MISSILE READY O

[

FIRINGPLATOON

оо

LAMPS PANELLAS STATUS NORMAL O O OM OFF

O

0

STATUS LAMPTEST

MISSILE DISCONNECTED

0101010 O

CONTINUED 2-12

2-150

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-10 .

POWER- UP - Continued -

Continued .

37

d.

LOCAL and LCHR READY lights e.

on.

PLATFORM

RAISED

and AZI-

MUTH READYlights on.

LAUNCHERLOCAL- RMT

LCHR READY

f.

LAUNCHING

STA and FIRING PLATOON switches set to correct

LAUNCHING STA 2

O O

3

7 O

6

O

READY LCHR PLATFORM 이이 이이 READY READY RAISED AZIMUTH OOO DSCON MECTED 0101010

O

FIRING PLATOON 1

STOP CONNECT

2

0

e

O

O

POWER SUPPLIES O VDC VOC MISSILE PLATFORMUPPERA HAZARO

RAISE

O О

0

O

10 の

BITE

LAUNCHING STA

AZIMUTH READY

addresses .

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

LAUNCHER LOCAL

PLATFORM RAISED

START OO

O

0

O

0

MITETEST STATUS LAMPS PANELLAMP OFF D STATUS LAMPTEST

3

5

O

FIRINGPLATOON

TURNTABLE CAN BE REMOTELY TRAINED 1 MINUTE AFTER LOCAL- RMT SWITCH IS SET TO RMT, SERIOUS INJURY CAN

WARNING

38

RESULT IF STRUCK BY THE MOVING PLATFORM .

Set LS to remote mode. LO

CA

L

a.

Insert key in LOCAL- RMT switch . RM

T

39

b.

Set switch to RMT

C.

Check that LOCAL light is off.

Close and secure LCU Display Panel A1A14 door on LEM A1 .

Change 1

2-151

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-11 .

POWER - DOWN

STAY CLEAR OF LAUNCHER MECHANICS PLANE OF ROTATION WHEN

LOCAL-RMT KEYSWITCH

ON

LCU

DISPLAY

PANEL A1A14 IS SET TO RMT (REMOTE ) . TURNTABLE CAN

WARNING

BE ROTATED REMOTELY THEN , AND YOU CAN BE

HURT.

REMAIN CLEAR UNTIL KEYSWITCH IS SET TO LOCAL , LOCAL LIGHT IS ON AND KEY IS REMOVED .

1.

Use this procedure when a complete power- down is required .

2.

This procedure keeps tractor 28-volt Data Link Terminal

NOTES ( DLT)

clock power supplied to the launching station ( LS) .

Position tractor no further than 4 feet ( 1.22 meters) from electrical cable can be connected .

semitrailer so outrigger

10

OF

1

0

CURBSIDE

Le WARNING

DO NOT LEAVE TRACTOR UNATTENDED WITHOUT CHOCKING WHEELS. TRACTOR MAY ROLL , RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

CONTINUED

2-152

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-11 .

2

POWER - DOWN - Continued

-

Continued .

Pull out tractor PARKING

a.

BRAKE

control ,

place transmission range selector

lever in neutral (N ) , and leave engine running . b.

Remove chock blocks from stowage in tractor roadside stowage box and chock tractor rear wheels as follows: STOWAGE

(1 )

If tractor is facing uphill, place chock blocks behind tractor rear wheels ,

both

curbside

CHOCK BOTH SIDES

and

roadside .

ROADSIDE CHOCK BOTH SIDES

(2)

If tractor

is facing

downhill ,

place chock blocks in front of rear wheels, both curbside and roadside.

ROADSIDE

ROADSIDE ONLY

(3)

If tractor is level , place chock block in front of rear wheel on curbside and behind rear wheel CURBSIDE ONLY

on roadside .

ROADSIDE

Through remainder of this procedure , chock blocks will be shown NOTE for tractor as in level position Chock as described in step b.

above

unless grade is shown.

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-153

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-11 .

3

POWER - DOWN - Continued

Open Launcher Electronics Module ( LEM ) A1 doors. If wind is over 45 knots insert locking pin in hole at top of door.

H

4

On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , set LS to local mode .

a.

Set LOCAL- RMT switch to LOCAL

b.

(Deleted) .

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

の

CA

L

MT

0000 이이 이이

O

MADY PLATFORM AZMOUTH ööö

-R

O

O

LO

PLATFORM-

O

LAUNCHER-

POWERSUPPLIES O MISSILE UPPERL UPPERR

0101010

START

O

:0

STOP 10: O

BAIRE

Ø

O

の

LAURICHINGSTA

Fol

STATU LAMPTEST

O

STATUSLAMPS оо の

C.

Check that LOCAL light is on .

d.

Remove and retain key.

CONTINUED

2-154

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-11 .

POWER - DOWN .- Continued

IF ANY MISSILE HAZARD LIGHT IS ON, VISUALLY CHECK THAT POSITION. IF THAT POSITION HAS A LIVE

MISSILE

WITH UMBILICAL CONNECTED , NOTIFY ECS IMMEDIATELY . ADVISE ECS THAT LS WILL REMAIN IN LOCAL MODE. AFTER NOTIFYING ECS, LEAVE AREA AND AWAIT FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS . ORDNANCE DEVICES MAY EXPLODE ,

WARNING

RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

5

Check that MISSILE

HAZARD lights

are off at all positions where GM cables are connected to live GMs.

6

UPPER L

MISSILE UPPER R LWR L

LWR R MISSILE HAZARD C0000

To disconnect

missiles , raise cover and hold CONNECT- DISC switches to DISC at all positions until correspond-

ing MISSILE go off.

DISCONNECTED lights

MISSILE DISCONNECTED

0 | 0 | 0 |0 Θ Θ

CONNECT CONNECT

DISC

DISC

CONNECT CONNECT

DISC

DISC

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-154.1 /(2-154.2 blank)

TA

2-

] 2-1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-11 .

POWER - DOWN - Continued

7

Electrically rotate turntable to the 180° position per para 2-22.

8

Connect outrigger electrical cable to Semitrailer Connector 42W2P1 . a.

Remove

cable from

tractor

roadside stowage box.

BATTERY OUTRIGGER CABLE

a.1 .

Connect

outrigger

BOX

cable to

tractor slave connector .

SLAVE CONNECTOR

0

CURBSIDE

b.

Carefully route cable from tractor to semitrailer. Be careful not to get grease from fifth wheel on cable.

C.

Remove

dust cover from

Semi-

trailer Connector 42W2P1 .

d.

Connect

cable to

Connector

42W2P1 by pushing straight in . e.

Lower spring retainer to lock cable connector in place.

CONTINUED

T

Change 1

2-155

TM 9-1440-600-10

TM

2-11 .

POWER - DOWN- Continued

2-1 9

At LEM Power Control Panel (PCP) A1A3 , raise cover and set MAIN -

MAIN POWER AC DC

POWER - DC CB2 to ON.

C

RUN TIME O

C →

10

CB2

CB1

M1

Remove padlock and open Data Link Terminal Module ( DLTM ) A2 doors . If wind is over 45 knots insert locking pin in hole at top of door.

11

On Computer- To-Communications Interface Processor A2A2, set DLT TEST switch to TEST.

DLT TEST

DELAY

TEST PROCESSORCONTRO-

12

In the sequence

AUTOSTRIC 88888 THE CONTROL-

NORMAL

listed

below,

set the following circuit breakers on

LEM

Power

Distribution Unit ( PDU) A1A2 to OFF.

2

UPR L MSL

ON

3

UPR R MSL

+

+

ON

+

LWR R MSL

ON

OFF

Θ

+

BLOWER ON OFF

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAIN A ON OFF

MAIN B

00

OFF

LCHRELEX FWRSVDC SPLY ON O

FWRORDSPLY ON

LCHR ELEX 28 VDC PWR SPLY

GYRDCLOCK PWRSPLY

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

CNVC OUTHTR CANISTER ON OFF

MOTCONT UNITAC ON OFF

6

5

OFF

OFF

3

4

OFF

6

MSL TWT FIL PWR SPLY

+

ON

OFF

5

4

O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Θ O BLOWER OPR

LWR L MSL

OFF

OFF

Offe

1

ON

@ OFF

+

MSL PAFU/ITL PWR SPLY

+

ON

O O

O

O

+

OFF CONTINUED

2-1

2-156

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-11 .

POWER - DOWN - Continued -

12

Continued .

ON

CNVC OUT CANISTER HTR AC Θ ON

OFF

OFF

MOT CONT UNIT AC +

9

8

7

11

10

MSL GYRO/CLOCK PWR SPLY +

ON

MSL 5 VDC PWR SPLY +

+

+

ON

OFF

OFF

12

LCHR ELEX 28 VDC PWR SPLY

O O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O BLOWER OFF

ORD PWR SPLY

O +

+

ON O

ON

OFF

OFF

16

LAUNG 15 ONCS AC,

OFF

OFF 10

(13): (12) 12.11

13

7

+

+

+

TWYARSLSPLY FIS FAR ON OFF

17

Q

16

O

17

BLOWER

MAIN A

ON

MSL PARUITI PARSPLY

OFF

OFF

+

OFF

O O

15

9

OFF

OFF

Θ

ON

OFF

Θ

ON

OFF MAIN B

O MISSILE HEATER AC UPH & ABSL UPRA ARSL

ON

14

LCHR ELEX 5 VDC PWR SPLY

14 ON OFF

+

ON

LAMPS +

ON OFF

OFF

OFF

TEST T

CONTINUED

2-157

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-11 .

13

POWER - DOWN- Continued

In the sequence

listed

below,

circuit breakers on

set the following

DLTM - PDU

A2A4 to OFF.

O O NK TERM MDL POWER DISTR

о

O

2

1

2

CNVC OUT ON DGTL PROCESSOR

0

ΘON

OFF

OFF

OFF

PWR SPLY ON

65 TEST OFF

e

3 OFF

O →

Ꮎ

OFF

OFF

4

3

+

CLK PWR ON

O

O

O

→

6

5

MAIN A ON

Θ

BLOWER ON

LAMPS

ON OFF TEST

OFF

14

OFF

OFF

At LEM - PCP A1A3, raise cover and set MAIN POWER - AC CB1 to OFF .

ge

MAIN POWER DC AC

RUN TIME →

M1

CB2

CB1

Ꮎ

→

CONTINUED

2-158

TM 9-1440-600-10

15

16

POWER - DOWN- Continued Open and latch Generator Set A6 control cubicle doors.

Shut-down Generator Set A6.

a.

On control cubicle , press CKT BRK switch to OPEN until CKT

CKT BRK CKT BRK CLOSE

BRK light goes off.

b.

Allow engine to run for 3 minutes with no load.

C.

Set START- RUN -STOP switch to

OPEN STOP . Engine will stop .

START

e

οι

2-11 .

о

O

ENGINE

®

FALAT INDICATOR

GENERATOR

O

RUN STOP

OCCONTROL BREAKER CIRCUIT PULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

CONTINUED

2-159

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-11 .

POWER - DOWN- Continued

NOTE

17

If the LS is to 20 below.

remain

powered-down ,

perform steps

17 thru

Close and secure both DLTM A2 doors. Lock left door with padlock .

B 8

18

..

18

Close and secure both LEM A1 doors.

19

Roll down and secure air inlet and air outlet covers on LEM A1 and DLTM A2.

20

Close Generator Set A6 control cubicle and air vent doors .

2-160

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-12 .

1

ENERGIZE LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1 Check that all controls are set as listed in para 2-9A.

ELECTRONICS

WHEN LAUNCHER

MODULE (LEM) POWER

DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PDU) A1A2 IS ENERGIZED , KEEP LEMPDU A1A2 DOOR CLOSED UNLESS MAINTENANCE IS BEING PERFORMED . CAUTION

2

On Power Control Panel ( PCP) A1A3, raise cover and set MAIN 021 to ON.

POWER - AC

MAIN POWER/ AC DC O

RUN TIME → O

→

CB1 O

M1

On Power Distribution Unit (PDU) A1A2, hold LAMPS switch to TEST.

O O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O BLOWER OPR

Θ

BLOWER

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAINA

OFF

OFF

LCHRELEX PWR8VDCSPLY

O

OFF

ORD PWRSPLY ON OFF

CRIVE OUTHTR CANISTER

MOT CONT UNITAC

LCHA ELEX Z VOC FWRSPLY OFF

VOC MSL &SPLY PWR ON OFF MSI PARUSTU PWA SPLY

OFF

OFF

MAIN ON OFF MSL GYRO SPLY PWR CLOCK OFF MSLFE TWY PWRSPLY ON OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC UPALMSL LIPA A MISL ON OFF OFF

LAMPS

ON LWRLMSL ON OFF

LWRRMSL ON OFF

OFF TEST

LAMPS ON TEST O

3

CB2

9

Θ O

O

O

O

CONTINUED

2-161

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-12. 4

ENERGIZE LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1 - Continued

BLOWER OPR

Check that the two panel lights and BLOWER OPR Release switch .

light

come

on .

O

5

O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

Set LAMPS switch to ON .

O BLOWER OPE

LAMPS

6

BLOWER

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAINA

OFF LOHRELEX VDC FARSPLY

LCHBELEX

MEL PAR &VOC SPLY

OFF

OFF

OFF

O

ON OFF TEST

Set BLOWER circuit breaker to ON.

CNVCOUTHTR CANISTER BLOWER ON

MISSILE HEATER AC UPB &MBL OFF

GYROCL

PAFUITL

MOTCONT UNITAC ON OFF

о

O

O

O

OFF

7

Check that BLOWER OPR light is on before continuing .

Data Link Terminal Module (DLTM ) A2 blower must be on before LEM power supplies are energized . If DLTM- PDU A2A4 is not

NOTE energized , perform steps 8 thru 12. If DLTM - PDU A2A4 is energized , go to step 13.

On DLTM-PDU A2A4, hold LAMPS switch to TEST.

0 9

O

LAMPS ON OFF TEST

O O O O O DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT PROCESSOR MAINA ON C 3 OFF OFF BLOWER BLOWER O ON

O CNVC OUT ON C OFF

O

8

O

O

O O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

CONTINUED

2-162

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-12.

ENERGIZE LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1 - Continued

9❘ Check that the two panel lights and BLOWER OPRlight come on . Release switch .

BLOWER OPR 10

Set LAMPS switch to ON.

LAMPS O

ON OFF TEST

O O

Set BLOWER circuit breaker to ON.

OFF O

Ο

O

O

11

OFF LAMPS O TEST OFF

O

CNVC OUT ON

O O O O DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT G PROCESSOR MAINA ON 20VDC OFF BLOWEROPE O

G O

O

O

O

O

BLOWER ON

OFF

12

Check that BLOWER OPRlight is on before continuing .

O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

O

BLOWER OPA

BLOWER OFF LCHRELEX PWRVDCSPLY ON OFF

CNVCOUT CAMSTERHTR OFF

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAIN ON OFF

OFF

MOT UNITCONT AC ON OFF

LCHRELEX 28VDC PWRSPLY

MEL&VDC PWR SPLY

OFF

OFF

PAFURTL SPLY PWR OFF

MAIN OFF

GYROCLOCK PWR SPLY ON OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC, UPRLMBL UPR R MEL ON OFF OFF LWR&MBL ON OFF

TWTFSPLY PWR ON OFF

LIN OFF LAMPS ON OFF TEST

O O

13

O

O

On LEM- PDU A1A2, set MAIN A and MAIN B circuit breakers to ON.

MAIN A ON Θ

OFF

MAIN B ON Θ OFF

CONTINUED

2-163

9-1440-600-10

TM

F

14

[

ENERGIZE LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A - Continued

In the sequence listed below, set the following circuit breakers to CN .

1 LCHR ELEX 5 VDC PWR SPLY

+

3

2

+

ON

LCHR ELEX 28 VDC PWR SPLY

ORD PWR SPLY ON

+

O

O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Θ

OBLOWER OPP

MSL 5 VDC PWR SPLY ON

ON

OFF

4

Θ

+

OFF

OFF

+ LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC MAIN A O ON OFF

BLOWER O ON OFF

MAIN B O ON OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC UPA MS ON OFF

OFF 1 ON OFF

5

2

→

4 ON OFF

5 ON OFF

7

8 ON OFF

Θ

MSL GYRO/CLOCK PWR SPLY

OFF

OFF

ON OFF

ON OFF

LAMPS TEST

ON

Q

+

3 ON OFF

6

9

TA

2-12.

2-*

O

O

O

O

OFF

6

8

7

MOT CONT UNIT AC ON

OFF

+

MSL PAFU/ITL PWR SPLY

+

+

ON

OFF

MSL TWT FIL PWR SPLY

+

ON

OFF

IF CANISTER HEAT IS REQUIRED :

9 CNVC OUT CANISTER HTR AC + ON

OFF J

2-164

2-1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-12

ENERGIZE LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1 - Continued

GUIDED MISSILES (GM) MUST NOT BE CONNECTED IF MISSILE HAZARD LIGHT IS ON AT A LIVE GM POSITION WITH

WARNING

ITS CABLE

CONNECTED .

ORDNANCE

DEVICES

MAY

EX-

PLODE RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

Omit step 15 if local BITE test is to be performed or if GMs should not be connected for any reason .

NOTE

15

On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , connect GMs . Raise cover and hold CONNECT-DISC switches to CONNECT at all positions except where MISSILE HAZARD lights are on , having live GMs with umbilicals connected , until corresponding MISSILE DISCONNECTED lights go off.

UPPER L

MISSILE LWR L UPPER R

LWR R

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT MISSILE HAZARD 00 00

0 | 0 |0 |0

Θ

RA

START

MISSILE DISCONNECTED

CNBC

DISC

CASC

CONNECT DISC

O

Ok

O

の

LAUNCHING sta

O

READY 이이 이이 RAISED ADAMUTH READY PLATFORM O MISSILE DISCOM NECTED 이이 이이

Ô . FIRING PLATOON

O BITE TEST STAPLTYST LAMP

16

o

POWER SUPPLIES ၁ ဝ YDC PLATFORMLIPPERL MISSILE MISSILE MAZAND C0000

O

BITE

PANEL LAMPY O O OFF

Check that LOCAL light is on .

CONNECT CONNECT

DISC

DISC

CONNECT CONNECT

DISC

DISC

LAUNCHERLOCAL RMT Ӧ

17

Check that the three PUS lights are on.

POWER SUPPLIES ООО +5 ±15 +28 VDC VDC VDC CONTINUED

2-165

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-12 .

ENERGIZE LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1- Continued

DLTM A2 MUST BE ENERGIZED AND TIME OF DAY CLOCK MUST BE COUNTING BEFORE MISSILE HEATER AC CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE SET TO ON.

CAUTION

Omit step 18 if GM heat is not required .

NOTE ए

18

On LEM - PDU A1A2 , set MISSILE HEATER AC circuit breakers at live GM positions to ON if directed by engagement control station ( ECS).

O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT MISSILE HEATER AC UPR R MSL UPR L MSL ON ON

BLOWER OPA

BLOWER ON

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAINA

MAIS

OFF

OFF

LCH20VDC ELEX FARSPLY

GYROCLOCK PWR SPLY

MISSILE HEATER AC UPR& MSL UPR MSU OFF

LCHR

OFF O

CNVC OUTHTR CANISTER

PAPUSTL

MOT CONT UNITAC

LWR L MSL Θ ON

OFF

OFF

2-166

O

Θ O

LWR R MSL ON Θ

LAMPS TEST

OFF

O

OFF

OFF

O

O

O

OFF

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-13 .

ENERGIZE DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2

1

Check that all controls are set as listed in para 2-9B.

2

On

Launcher

Electronics

Module

(LEM ) Power Control Panel (PCP) A1A3 , raise cover and set MAIN

MAIN POWER AC DC

RUN TIME

POWER - AC CB1 to ON. CB1

M1

CB2

→

3

On Data Link Terminal LAMPS switch to TEST .

Module

Power Distribution

0

O CNVC

O

OFF

hold

O O O O O O DATA LINK TERM MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT → → → PROCESSOR MAINA

O

OPP CLAONPAR

O BLOWEROPH

G

OFF ON ON BLOWER OFF TEST OFF

O

ON ค ) OFF TEST

O

LAMPS

Unit ( DLTM- PDU ) A2A4 ,

о

O

O

O

O

O

O

4

O

Check that the two panel lights and BLOWER OPR light come on .

O

BLOWER OPR O

5

Set LAMPS switch to ON .

6

Set BLOWER circuit breaker to ON. BLOWER ON

OFF

7

Check that BLOWER OPR light is on before continuing .

8

Set MAIN A circuit breaker to ON.

MAIN A ON

OFF

CONTINUED

2-167

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-13 .

9

ENERGIZE DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2 - Continued Set CLK PWR circuit breaker to ON .

CLK PWR ON 10

Check that 28 VDC light is on .

OFF 28 VDC

lo

10

OFF LAMPSON QOFF TEST

Ο

о O O DATA LINK TERM MOL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O DGTL PROCESSOR MAIN A 20VOC ค OFF OFF O.BLOWER OWER ON

O

O

O CNVC OUT ON

O

O O

NOTE

O

O

O

Tractor over-the-road power is not required for clock synchronization when CLK FWR circuit breaker is ON .

PWR SPLY ON

Set PWR SPLY circuit breaker to ON .

OFF

12

DGTL PROCESSOR ON

Set DGTL PROCESSOR circuit breaker to ON .

OFF

13

On DLT Power Supply A2A6 , check that all POWER SUPPLY FAULT lights are off.

POWER SUPPLY FAULT

O

O

Ο

Ο

O

PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

PS5

NON -INTERRUPT

O

LAMP TEST

PS6

O

CONTINUED

2-168

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-14 .

ENERGIZE GENERATOR SET A6

GENERATOR SET A6 MAY BE DAMAGED IF SLAVE RECEPTACLE IS USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN SLAVE STARTING . REFER TO TM 5-6115-464-12 FOR GENERATOR SET A6 OPERATION BEYOND THAT COVERED IN THIS TM . CAUTION

Check that all controls are set as listed in para 2-9C.

2

On Generator Set A6, set START- RUN -STOP switch to RUN.

O

O

GENERATOR

ENGINE O

O

O

O ADCLEANED

FAULT· INDICATOR PRESS OVER

OOO

1

START

RUN ㅎ

09

PUTSLEVEL

STOP li

OPENTOR SINGLEURET

SPES

1.

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

Fuel transfer pump makes clicking sounds when transferring fuel into day fuel tank. Pump will stop when day fuel tank is full.

NOTES 2.

START- RUN-STOP switch must remain

in

RUN and

BATTLE-

SHORT switch must remain ON until day fuel tank is filled .

3

Raise safety guard and set SHORT switch to ON

BATTLE-

BATTLE SHORT ON

OFF BATTLE SHORT

CONTINUED

2-169

TM 9-1440-600-10 > 14.

4

ENERGIZE GENERATOR SET A6 - Continued

Check that LOW OIL PRESS, UNDER

VOLT, and UNDER FREQ lights are on.

FAULTINDICATOR GENERATOR

ENGINE

O LOW OIL PRESS

O

ㅎ

09

batan BATTLESHORS

O DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

OPERATION

When day tank is full (about 2 minutes) , clicking sound stops . Set BATTLESHORT switch to

OFF.

ON

Lower

OFF BATTLE SHORT

safety guard .

6

UNDER FREQ

>))]

5

UNDER VOLT

Hold TEST or RESET switch down and check that all FAULT INDICATOR lights are on. Release switch .

TEST OR RESET

FAULT INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESS

COOLANT HIGH TEMP

OVER SPEED

NO FUEL

SHORT CIRCUIT

OVER LOAD

UNDER VOLT

UNDER FREQ

REVERSE POWER

OVER VOLT

DO NOT CRANK ENGINE FOR MORE THAN 15 SECONDS AT A TIME . ALLOW STARTER TO COOL AT LEAST 3 MINUTES BETWEEN TRIES.

CAUTION

J

2-170

TM 9-1440-600-10

179TLAS- Continued

If outside temperature

is

50°F ( 10°C)

or below,

perform step

7. If temperature is above 50°F ( 10°C) , perform step 8 .

7

If temperature is 50°F ( 10°C) or below start Generator Set A6 with start aid procedure as follows.

a.

Press and hold STAFT PISTOL switch to

to crank engine . Do not

hold for more than 15 seconds.

FAULTINDICATOR O ENGINE

GENERATOR SPEED UNES

ENGINE PRIMER ON

START

3236

RUN

VOLANTTEMPATA ㅎ

STOP

お

O

O BATTLESCR STOP

b.

While engine is cranking , press Fi'

BATTLESHORT

OPEN

switch to

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER FULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

to inject ether,

then release switch .

C.

Release switch to RUN after 15 seconds or when engine starts . When engine starts, go to step 9 .

DO NOT INJECT ETHER MORE THAN THREE TIMES .

CAUTION

d.

If engine does not start within 15 seconds , release Allow starter to cool for 3 minutes.

switch .

2-171

F2

TI

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-

2-14 .

ENERGIZE GENERATOR SET A6 - Continued -

7

Continued .

[ Repeat steps a and b. If engine does not start after three tries, call Engineer Maintenance .

If temperature is over 50°F ( 10°C) , start engine normally.

a.

Press and hold START-RUN -STOP switch to START for 15 seconds or until OIL PRESSURE gage indicates oil pressure and VOLTS A.C. meter indicates voltage .

VOLT 120 PRESS OIL PRESSURE

FAULTINDICATOR

O

ENGINE

looo !.

GENERATOR O

START RUN

お

STOP OPERATION OPERATION O

b.

If engine fails to start within

BATTLESHOW

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT PULLBREAKER FORSTOP EMERGENCY

15 seconds, release START- RUN- STOP switch .

Allow at least 3 minutes for cranking motor to cool before trying to start again . C.

When engine starts , release START- RUN-STOP switch to RUN .

CONTINUED

2-1

2-172

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-14.

9

ENERGIZE GENERATOR SET A6 - Continued Check output voltage as follows:

FAULT INDICATOR O O

a.

”

GENERATOR O

Set VOLTS-AMPS switch to positions L1 - LO , L2- LO , and L3 - LO . VOLTS A.C. meter should in-

Lie

dicate 120 Vac red line in each

O

о 3

position .

09 BATTLE SHORT OPEN

b.

OPERATION

DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER FULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP

Set VOLTS- AMPS switch to positions L1 - L2 , L2- L3 , and L3- L1 . VOLTS A.C. meter should in-

L1 -LO L1

L3-L1-

A.C. VORTMETER

LLO2-.

dicate 208 Vac red line in each

LO3-

. -12 L1

position .

AMPS VOLTS

OTARBIA

INCREASE

D VOLTAGE ADJUST

If voltage in any position is wrong , set VOLTS -AMPS switch to that position and use VOLTAGE ADJUST rheostat to adjust to correct voltage . d.

If voltage had to be adjusted , repeat steps a and b to verify that all voltages are correct.

CONTINUED 1

2-173

TM 9-1440-600-10

- Continued

211

Check

10

400

frequency meter for

Hz indication . If necessary use rheostat to ad-

just frequency to 400 Hz.

FAULT· INDICATOR O

HE TZ

GENERATOR

ENGINE AIRCLEANER

O

INCREASE O

O

お

FORMLE

START

CONGLELMET OPERATES

ō FREQUENCY ADJUST DCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCY STOP

LIGHT COMES ON, STOP ENGINE IF ANY AND NOTIFY ENGINEER MAINTENANCE .

GENERATOR SET A6 MUST RUN AT LEAST 3 MINUTES TO WARM UP BEFORE CIRCUIT BREAKER IS CLOSED. CAUTION

Step 11 applies power to the LS.

11

After three hold

minutes engine warmup , until switch to light comes on . Release

CKT BRK CKT BRK CLOSE

switch .

OPEN

2-174

TM 9-1440-600-10

LAUNGERELECTRONICS MODULE A1

‫זי י‬

On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , check that ... switch is set to LO-

1

-LAUNCHERLOCAL- RMT

and LOCAL light is on.

2

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

VOX MISSILE 8 UPPER L LIPPER

PLATFORM -

HAZARD lights

are off at all positions where guided missile (GM ) cables are connected to live GMs.

POWER SUPPLIES O

LAUNCHERLOCAL

Check that MISSILE

HAZARD O

0

O

이이 이이 ・ READY PLATFO RAISED AZMUTH OOO DISCON NECTED 0 |0 | 0 | 0 LAUNCHING STA RAISE STOP CONNECT CONNECT CONNECT

MISSILE LWR L UPPER R

LWR R

O

MISSILE HAZARD 0000

O

O id

CITE TEST STATUS LAMPS STATUS LAMPTEST

O

Ø

FIRING LATOON •

10

の

START

UPPER L

O

0

BITE TEST OFF O STATUS LAMP TEST

3

Check that BITE TEST OFF STAL LAMP TES

switch is set to CFE.

PANEL LAMPS ON

4 OFF

Check that PANEL LAMPS switch is set to

F.

T

2-175

TM 9-1440-600-10 TN 2-15.

DEENERGIZE LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1 - Continued

2-1 5

Disconnect GMs as follows : Raise cover and

hold CONNECT- DISC

switches to

リ O

DISC at all positions until corresponding MISSILE DISCONNECTED lights go on.

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

-LAUNCHER. LOCAL

-PLATFORM

O POWER SUPPLIES O VOC VOC VOC MISSILE UPPERS LIPPER

O

O

の BITE

MISSILE DISCONNECTED 0000

MISSALE READY 0 | 0 | 0 | 0

O

LOHR PLATFORM READY RAISED AZMUTH READY

Θ

Θ

O

Of

O

O

DISCON MECTED10101010

ම

e

LAUNCHINGSTA

RAISE

CONNECT CONNECT

STOP

CONNECT CONNECT

O

DISC

START

0 Ø

DISC

DISC

DISC

O

DISC

ATOON

BITE TEST STATUSLAMPS PANEL LAMPS O DIM OFF STATUS LAMPTEST Ο 6

In the sequence listed below, set the following circuit breakers on Power Distribution Unit ( PDU ) A1A2 to OFF .

2

1

UPR L MSL ON

+

O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Θ Θ OBLOWER OPR

UPR R MSL

→

ON

+

OFF

OFF

O BLOWER ON OFF

LCHRELEX VDC PWROPLY ON OFF CNVCOUTHTR CANISTER

4

3

LWR L MSL

LWR R MSL

ON

ON

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAIN A O ON OFF

LOHRELEX SPLY FWRVOC

MBL&VDC PWR SPLY

GYROCLOCK PWRSPLY

OFF

OFF

OFF

MOT CONT UNITAC ON

PAFURTL SPLY PWR

OFF

OFF

ON

FWB

LAMPS

+ O

OFF

2

MAIN

O

O

OFF

CONTINUED,

2-176 2-1

TM 9-1440-600-10

DEENERGIZE LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODNE A1 - Continued

6

Continued .

5

6

+

G

BLOWER OFF

ON 0

OFF

O

ON

+

O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O

O

+

MSL PAFU/ITL PWR SPLY

0

MSL TWT FIL PWR SPLY

→

< 15.

OFF

16

LAUNG 15 RONCS AC.

14

OFF

OFF

OFF

13:12)

11

10

MISSILE HEATER AC. UPRAMEL LIPA&MSI

9

OFF

OFF

LIVR & MSL

WARMSL

OFF

OFF

Θ OFF 7

8

+

ON

+

1 ON OFF

CNVC OUT CANISTER HTR AC Θ ON

6

5

17

O

MOT CONT UNIT AC

TEST

OFF

OFF

Θ

0

O O

OFF

10

MSL GYRO/CLOCK PWR SPLY

11

MSL 5 VDC PWR SPLY

+

ON

OFF

ON

15

+

ON

ORD PWR SPLY

+

ON

→

MAIN A

ON

+

+

LCHR ELEX 5 VDC PWR SPLY +

ON

OFF

17

LAMPS

BLOWER

+

ON

OFF

OFF

16

MAIN B

OFF

+

13

12

LCHR ELEX 28 VDC PWR SPLY

OFF

14

+

O

OFF

9

→

O

ON

+

ON OFF

OFF

OFF

TEST

2-177

TM 9-1440-600-10

TA

2-16 .

DEENERGIZ .

-

...

2-*

Omit step 1 if clock power is not required . [

NOTE

1

If Data Link Terminal Module ( DLTM) A2 clock synchronization is required :

a.

Position tractor close enough to semitrailer so outrigger electrical cable can be connected .

CURBSIDE

Le

ING WHEELS. TRACTOR MAY ROLL, RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

WAL

b.

DO NOT LEAVE TRACTOR UNATTENDED WITHOUT CHOCK-

Pull out tractor

control , place transmission range selector lever in neutral ( ) , and leave engine running .

b.1 .

Remove chock blocks from stowage chock tractor rear wheels as follows :

in tractor

roadside

stowage

box and

STOWAGE (1 )

If tractor is facing uphill , place chock blocks behind tractor rear wheels ,

both

curbside

CHOCK BOTH SIDES

and

roadside .

ROADSIDE

Change 1

J

2-178 2-1

TM 9-1440-600-10

- Continued

1

Continued .

(2)

CHOCK BOTH SIDES

If tractor is facing downhill , place chock blocks in front of rear wheels, both curbside and roadside .

ROADSIDE

ROADSIDE ONLY (3)

If tractor is level , place chock block in front of rear wheel on curbside and behind rear wheel on roadside .

CURBSIDE ONLY ROADSIDE

Through remainder of this procedure , chock blocks will be shown for tractor as in level position Chock as described in step b.1 .

above

unless grade

is shown.

CONTA

Change 1

D

2-178.1 /(2-178.2 blank)

F

TI

2-

[

2-

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-16.

DEENERGIZE DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2 - Continued

1

Continued .

Connect outrigger electrical cable to Semitrailer Connector 42W2P1 . (1 )

Remove

cable from

tractor

roadside stowage box. BATTERY

(1.1 )

(2)

Connect outrigger cable to tractor slave connector.

OUTRIGGER CABLE

BOX

Carefully route cable from tractor to semitrailer. Be careful not to get grease from fifth wheel on cable .

SLAVE CONNECTOR

CURBSIDE

(3)

Remove dust cover from Semitrailer Connector 42W2P1 .

(4)

Connect

cable to

Connector

42W2P1 by pushing straight in . (5)

Lower spring retainer to lock cable connector in place.

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-179

TM 9-1440-600-10 TN 216

— Continued

DEENERGIZE DATA LIJE TET

2-1 2

On Launcher Electronics Module Power Control Panel set MONE

( LEM - PCP) , A1A3 to

MAIN POWER/ DC AC

RUN TIME

[

CB1

M1

CB2

CIRCUIT BREAKERS ON LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (LEM- PDU) A1A2 MUST BE SET TO OFF WHEN CLOCK IS NOT COUNTING OR GM HEATERS MAY BE DAMAGED .

CAUTION

3

On LEM Power Distribution Unit (PDU) O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT ©

A1A2 , set four circuit breakers to

BLOWER OPE ல்

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC MAIN O ON OFF

BLOWER ON OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC

MISSILE HEATER AC MAIN OFF

OFF

GYROCLOCK PWR SPLY ON OFF

ON OFF

୮

ON

+

LCHRVDCCLEX PWR SPLY ON OFF

UPR R MSL +

ON

+

OFF

Θ

CNVC OUTHTR CANISTER ON OFF

LCHAELEX

PWR SPLY

MSL 5 VDC PARSPLY

OFF

OFF

MOT CONT UNITAC ON

PAFUITL PWRSPLY ON OFF

O

UPR L MSL

LAMPS OFF

O O

O LWR L MSL +

ON

OFF

2-180 2-1

+

LWR R MSL

→

ON

OFF

+

TM 9-1440-600-10 - Continued

In the sequence listed below, set the following circuit breakers on DLTM Power Distribution Unit ( PDU) A2A4 to

о

O Ο

CNVC ON

OFF 3 OFF

→ O

อ

O

6 TEST 5 OFF Θ O

2

DGTL PROCESSOR + ON

O

2

O BLOWER OPR

O

1

O

0 O 0 NK TERM MDL POWER DISTRI

O

4

0

4

3

PWR SPLY ON O

+

CLK PWR ON

MAIN A ON +

ค OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

If LEM - PDU A1A2 is energized leave LOWER and LAMPS switch Main ac power will trip when DLTM blower goes

off if LEM - PDU A1A2 is energized .

6

5

BLOWER ON

LAMPS

ON OFF TEST

OFF

2-181

TM 9-1440-600-10 TA

F

2-17.

DEENERGIZE GENERATOR SET A6

2-* 1

On Launcher Electronics Module Pow-

Θ

er Control Panel (LEM- PCP) , A1A3 raise cover and set MAIN POWER

RUN TIME

MAIN POWER DC AC →

AC CB1 to OFF. M1

2

3

CB1

Θ

CB2 Θ

Open and latch Generator Set A6 control cubicle doors.

On Generator Set A6, hold CKT FRK switch to OPEN until CKT BEK light CKT BRK

goes off.

CKT BRK CLOSE

FAULT INDICATOR ENGINE

GENERATOR O OPEN

O DOPLAYTEMPERATU о ENORE

о

O OPERATION

O

JO

DCCONTROL BREAKER CIRCUIT PULLFOR EMERGENCYSTOP 4

Allow engine to run for 3 minutes with no load.

5 START

RUN

STOP

2-182 2-11

Set

START- STOP RUN switch to

STOP. Engine will stop.

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-18.

LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14 SEMIAUTOMATIC BITE TEST

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT 18

BITE

POWER SUPPLIES O

D E MISSILE PLATFORMUPPERL LIPPERR MISSILE HAZARO

LAUNCHER LOCAL

O

RAISE

STOP

CONNECT CONNE DISC GRISC ODO

O

START

O CONNECT

O

LAUNCHINGSTA

O

0

O

MISSILE READY 0000 LCHR PLATFORM READY READY RAISED AZMUTH DISCON NECTED 0 |0 |0 |0

FIRINGPLATOON

0

BITE TEST STATUSLAMPS OFF O O DIM STATUS LAMPTEST

O OFF

0 LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14

1.

During this test MISSILE status lights will cycle on and off. The blinking is normal . It does not indicate that a missile is selected or that a hazard exists . Critical functions are kept safe during the test.

NOTES 2.

During the test you will hear a noise like a horn blowing . The noise is Motor Control Unit testing . The noise is normal .

3.

( MCU) A9 cycling on and off for

Ifthe test fails , call Organizational Maintenance .

1

Energize Data Link Terminal Module ( DLTM) A2 per para 2-13.

2

Energize Launcher Electronics Module ( LEM ) A1 per para 2-12.

CONTINUED

2-183

T

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-18.

LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14 SEMIAUTOMATIC BITE TEST- Continued

2-

3

On

LCU

and hold

Display

Panel

disconnect guided

A1A14 ,

CONNECT- DISC switches to

(GMs) .

missiles

Raise cover

DISC at all positions until corresponding

MISSILE DISCONNECTED lights come on .

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT MISSILE DISCONNECTED

BITE

POWER SUPPLIES

MISSILE LOVERL UPPER

PLATFORM

O

O

AUNCHER LOCAL

O

O

0 | 0 | 01 |0

READY PLATFORM READY ööö

CONNECT CONNECT

O

CONNECT CONNECT

=0 | 0 | 0 | 0

o 0101010

DISC

DISC

DISC

DISC

LAUNCHING STA

O

STOP 00 : LOO START O

O

PRINGPLATOOR

Q

O

O

tol

O

RIFETEST STATUE STATUS LANDTEST

4

BITE

Check that all five BITElights are off. O

5

Set BITE TEST-OFF- STATUS

O D

O E

LAMP

TEST switch to STATUS LAMP TEST. Check that all BITElights are on .

6

O C

BITE TEST OFF STATUS LAMP TEST

Set switch to BITE TEST, BITElights cycle on and off for 6 seconds . If all lights are on , test passed .

7

2-184

Change 1

T

2-1

Set switch to OFF.

>

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-18.

8

LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14 SEMIAUTOMATIC BITE TEST- Continued

On CCIP A2A2,

check

SUMMARY FAULTlight . If light is on , momentarily hold

RESET switch to RESET SUMMARY FAULTlight will go off.

FAU SUMMARY FAULT

PROPAGATION DELAY REQUEST

FAIRY

PROCESSORCONTROL

9

RADIO OSC CAL-

RESET

THECONTROL

If GMs are to be electrically connected , proceed as follows:

IF ANY

MISSILE HAZARD LIGHT IS ON, VISUALLY CHECK

THAT POSITION. IF THAT POSITION HAS A LIVE MISSILE

Lac

WITH UMBILICAL CONNECTED, NOTIFY ECS IMMEDIATELY. ADVISE ECS THAT LS WILL REMAIN IN LOCAL MODE . AF-

WARNING TER NOTIFYING ECS, LEAVE AREA AND AWAIT FURTHER MAY EXPLODE ,

INSTRUCTIONS . ORDNANCE DEVICES RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-184.1

T

TM 9-1440-600-10

2. 2-18 .

LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14 SEMIAUTOMATIC BITE TEST - Continued —

9

a.

Continued .

On LCU display panel A1A14, verify that all MISSILE HAZARD lights are off at all missile positions that have a live missile with umbilical connected .

UPPER L

Ø

MISSILE HAZARD C0000

POWER SUPPLIES VOC MISSILE UPPERL UPPER 0000

O

MISSILE READY LCHR PLATFORM 이이 이이 READY RAISED AZMUTH READY OOO 이이 이이 → LAUNCHING STA RAISE STOP

O

LAUNCHER- PLATFORMLOCAL

LWR R

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

MISSILE LWR L UPPER R

MISSILE DISCONNECTED

Θ 0 | 0 |0 | 0

O

Θ

O START

O

の

FIRINGPLATOON

CONNECT CONNECT

STATUSLAMPS FANEL LAMPS

2-184.2

DISC

DISC

DISC

b.

Raise cover over CONNECT - DISC switches .

C.

Hold CONNECT- DISC switches to CONNECT until corresponding MISSILE DISCONNECTED lights go off.

2-1

DISC O

10

OFF

O

O

STATUS LAMPTEST

CONNECT CONNECT

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-19 .

1

ELECTRICALLY RAISE LAUNCHER PLATFORM

Remove roadside and curbside travel lockpins .

a.

Press and hold lockpin pushbutton .

ROADSIDE

TYPICAL BOTH SIDES

b.

Pull lockpin out of steadyrest .

C.

Install lockpin in stowage bracket .

ALL FOUR OUTRIGGERS MUST HAVE FIRM CONTACT WITH Le WARNING

GROUND WHEN

LAUNCHING

STATION

(LS)

IS

LEVELED .

OTHERWISE LS MAY TILT, RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH .

CONTINUED

2-185

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-19.

2

ELECTRICALLY RAISE LAUNCHER PLATFORM - Continued

Verify that all four outriggers are down and LS is level .

a.

Check that all four outriggers are down and in firm contact with ground.

OUTRIGGERS FROM

CURBSIDE

b.

Check leveling device in outrigger control panel . Insure LS is within 5° of level . Each ring is 1 °.

TO PREVENT TWISTING SEMITRAILER FRAME, DO NOT OPERATE DIAGONAL PAIRS OF OUTRIGGERS AT SAME TIME .

CAUTION

C.

If necessary use OUTRIGGER switches to level LS within 5°.

CONTINUED

2-186

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-19 .

ELECTRICALLY RAISE LAUNCHER PLATFORM - Continued

Antenna mast does not have to be mated if data link with enNOTE

3

gagement control station (ECS) is not needed .

Check that data link mast sections are mated.

LOWER MAST

ROADSIDE

5A7A12W1

UPPER MAST

ன்

Check that upper mast is inserted into lower mast. Locator pin on lower mast is in locator hole in upper mast flange .

LOCATOR PIN

5A7A12W2

Upper

flange is seated firmly lower mast flange.

mast

against

b.

Check that grounding cable A7A12W2 is connected to grounding connector A7A11J2 on upper mast flange.

C.

Check that RF Cable A7A12W1P2 is connected to RF Adapter A7A11J1 .

CONTINUED

2-187

TM 9-1440-600-10

TI

2-19 .

ELECTRICALLY RAISE LAUNCHER PLATFORM - Continued

2-

4

Verify that manual BRAKE on each , curbside and roadside , elevation is set to LOCK,

drive motor

[

BRAKE

oct

O TYPICAL BOTH SIDES ROADSIDE

5

Set engagement control handle to ELEV

ROADSIDE

B ELEV

ROTATE

ROADMARCH

CONTINUED

2-188 2-1

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-19 .

ELECTRICALLY RAISE LAUNCHER PLATFORM - Continued

DO NOT OPERATE ELEVATION ACTUATORS FOUR CYCLES IN 1

MORE THAN

HOUR . ONE CYCLE IS: FULL EXTEN-

SION ; 3-MINUTE WAIT; FULL RETRACTION . WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES BETWEEN CYCLES.

CAUTION

Launcher platform may be stopped at any position between limits

NOTE

by setting RAISE - STOP - LWR switch to STOP.

On LCU Display Panel A1A14, set RAISE - STOP- LWR switch to RAISE . Hold START switch up momentarily.

Platform will raise to launch angle and stop . RAISED light will come on when platform is at launch angle .

PLATFORM

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

0000 O

LCHR PLATFORM READY READY RAISED AIMUTH O O

O

RAISE STOP

O VOC MISSILE UPPER UPPERR HAZAM 0000

LAUNCHER·LOCAL

O

POWER SUPPLIES

D PLATFORM-

O

PLATFORM RAISED

0101010 RAISE

STOP

O

の

LAUNCHINGSTA

O

LWR

о

e

START

DISC ODO

O

START 0 FIRINGPLATOON

a

STATUSLAMPS NORMAL PAREL LAMPS OFF D

O

оо

INTE TEST STATUS LAMPTEST

O

6

O

e

2-189

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-20 .

1

ELECTRICALLY LOWER LAUNCHER PLATFORM

Electrically rotate turntable to 180° position per para 2-22.

MISSILE IS FREE TO MOVE IN CANISTER IF TORQUE TUBE HANDLE IS NOT PROPERLY LOCKED . SUDDEN STOPS ON

WARNING

ROAD

MARCH

COULD

CAUSE

MISSILE TO

PENETRATE

TRACTOR CAB , RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

2

Lock guided missile

(GM ) torque tube

handle on each canister in the following

order: upper right ( UR) ; lower right ( LR) ; upper left ( UL) ; lower left ( LL).

Have a crewmember at LCU Display Panel A1A14 check MBOLE

NOTE

a.

Remove

READY lights when (GM) torque tube handle is locked .

quick - release

torque tube handle. hold

22

springloaded

LATCHDONOT OR G UNLESSUNLATON ELEVATED

CK

Pull out and

plunger. Rotate torque tube handle cw to LOCK position .

C.

Release

plunger .

O

UNLO

b.

O о DESSICANT HOLDER

pin by

RELIEFVALVE PUSHTO RELEASE O

о O DESSICANTHOLDER

Check that

O RECORDS

plunger seats in left detent hole DO NOT UNLATOM UNLESS ELEVATEDGM LOCK

to secure torque tube handle .

MELY VALVE PUSH RELEASEFO PRESSURE O O

d.

Check that no red paint shows to left of torque tube handle.

e.

Insert quick- release pin in hole to right of torque tube handle.

f.

A4 Check with crewmember at LCU Display Panel A1A14 that MISSILE REALY lamp at correct GM position went out.

CONPAGED

2-190

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10 ELECTRICALLY LOWER LAUNCHER PLATFORM- Continued

2-20.

-

Continued.

2

g.

3

Repeat steps (LL) GMs.

On LCU off.

a thru

f for lower right (LR ) ,

Display Panel A1A14,

upper

left

( UL)

check that all four MISSILE

and

lower left

READY lights

are

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

POWER SUPPLIES

Oli

LAUNCHERLOCAL

MISSILE READY

O

O

MISSILE LOPPER& UPPERA

PLATFORM-

0

| 0

| 0

| 0

READY

PLATFORM Ol

이이 이이

0101010 e

CHENG STA

10!

STOP

START

a O

4

BUTE TEGY STATUSLAMPS STATUS LAMPTEST

O

O

•

Verify that manual BRAKE on each , curbside and roadside , elevation drive motor is set to LOCK.

BRAKE

TYPICAL BOTH SIDES

ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

2-191

TM 9-1440-600-10

2.

2-20 .

ல்

T

5

ELECTRICALLY LOWER LAUNCHER PLATFORM - Continued

Set engagement control handle to ELEV.

[

ROADSIDE

ELEV

ROTATE

ROADMARCH

On LCU Display Panel A1A14, check that AZIMUTH READY light is off.

0

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

AZIMUTH READY

BITE

PLATFORM

Ο

O

-LAUNCHERLOCAL

POWER SUPPLIES OOO MISSILE UPPER& UPPERR

O

6

0 |0 |0 |0 O

PLATFORM AZMUTH ööö

0101010 STOP

O

101

LAURICHINGSTA

START O

e

. PLATOON

2

STATUS ©

O!

O

STATUS LAMPTEST

оо

CONTINUED

2-1

2-192

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-20 .

ELECTRICALLY LOWER LAUNCHER PLATFORM - Continued

DO NOT OPERATE

ELEVATION ACTUATORS MORE THAN

FOUR CYCLES IN 1

HOUR . ONE CYCLE IS : FULL EXTEN-

SION; 3- MINUTE WAIT; FULL RETRACTION . WAIT AT LEAST 3 MINUTES BETWEEN CYCLES .

CAUTIONS

MAKE

SURE

THAT

GUARD

RAIL IS

NOT

INSTALLED

AROUND GENERATOR SET BEFORE LOWERING LAUNCHER PLATFORM OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY OCCUR .

Launcher platform may be stopped at any position between limits by setting RAISE - STOP-LWR switch to STOP.

NOTE

On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , set RAISE - STOP - LWR switch to LWR.

10

7

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

POWER SUPPLIES

Hold START switch up momentarily . LAUNCHERLOCAL

PLATFORM-

O

O

Platform will lower to steadyrest and

VDC MISSILE UPPERL UPPERR

stop .

O

RAISE

# 0000

e

STOP

READY 0000 LCH PLATFORM RAISED AZMUTH READY MADY

LAUNCHING STA

BAISE

STOP

START

LWR

O

e

START

RINGPLATOON

O

STATUSLAMPS NORMAL FANELLAMPS DMM

O

O

STATUS LAMPTEST

8

PLATFORM RAISED light will go off when lowering begins .

9

Set RAISE - STOP - LWR STOP.

switch to

PLATFORM RAISED

O

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-193

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-20 .

10

ELECTRICALLY LOWER LAUNCHER PLATFORM - Continued

Set

engagement

control

handle to ROTATE

performed .

ELEV

ROAD MARCH if road march is to be

ROADMARCH

11

If launcher platform is to remain lowered , remove travel lockpins from bracket and install in roadside and curbside steadyrest.

ROADSIDE

TYPICAL BOTH SIDES

2-194

stowage

TM 9-1440-600-10

ELEVATION HANDCRANK OPERATIONS

2-21 .

Handcrank operations are to be used when electrical drive is inoperative or when positioning platform for maintenance.

On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , check that RAISE-STOP - LWR switch is set

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLIES

to STOP.

O

C PLATFORM

MISSILE GOVER UPPERR

O

о

Ø

HAZARD

RAISE

MISSALLE READY 0 | 0 |0 |0 O

STOP

READY PLATFORM AZMUTH READY ölöö

NECTED 0101010 LAUNCHING STA

STOP

LWR

0

1.1

BLOWER OPE ㅎㅇ

DITETEST STATUR LAMPS O STATUM LAMPTEST

O

оо

O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O

O

START

10

• " RINGPLATOON

BLOWER

O

00 LAUNCHER-

O

BITE

O

1

On LEM - PDU A1A2 , set MOT CONT UNIT AC circuit breaker to OFF .

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC. MAIN A

MISSILE HEATER AC ON ON

MAIN S

ཌ་ OFF

LOANELEX

CVC OUT APMETERHT

TWY

PAFURTL FARSPLY

MOT CONT UNIT AC Ꮎ

MOTCONT UNITAC ON OFF

GYRO-CLOCK PWRSPLY O

OFF

ON Ꮳ

O

O

O

OFF

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-195

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-21 . 2

ELEVATION HANDCRANK OPERATIONS

Continued

Remove roadside and curbside travel lockpins .

a.

Press and hold lockpin pushbutton .

ROADSIDE

TYPICAL BOTH SIDES

3

b.

Pull lockpin out of steadyrest .

C.

Install lockpin in stowage bracket.

Set engagement control handle to ELEV

ROADSIDE

ELEV

ROTATE

ROADMARCH

CONTINUED

2-196

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-21 .

ELEVATION HANDCRANK OPERATIONS - Continued

4

Remove access

covers from

curbside

and

roadside

elevation

actuators

manual

crank extensions.

a.

Loosen three captive screws that secure each access cover.

b.

Remove cover from each manual crank extension .

C.

Check that handcrank safety switch plunger is extended on both actuators .

TYPICAL BOTH SIDES

HANDCRANK SAFETY SWITCH PLUNGER

ROADSIDE

1

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-196.1 /(2-196.2 blank)

TI

2-

[

2-

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-21 .

5

ELEVATION HANDCRANK OPERATIONS - Continued

On each elevation drive motor , set manual BRAKE to RELEASE .

BRAKE

TYPICAL BOTH SIDES

ROADSIDE

TO PREVENT INJURY, VERIFY THAT MOT CONT UNIT AC CIRCUIT BREAKER IS SET TO OFF AND BOTH ELEVATION La

>

WARNING

ACTUATOR MANUAL CRANK EXTENSION COVERS ARE REMOVED BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL ELEVATION ACTUATOR HANDCRANKS .

6

Install handcrank on each elevation actuator manual crank extension .

a.

Get two

handcranks

from

roadside stowage box. b.

Aline handcrank with keyway on extension .

C.

Install handcrank on elevation actuator manual crank extension .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-197

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-21 .

7

ELEVATION HANDCRANK OPERATIONS- Continued

Raise or lower platform .

Use one crewmember on each handcrank.

NOTE

a.

Observe

directional

arrows on

each manual crank extension . b.

Each crewmember rotate

hand-

crank at same speed to raise or lower platform to desired position .

8

Set manual

BRAKE on

each

drive

motor to LOCK.

BRAKE

TYPICAL BOTH SIDES

9

Remove handcrank from curbside and roadside manual crank extensions .

10

Install access cover on each manual crank extension . Tighten screws on each cover.

3 captive

TYPICAL 2 PLACES

CONTINUED

2-198

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-21 .

11

ELEVATION HANDCRANK OPERATIONS - Continued

Verify that manual BRAKE drive motor is set to LOCK

on

each

BRAKE

TYPICAL BOTH SIDES

O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Θ C LOWER

12

On LEM - PDU A1A2, set MOT CONT UNIT AC circuit breaker to ON

9

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAI A

MAINB

MISSILE HEATER AC, UPALAS UPRA MOL ON O

• རྞ་ ELEX

OUT

MOTCONT UNITAC

O

BASISVOC PAR SPLY

GYROCLOCK

PAPURTL TEST

MOT CONT UNIT AC → ON →

O

OFF

[ ]

13

Stow both handcranks in roadside stowage box.

Change 1

2-198.1 /(2-198.2 blank)

L 2

2

TM 9-1440-600-10

On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , check that PLATFORM RAISED light is on.

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

If off,

O

1

ELECTRICALLY ROTATE LAUNCHER MECHANICS

POWER SUPPLIES

raise platform to launch angle

O

per para 2-19.

LAUNCHER-

O

2-22.

MISSILE UPPER UPPERR

PLATFORM

O

RAMED AZMUTH READY PLATPORN OO

PLATFORM RAISED

0101010 O

0101010 LAURICHINGSTA 2

STOP O

101

START

O

e STATUSLAMPS O

оо

O STATUS LAMPTEST

e Omit step 2 if guided missiles (GMs) are not to be unlocked . NOTE

2

Unlock

GM torque tube

handle on

each canister in the following order:

о DESSICANT HOLDER

upper right ( UR) ; lower right ( LR) ; up-

RECORDS

per left (UL); lower left (LL).

J2

b.

Remove quick- release pin by GM torque tube handle .

Pull out and

hold

DONOT LATON OR UNLATCH UNLESS OM ELEVATED

UNLOCK

a.

RELIEF VALVE PUSH TO RELEASE PRESSURE

spring-loaded

plunger. Rotate torque tube handle ccw to UNLOCK position .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-199

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-22 .

ELECTRICALLY ROTATE LAUNCHER MECHANICS - Continued -

Continued .

C.

Release

2

plunger .

O O DESSICANT HOLDER

Check that

о RECORDS

plunger seats in right detent hole to secure torque tube handle.

LOCK

OCK

DO NOT LATCH OR UNLATCH UNLESS GM ELEVATED

Check that red paint shows to left of torque tube handle .

UNL

d.

J2

PULL

e.

Insert quick- release pin in hole to left of torque tube handle .

f.

Repeat steps a thru e above for lower right (LR) ,

RELIEF VALVE PUSH TO RELEASE PRESSURE

upper left (UL) and lower

left ( LL) GMs.

3

Set engagement control handle to ROTATE.

MD WoolnỤ teinso

S

ross

don neqqu U) ttel neq

ROTATE

-

ELEV

ROADMARCH

ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

2-200

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-22 .

4

ELECTRICALLY ROTATE LAUNCHER MECHANICS - Continued On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , check

O

that AZIMUTH READY light is on .

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

BITE

POWER SUPPLIES

PLATFORM

MISSILE UPPERL UPPER

O

AZIMUTH READY

O

AUNCHER. LOCAL

= 0 | 0 |0 |0

O

PLATFORM RAISED AZMUTH öö

이이 이이

or CW as required to rotate turntable to desired position .

RAISE

STOP

O

Hold CCW-STOP - CW switch to CCW · " PLATOON

L START O

e

5

LAURICHING STA

კი

ჰიი

O

W

JO

e

STOP C

Fol

оо

NORMAL PAREL LAMPS BITE TEST STATUSLAMP OFF STATUS LAMPTEST

C W

6

Release CCW - STOP- CW switch to stop platform rotation .

7

Turntable is at the 180° position when the 180° position pointer is alined between the alinement strip gage marks .

∞

∞

100 TOM DA TIMU

2-201

TM 9-1440-600-10 TI

22-23.

AZIMUTH MANUAL OPERATIONS

Azimuth [

manual

operations

are to be used when

electrical

drive is inoperative or

when positioning turntable for maintenance .

1

On LCU Display Panel A1A14, check that PLATFORM If off,

RAISED light is on .

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

raise platform to launch angle

@ POWER SUPPLIES

BITE

O

per para 2-19.

PLATFORM

MISSILE

LOCAL O

O PLATFORM ATMOUTH READY = 0 | 0 | 0 | 0

о 0101010 이

e

LAUNCHING STA O

PLATFORM RAISED

O

e

PUNGPLATOON

10

O

Foll

HITE TEST STATUS LAN LANDSTATUOTEET

% 10

O

10 10 START

O

•

о

1.1

კიი

STOP Check that CCW- STOP - CW switch is set to STOP .

O

O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT 0 G

BLOWER OFR

1.2

BLOWER ON OFF 0

LCHRELEX PWR·VDCSPLY

о

CRIVE OUTHTR CANISTER

OIFF

c W

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC MAIN & ON OFF

OIFF

LCHRELEX 20 VDC PWR SPLY ON OFF

MOT CONT UNITAC

On LEM - PDU A1A2 , set MOT CONT UNIT AC circuit breaker to

MAIN 8 OFF . OFF

MSHS VOC PWR SPLY ON OFF

GYROCLOCK PWR SPLY

MS PAFUTTL PWR SPLY ON OFF

TWITARSLSPLY FR PWR

OFF

OFF

OFF

MOT CONT UNIT AC ON

+

TEST

OFF

→

Θ

OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC

O

O

OFF O

O

O

CONTINUED

2-

2-202

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-23.

2

AZIMUTH MANUAL OPERATIONS - Continued

Set engagement control handle to ROTATE.

ELEV

ROTATE

ROADMARCH

ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-202.1 /(2-202.2 blank)

T

2-

[

2-

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-23.

AZIMUTH MANUAL OPERATIONS - Continued

TO PREVENT INJURY, VERIFY THAT MOT CONT UNIT AC Le WARNING

CIRCUIT BREAKER IS SET TO OFF AND BOTH AZIMUTH ACTUATOR MANUAL CRANK EXTENSION COVERS ARE REMOVED BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL AZIMUTH ACTUATOR HANDCRANKS .

INSURE THAT PLATFORM IS ELEVATED TO LAUNCH ANGLE BEFORE ROTATING LS TURNTABLE OR LS WILL BE DAMAGED .

CAUTION

NOTE

CW manual drive rotation causes turntable to turn ccw. CCW rotation causes turntable to turn cw.

3

Install 1 /2-inch drive brace handle (speed handle) in manual drive on azimuth actuator.

ROADSIDE

4

Observe directional arrow on azimuth actuator. Rotate speed handle cw or ccw to position turntable at desired azimuth position .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-203

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-23.

AZIMUTH MANUAL OPERATIONS- Continued

Speed handle should be removed from azimuth actuator before using electrical drive.

NOTE

5

When manual azimuth operations are completed , remove speed handle from azimuth actuator.

O

O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O BLOWER OPE

O

O

→

0

6

On LEM - PDU A1A2 , set MOT CONT UNIT AC circuit breaker to ON.

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC MAIN A

MAIN

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

LORS VOCFLEX PAR SPLY

LCH ELEX PWR SPLY

GYROCLOCK FWR SPLY ON OFF

OFF

BLOWER

O

ASH 5 VDC OFF

CRVC OUTH CAMSTER

MOT UNITCONT AC

PAFUSTL SPLY PWR ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

MOT CONT UNIT AC → ON

LAMPS →

OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC ‫י‬ LIPA A ARSI

OFF

OFF O O

2-204

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-24.

DATA LINK TERMINAL TURN ON

Use this procedure when the data link terminal complete shutdown .

( DLT) is to be turned on from

a

POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT A2A4

88

18

RADIO FREQUENCY TUNER A2A5

KEY GENERATOR KG-30 A2A1

COMPUTER-TO-COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE PROCESSOR A2A2

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2

Personnel Required . Two Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1 /4- In .

Ignore all light emitting diode ( LED) cedure .

NOTE

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 , rotate MANUAL control fully counterclockwise .

OJ

1

indicators during this pro-

FORWARDPOWER REVERSEPOWER

POWERCONTROL

POWER CONTROL

TEST

AUTO

Θ PRIDO

MANUAL

MODE

AUTO

0.DELAY TUNE

CONTINUED

2-205

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-24.

2

DATA LINK TERMINAL TURN ON - Continued

At Computer-To-Communications Interface Processor (CCIP) A2A2 set following switches to OFF: LOAD NET, OPERATE, ALTERNATE MASTER and AUTO SYNC.

AUTO SYNC

OLY TEST PROCESSORCONTROL-

ALTERNATE MASTER

DELAYREQUEST MODE CISC CAL 8 88 89 AUTO SYNC TIME CONTROL

O OFF

RADNO O

OFF

TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE ด OFF

3

OFF

Set PROCESSOR CONTROL switch to NORM.

PROCESSOR CONTROL DLTN

TRBY NORM

KGBY

DLT TEST 4 TEST

Set DLT TEST switch to TEST.

NORMAL

BLOWER CPR LAMP ON POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PDU) A2A4 MUST BE ON BEFORE ANY OTHER CIRCUIT BREAK-

CAUTION

ERS ARE TURNED

ON .

CONTINUED

OPERATION

WITHOUT PROPER

AIR

FLOW WILL

RESULT IN

OF DLT DAMAGE

TO DLT SUBASSEMBLIES .

CONTINUED

2-206

TM 9-1440-600-10

DATA LINK TERMINAL TURN ON - Continued

2-24.

TIME OF DAY indicator on CCIP A2A2 indicates 377 until 28 vdc power is on. NOTE

5

Energize Data Link Terminal Module ( DLTM ) A2 per para 2-13.

6

At Key Generator KG 30 A2A1 , loosen 16 captive screws and open panel .

7

Set POWER switch to OFF. Initialize Key Generator KG -30 A2A1 . Refer to manual KAO- 137E/TSEC .

7.1

Close panel and secure with 16 captive screws .

XMTR ALMLYOFFON ALMLY BOTH OFF BOTHON

WARNING

POWER

WARNING RCVR POWER

0

O

0 PUSH TO ZERO

PUSH TO ZERO

ON

OFF

8

Wait approximately 30 minutes for proper warm up of master oscillator in CCIP A2A2.

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-207

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-24.

9

DATA LINK TERMINAL TURN ON - Continued At CCIP A2A2 , set DLT TEST switch to NORMAL.

DLT TEST

PROPAGATION

S TEST PROCESSORCONTROL-

AUTOSYNC 8 TM 98 CONTROL99

RADD O NORMAL

w ne

2-208

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-25 .

DATA LINK TERMINAL QUICK START

Use this procedure when data link terminal (DLT) is to be turned on after fault isolation .

RADIO FREQUENCY TUNER A2A5

8

18

00

000

KEY GENERATOR KG-30 A2A1

COMPUTER-TO- COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE PROCESSOR A2A2

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2

Personnel Required . Two Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1 /4- In .

1

At Computer-To- Communications Interface Processor (CCIP) A2A2 , set OPERATE switch to OFF .

TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE

PROCESSORCONTROL

ร OFF

OFF

DELAYREQUES

TEST MODE OSC CAL

AUTOSYNC TIME CONTROL

RADIO 5.

S

2

Energize Data Link Terminal Module ( DLTM) A2 per para 2-13 .

CONTINUED

2-209

T

TM 9-1440-600-10

2

2-25 . 3

DATA LINK TERMINAL QUICK START - Continued At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 , rotate MANUAL control fully counterclockwise .

[

POWERCONTROL MANUAL AUTO

POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

MODE

AUTO DELAY

-O

4

Set MODE switch to MANUAL .

5

At CCIP A2A2, set DLT TEST switch to TEST.

DLT TEST DELAYREQUEST TEST

AUTOSYNC

BADO D

NORMAL

10 TE 00 CONTROL00

6

Set

DAY,

HOUR

and

MIN

switches

to any convenient net start time.

DAY

TIME SET HOUR

MIN

88888

-TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE 7

Set LOAD NET- OFF switch to LOAD NET and then to OFF. OFF

( ) 3 OFF

CONTINUED

2-

2-210

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-25.

DATA LINK TERMINAL QUICK START - Continued

8

At Key Generator KG -30 A2A1 , loosen 16 captive screws and open panel .

9

Set POWER switch to OFF . Initialize Key Generator KG -30 . ( Refer to manual KAO137E/TSEC . )

10 XMTR ALMLTON

S 10 ° POWER

WARNING

WARNING

RCVR 10

10

10 10

10 10

PUSH TO ZERO

O

PUSH TO ZERO

ON

OFF

10

Close panel and secure with 16 captive screws.

CONTINUED

2-211

T

TM 9-1440-600-10

2 2-25 .

11

DATA LINK TERMINAL QUICK START - Continued

At CCIP A2A2 , set OPERATE -OFF switch to OPERATE . Wait 45 seconds.

PROPAGATION DELAYREQUEST

DLT TEST

OPERATE PROCESSORCONTRO

OSCCAL 888 88 AUTOSYNC CONTROL

5.

OFF

w

12

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5, set MODE switch to AUTO .

-POWERCONTROL MANUAL MODE AUTO

POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

MODE

AUTO

FREO

0-DELAY TUNE

13

Observe that AUTO LED is on .

14

At CCIP A2A2, hold RESET switch to RESET momentarily then release switch .

PROPAGATION DELAYREQUEST

YEST

RESET PROCESSORCONTROL

2-

2-212

MODE OSCCAL 8 88 89 AUTOSYRK CONTROL

RADIO O

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-26 .

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING

Use this procedure to adjust the data link terminal (DLT) to the correct operating frequency.

RADIO FREQUENCY TUNER A2A5

88

KEY GENERATOR KG-30 A2A1 RECEIVER -TRANSMITTER A2A3 COMPUTER-TO-COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE PROCESSOR A2A2

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2

Personnel Required . Two Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1 /4-In .

1.

This procedure is critical and must be followed exactly.

2.

If DLT is completely shut down , perform 2-24.

3.

Ignore alllight emitting diode ( LED ) indicators until Radio Fre-

NOTES

DLT turn on per para

quency Tuner A2A5 is properly tuned.

CONTINUED

2-213

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-26 .

1

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued At Computer-To-Communications Interface Processor (CCIP) A2A2, set OPERATE switch to OFF .

PROPAGA! DELAYREQUEST OPERATE

PROCESSORCONTRO

O OFF

2

RADNO OSC CAL 8 88 88 AUTOSYNC TIME CONTROL

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5, set MODE switch to MANUAL and rotate MANUAL control fully ccw.

POWER CONTROL

FORWARDPOWER REVERSEPOWER

POWERCONTROLMANUAL MODE AUTO

RESET

TEST

MANUAL FREQ

MODE

AUTO

DELAY TUNE

Θ

3

Adjust FREQ control to desired operating frequency.

FREQ

Co

CONTINUED) (

2-214

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-23.

4

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued

At Receiver-Transmitter A2A3, set FREQUENCY SELECT switches to desired operating frequency .

FREQUENCY SELECT

FREQUENCYSELECT

RECEIVER

FAULT TRANSMITTER AD 411 412 413

8888

8888 ‫قلة ة‬ FAULT RESET

5

‫ة‬

At CCIP A2A2 , set LOAD NET switch to OFF.

--

TEST LOAD NET

Q

PROCESSOR CONTROL

OSCA

O

88 88

OFF

6

Set AUTO SYNC switch to OFF.

AUTO SYNC=

OFF

CONTINUND

2-215

TM 9-1440-600-10 T 2-26.

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued

2. 7

Set PROCESSOR CONTROL to DLTN .

PROCESSOR CONTROL PROPAGATION REQUEST

DUTN TRBY

NORM KGBY PROCESSORCONTROLOSC CAL

88 88

5.

w

8

Set DLT TEST switch to TEST. DLT TEST TEST

NORMAL

9

Set ALTERNATE MASTER switch to ALTERNATE MASTER .

ALTERNATE MASTER

OFF

10

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 , check that TUNE lamp is on.

TUNE

FORWARDPOWER REVERSEPOWER

ANT O

FRED O

DELAY TUNE(

G

! O

10

POWERCONTROL MANIAL

CONTINUED

2-216

2-

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-25.

11

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued

At CCIP A2A2, hold RESET switch to RESET momentarily.

PHOPAGATION DELAYREQUEST

RESET PROCESSORCONTRO

12

OSCCAL 10 00 00 AUTOSYNC CONTROL

RADIO

Set TIME SET switches to 0 DAY, 00

DAY

HOUR, 10 MIN.

8

13

TIME SET HOUR

88

MIN

88

Set LOAD NET switch to LOAD NET then back to OFF .

LOAD NET OFF

14

IME T TIME

OF DAY

indicator displays 0

TIME OF DAY

DAY, 00 HOUR, 10 MIN , 00 SEC . DAY

15

HOUR

MIN

SEC

At Key Generator KG -30 A2A1 , loosen 16 captive screws and open panel .

CONTINUED

2-217

T

TM 9-1440-600-10

2

2-26.

16

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING — Continued Set POWER switch to OFF . Initialize Key Generator KG -30 A2A1 . ( Refer to manual KAO - 137E/TSEC . )

[

O 01 7° XMTR LYOFF ALM ON ALMLYONOFF BOTH OFF BOTHON

WARNING

WARNING

POWER RCVR POWER O

PUSH TO ZERO

PUSH TO ZERO

ON

OFF

17

18

Close panel and secure with 16 captive screws.

At CCIP A2A2 , set OPERATE switch to OPERATE .

MOPAGATION REQUEST DELAY

TEST OPERATE

PROCESSORCONTROL OSCCAL OFF

AUTOSYNC 8888 CONTROL

RADIO Θ

CONTINUED

2-

2-218

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-26 .

19

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued Verify TIME OF DAY display is activated and SYNC light comes on .

TIME OF DAY .

HOUR

DAY

MIN

SEC

MC

DAY

Θ

PROCESSORCONTRO

MODE DSCCAL 8 98 99 AUTOSYNCE

BACK

SYNC

1221 L O AUTO SYNC

RESET 20

Hold

RESET switch to

RESET,

mo-

(3) mentarily.

If FORWARD POWER meter on Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 suddenly goes to zero, Receiver-Transmitter A2A3 has shut down.

NOTE If it shuts down ,

do steps 45 thru 47 and

return to the step

you were on .

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 , slowly adjust MANUAL control cw until either the

CREARDPOWER REVERSEPOWER MANUAL

FORWARD POWER meter

indicates at top of TUNE zone on upDELAY TUME

THEO O

per meter scale or REVERSE POWER meter indicates at top of green area.

FORWARD POWER

POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

MODE

REVERSE POWER

AUTO

© ༔ ]

21

& CONTINUED

2-219

TM 9-1440-600-10 T 2-26 .

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued

2. 22

Adjust FREQ control for a minimum REVERSE POWER meter indication.

FORMARD PONIED REVERSE POWER TRIST

O

[

DELAY

REVERSE POWER

FREQ

23

Adjust MANUAL control until FORWARD POWER meter indicates at top of TUNE zone on upper meter scale .

FORWARD POWER

POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

MODE

AUTO

24

Observe FREQ dial indication .

25

Slowly adjust FREQ control cw from FREQ dial indication observed in step

FREQ 24 until REVERSE POWER meter indicates 30 to 70 on scale.

REVERSE POWER

CONTINUED &

2-220 2-

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-26.

26

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued

Observe FREQ dial . POWER CONTACE MODE BUTO ANT

27

FORWARD POWER REVERSE POWER RESET

TEST

Slowly adjust FREQ control ccw from FREQ dial indication observed in step FREO

DELAI FUNE

26, until REVERSE POWER meter indicates 30 to 70 on scale .

REVERSE POWER

FREQ &

во

28

Observe FREQ dial indication .

29

Adjust FREQ 24 and 26.

30

Slowly adjust MANUAL control cw until FORWARD POWER meter indicates

control

midway between

in middle of green area, and at same time , adjust FREQ control so REVERSE POWER meter indication is at

FREQ

dial

indications observed in

steps

POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

MODE

AUTO

a minimum and below 30 on scale.

FORWARD POWER

REVERSE POWER

CONTINUED

2-221

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-26 .

31

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING- Continued

Repeat steps 20 thru 28 as often as required to obtain correct indications.

MAKE SURE THAT ALL PERSONNEL ARE CLEAR

OF AN-

TENNA BEFORE PERFORMING ANY STEP BELOW. TRANSWARNING

MITTER WILL BE RADIATING AND HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT AT ANTENNA.

32

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5, rotate MANUAL control fully ccw .

TUNY

→

FRED

DELAY TURE

POWER CONTROL

AUTO

MODE

O

MANUAL

TUNE

While holding ANT switch to ANT, adjust MANUAL control cw until either FORWARD POWER meter indicates

J

33

ANT

FORWARD POWER

O

at top of TUNE zone on upper meter scale , or REVERSE POWER meter indicates at top of green area.

REVERSE POWER

CONTINUE D

T

2-222

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-26.

34

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued

-PERVER CONTROL MARIAL O AUTO ART

Continue to hold ANT switch to ANT. Unlock TUNE control and adjust TUNE and DELAY controls for a minimum indication on REVERSE POW-

REVERSE POWER TUOT

Θ DELAY TUME во

ER meter.

REVERSE POWER

TUNE

ANT DELAY

35

TUNE

While holding ANT switch to ANT, adjust MANUAL control until FORWARD POWER meter indicates at top of TUNE zone on upper meter scale.

FORWARD POWER POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

MODE

AUTO

Several minimum REVERSE POWER

meter indications may be

observed . Select TUNE and DELAY control adjustments that pro-

NOTE duce the lowest minimum .

CONTINUED

T

2-223

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-26.

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued

36

Continue to hold ANT switch to ANT and adjust TUNE and DELAY controls to obtain lowest minimum REVERSE POWER meter indication .

O

DELAY TUNE

Co

REVERSE POWER

ANT

J

TUNE

DELAY

37

TUNE

Continue to hold ANT switch to ANT and adjust MANUAL control cw until FORWARD POWER meter indicates in middle of green area. REVERSE POWER meter must indicate below 30 on scale.

FORWARD POWER

REVERSE POWER

POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

MODE

AUTO

G

38

At DLT Tuner A2A5 , release ANT switch .

39

LOCK TUNE control knob.

40

Set MODE switch to AUTO .

CONTINUED

2-224

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-26.

41

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued

At CCIP A2A2, hold RESET switch to

RESET momentarily. OPROCESSORCONTRO

AUTOSYNC 8 98 CONTROX98

RESET

42

O

FAULT KEY GEN SUMMARY FAULT FAULT

Check that SUMMARY FAULT and KEY GEN FAULT LEDs are off.

TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE 43

Set OPERATE - OFF switch to OFF. OFF

OFF

44

ALTERNATE MASTER

Set ALTERNATE MASTER switch to OFF.

OFF PROCESSOR CONTROL

‫ר‬ DUTN TROY

45

Set

PROCESSOR

CONTROL to

NORM

KGBY

NORM

DLT TEST TEST

46

Set DLT TEST switch to NORMAL.

NORMAL

CONTINUED

2-225

TM 9-1440-600-10 T 2-26 .

DATA LINK TERMINAL TUNING - Continued

2.

NOTE

The following steps are used only if Receiver-Transmitter A2A3 shuts down .

[

47

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 , rotate MANUAL control fully ccw.

POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

MODE

AUTO

FRED

DELAY TURE

อ

O

48

At CCIP A2A2 , hold RESET switch to RESET momentarily.

FAULT SUMMARY KEY GEN FAULT FAULT

Θ

PROCESSORCONTROL OSC CAL

O RESET

49

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 , adjust MANUAL control cw to obtain the required indication on the FORWARD

Ꮎ

POWER or REVERSE POWER meter.

Θ

FORWARD POWER

FREO O

BBLAY TUME

во

REVERSE POWER POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

2-226

2-

MODE

AUTO

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-27.

DATA LINK TERMINAL LOOPBACK

Use this procedure to verify operating status of the data link terminal ( DLT) . It should always be performed before operating the DLT in a net.

RADIO FREQUENCY TUNER A2A5

POWER SUPPLY A2A6 00

000

KEY GENERATOR KG-30 A2A1 RECEIVER -TRANSMITTER A2A3

COMPUTER-TO-COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE PROCESSOR A2A2

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2A2

Personnel Required . Two Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1 /4- In .

NOTE

1

Ignore all light emitting diode (LED) indicators unless otherwise directed .

Turn on data link terminal ( DLT) per para 2-24.

CONTINUED

2-227

TM 9-1440-600-10

T

2-27.

DATA LINK TERMINAL LOOPBACK - Continued

2 2

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 , set MODE switch to MANUAL and rotate

MANUAL

AUTO

MANUAL control fully ccw. TUNE

G

FRAG POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

3

MODE

AUTO

At Computer - To - Communications Interface Processor (CCIP) A2A2, per-

TEST

form the following :

PROCESSORCONTROL

NASIO

8888 TECONTROL

a.

Set DLT TEST switch to TEST.

DLT TEST TEST NORMAL

b.

Set

LOAD

NET and

OPERATE

switches to OFF.

C.

Set AUTO SYNC switch to OFF.

TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE OFF

OFF

AUTO SYNC

OFF

OFF

CONTINUED

2-228

2-

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-27.

DATA LINK TERMINAL LOOPBACK- Continued -

3

d.

Continued .

Set

PROCESSOR CONTROL to DELARREQUEST

NORM. PROCESSORCONTROL

888 CONTROL88 PROCESSOR CONTROL

DUTN TROY

NORM

KGBY

8

e.

ALTERNATE MASTER

Set ALTERNATE MASTER switch to ALTERNATE MASTER,

OFF

f.

RESET

Hold

RESET switch to

RESET

momentarily .

g.

DAY

Set TIME SET switches to 0 DAY,

TIME SET HOUR

MIN

00 HOUR, 10 MIN. 8

h. TIME CONTROL OPERATE LOAD NET OFF

88

Set LOAD

88

NET switch to

LOAD

NET, then back to OFF.

OFF

CONTINUED

2-229

TM 9-1440-600-10

1

2-27.

DATA LINK TERMINAL LOOPBACK- Continued

2 —

3

Continued .

Check that TIME

i.

OF

DAY indi-

cator displays 0 DAY, 00 HOUR , 10 MIN, 00 SEC. PROCESSORCONTROL

SYNC MODE OSC CAL 8 88 89 AUTOSTINC

RADIO

TIME OF DAY

DAY

MIN

HOUR

SEC

4

At Key Generator KG-30 A2A1 , loosen 16 captive screws and open panel .

5

Set POWER switch to OFF . Initialize Key Generator KG -30 A2A1 . ( Refer to manual KAO- 137E/TSEC . )

70 01 XMTR LTOFF ALM ON ALMLTONOFF BOTH BOTH OFF

10 of WARNING

WARNING

POWER RCVR O

10

PUSH TO ZERO

PUSH TO ZERO

ON

OFF

CONTINUED 6

2-

2-230

Close panel and secure with 16 captive screws.

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-27.

7

DATA LINK TERMINAL LOOPBACK - Continued

At CCIP A2A2 , set switch to OPERATE .

OPERATE- OFF

PROCESSORCONTROL TIME OF DAY

DAY

MIN

HOUR

PROPAGATION SHELAYREQUEST

TEST

DSCCAL 8 88 88 AUTO BYNCK TIME CONTROL

RADIO

SEC

TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE OFF

OFF

8

Check that TIME- OF- DAY indicator is activated and SEC indicator is counting .

9

At Radio

POWERCONTROL MANUAL MODE AUTO ANT

Frequency Tuner A2A5 ,

FORWARD POWER REVERSE POWER TEST

slowly adjust MANUAL control cw until FORWARD POWER meter indicates in middle of green area and REVERSE POWER meter does not ex-

FREQ

CELAY TUNE

ceed upper limit of green area.

FORWARD POWER

REVERSE POWER

POWER CONTROL

MANUAL

MODE

AUTO

O 10

Rotate MANUAL control fully ccw and set MODE switch to AUTO .

FORWARD POWER 11

REVERSE POWER

Check that AUTO light comes on and both FORWARD and REVERSE POWER meters indicate in green area .

CONTINUED

2-231

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-27.

12

DATA LINK TERMINAL LOOPBACK- Continued

At CCIP A2A2, set ALTERNATE MASPROFAGAT

TER switch to OFF. RADNO

PROCESSORCONTROL OSC CAL 8 88 88

O ALTERNATE MASTER

OFF

13

Hold

RESET switch to

FAULT KEY GEN SUMMARY FAULT FAULT

RESET mo-

mentarily. O RESET

14

Check that the fault indicators at the following locations are off.

a.

POWER SUPPLY FAULT.

At DLT Power Supply A2A6 :

O PS2

NON-INTERRUPT

b.

O Of

O PS1

O PS4

O PS3

PS6

LAMP TEST

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5:

ARDPOWER REVERSE POWER 10

POWERCONTROL MANUAL MODE

FAULT

TEST

RESET Ꮎ

TUNE

+

CONTINUED

2-232

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-27.

14

DATA LINK TERMINAL LOOPBACK- Continued

-

C.

Continued .

At Receiver-Transmitter A2A3 :

FREQUENCYSELECT

FAULT TRANSMITTER

8888 Θ Ꮎ RECEIVER A1

A4

A2

TRANSMITTER A3

A11 A12

A13

ooooo A7 A14 A10

At CCIP A2A2:

1019

d.

‫قلة ة‬ FAULY

FAULT

PROPAGATION DELAYREQUEST

OLT TEST

PROCESSORCONTROL FAULT KEY GEN SUMMARY FAULT FAULT

OSC CAL 8 88 89 CONTROL

RADIOID 5.

RESET

15

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5, hold TEST switch to TEST . Check that FORWARD POWER meter indicates in L zone on upper meter scale. Release TEST switch .

CONTINUED

2-233

TM 9-1440-600-10

T

2-27.

DATA LINK TERMINAL LOOPBACK- Continued

2 16

At CCIP A2A2 , set DLT TEST switch to NORMAL.

DLT TEST

TEST

RACHO C

PROCESSORCONTROL SCCAL 8 88 88

NORMAL

17

Set OPERATE switch to OFF .

TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE OFF

2-234 2.

OFF

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-28.

DATA LINK TERMINAL SLAVE SYNCHRONIZING

RADIO FREQUENCY TUNER A2A5

b to emit

POWER SUPPLY A2A6 00

000

KEY GENERATOR KG-30 A2A1 RECEIVER -TRANSMITTER A2A3 COMPUTER-TO-COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE PROCESSOR A2A2

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2A2

LCU DISPLAY 'PANEL A1A14

LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1

Personnel Required . Two Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip, 1 /4-In .

NOTE

ECS master identification must be sent to the LS from the ECS.

CONTINUED

2-235

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-28.

1

DATA LINK TERMINAL SLAVE SYNCHRONIZING - Continued The following must be performed before doing this procedure :

a.

Verify net start time and true time of day.

b.

Verify with Organizational Maintenance that Computer-To-Communications Interface Processor (CCIP) A2A2 master oscillator has been alined .

2

C.

Turn the DLT on per para 2-24.

d.

Tune the DLT per para 2-26 .

e.

Perform DLT loopback per para 2-27.

On CCIP A2A2, set MODE switch to 1. RADN

PROCESSORCONTROL OSCCAL 8 88 88 THE CONTROL MODE

3

Set

RADIO ID switch to

correct LS

identification .

6 RADIO ID LS/B ECS-C ECS-B LS/A

DISC LS/C

ECS-A

CONTINUED

2-236

TM 9-1440-600-10

On LCU Display Panel A1A4, set LAUNCHING STA and FIRING PLATOON switches to correct addresses.

LAUNCHING STA

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

2

POWER SUPPLIES Ο

3

LAUNCHER- PLATFORM

MISSILE LIPPERL UPPER 8

10!

2

O

MEADY LOR PLATFORM 이이 이이 READY READY RAD AUTH OOO 이이 이이 LAUNCHING STA STOP

FIRING PLATOON 1

6

O

e

5

O

4

DATA LINK TERMINAL SLAVE SYNCHRONIZING - Continued

O

2-28 .

10:

START ·

O

3

PRINGPLATOON STATUSLAMP

O

LANSTATUS TEST

10

оо

5

On

CCIP A2A2 set

OPERATE and

LOAD NET switches to OFF.

៦ ០០ CONTROL០០៩ TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE

OFF

Set AUTO SYNC switch to OFF.

SYNC O AUTO SYNC

O

6

OFF

OFF CONTINUED

2-237

TM 9-1440-600-10

1

CV

2-28.

2

7

DATA LINK TERMINAL SLAVE SYNCHRONIZING - Continued Set ALTERNATE MASTER switch to

708

OFF.

PROCESSOR CONTROL

DSCCAL 10 00 00 AUTO SYRNCY TIME CONTROL

RADNO

ALTERNATE MASTER

OFF

8

PROCESSOR CONTROL

Set PROCESSOR

CONTROL switch

to NORM .

DLTN TRBY NORM

KGBY

DLT TEST

9

Set DLT TEST switch to NORMAL.

TEST NORMAL

DAY

TIME SET HOUR

MIN 10

8

88

88

Using TIME SET switches , enter the net start time ( ECS DLT net entry time) .

-TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE

11

Set LOAD NET switch to LOAD NET and back to OFF . OFF

OFF

TIME OF DAY

12 DAY

HOUR

MIN

SEC

Check that net start time appears at TIME OF DAY display.

CONTINUED

2-238 2-

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-28.

DATA LINK TERMINAL SLAVE SYNCHRONIZING - Continued

13

At Key Generator KG-30 A2A1 , loosen 16 captive screws and open panel .

14

Set POWER switch to OFF . Initialize Key Generator KG -30 A2A1 . ( Refer to manual KAO- 137E /TSEC . )

no or XMTR &TOFF AUR ON ALM OFF BOTHOFF BOTHON

WARNING

WARNING

POWER

RCVR POWER

PUSH TO ZERO

PUSH TO ZERO

ON

OFF

15

Close panel and secure with 16 captive screws .

16

At CCIP A2A2, set TIME SET switches to desired DLT net entry time per tactical SOP.

DAY

8

TIME SET HOUR

88

PROPAGATION DELAYREQUEST.

TEST PROCESSORCONTROL

O

OSCCA 10 00 00 AUTOSYNC TIME CONTRO

MIN

88

TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE 17

Set OPERATE switch to OPERATE .

OFF

OFF CONTINUED

2-239

TM-9-1440-600-10

‫ו‬ LV

2-28.

2

18

DATA LINK TERMINAL SLAVE SYNCHRONIZING - Continued

Verify that TIME OF DAY display counts up to net entry time and stops.

TIME OF DAY QUEST DAY

MIN

HOUR

SEC

PROCESSORCONTRO

RADN OBC CAL 8 88 88 CONTROL

5.

--8--

Net entry time must be ahead of true time of day when displays stops . When OPERATE switch is set to OPERATE , DLT clock

NOTE

advances 128 times faster than real time, then stops.

a.

When true time of day equals net entry time ,

DLT clock will start and TIME

OF DAY display will advance .

If true time of day has passed and TIME OF

DAY has not advanced ,

go to step 19.

b.

Synchronization is complete when SYNC light comes on . If SYNC light comes on , go to step 22.1 .

If SYNC light does not come on , go to step 20.

19

Set OPERATE switch to OFF and reTIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE

peat steps 11 through 18. If not synchronized after three tries , call Intermediate Maintenance.

OFF

OFF

SYNC O AUTO SYNC

20

At CCIP

A2A2 ,

set AUTO

SYNC

O

switch to AUTO SYNC

OFF

CONTINUED

2-

2-240

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

DATA LINK TERMINAL SLAVE SYNCHRONIZING - Continued

2-28.

After 1

21

second TIME OF DAY display will advance

9 seconds and

stop .

This

cycle may be repeated up to six times in a 3 minute time period .

TIME OF DAY DELAYREQUEST

TEST DAY DAY

MIN

HOUR

HOUR

田

SEC PROCESSORCONTROL

MODE OBC CAL

88 TIMECONTROL8

AUTOSYNC

RADIOIN D

w

CCIP A2A2 now controls synchronization. NOTE

22

Within 3 minutes SYNC light or AUTO SYNC light will come on.

a.

If SYNC light comes on , synchroSYNC

nization is complete . 22.1 .

Go to step

b.

OO

AUTO SYNC

If AUTO SYNC light comes on, set OPERATE and AUTO SYNC switches to OFF Repeat steps 11 OFF

through 18.

TIME CONTROL LOAD NET OPERATE OFF

22.1

RESET

OFF

Verify that ECS and LS DLT TIME OF DAY clocks indicate clocks do not indicate same time , repeat steps 5 through 22.

22

23

Hold RESET switch to RESET momentarily .

24

Set AUTO SYNC switch to OFF , if on .

same time . If

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-241

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-28.

25

DATA LINK TERMINAL SLAVE SYNCHRONIZING - Continued

Check that the fault indicators at the following locations are off.

a.

At Radio Frequency Tuner A2A5 :

FAULT

RESET

⚫

RESET DELAY TURE

FREO O

O

b.

At Receiver-Transmitter A2A3:

Θ FAULT

TRANSMITTER

RECEIVER A1

A2

A3

A11 A12

FAULT RECEIVER AJ 43 491 412 413

FREQUENCYSELECT

A13

0000 FRULY

Ꮎ

OO A7 A4

A10

A14

O

C.

At CCIP A2A2 :

FAULT KEY GEN SUMMARY FAULT FAULT

FAIL

PROFAGATION DELAYREQUEST

DLF TEST

MODE OSC CAL

PROCESSORCONTRO

RESET

Θ

AUTOSYNC 8888 TIME CONTROL

w

d.

At DLT Power Supply A2A6:

POWER SUPPLY FAULT-

O PS1

O PS2

NON-INTERRUPT

O PS3 LAMP TEST

O PS4

O PS5 PS6 O

2-242

CONTINUED

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-29 .

DATA LINK TERMINAL AUTO SYNCHRONIZING

Use this procedure to resynchronize the launching station (LS) data link terminal (DLT) to the engagement control station ( ECS) DLT during power- up.

abnoose a

vietamix

SA

RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER A2A3

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2

COMPUTER-TO-COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE PROCESSOR A2A2

1

Following conditions are required for this procedure to work:

a.

DLT has been synchronized .

b.

Noninterrupt power has not been lost.

C.

DLT Power Distribution

Unit

( PDU) A2A4 and

Launcher Electronics

Module

(LEM ) Power Distribution Unit (PDU) A1A2 are energized .

STINU! CONTINUED

2-243

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-29.

2

DATA LINK TERMINAL AUTO SYNCHRONIZING - Continued

At Computer-To- Communications Interface Processor (CCIP) A2A2 , check that TIME OF DAY display is counting .

TIME OF DAY

DAY

MIN

HOUR

SEC PROCESSORCONTROL

- DSC CAL 8 88 88 CONTROL

1.

RADIO

5.

Wait approximately 45 seconds after DLTM - PDU A2A4 is ener-

NOTES

gized for Receiver-Transmitter A2A3 to obtain lock . 2.

3

BYNC

Receiver-Transmitter A2A3 FAULT- RECEIVER -A1 on.

LED may be

RESET

At CCIP A2A2, hold RESET switch to RESET momentarily .

4

At Receiver-Transmitter A2A3, check that FAULT- RECEIVER - A1 LED goes off.

O FAULT RECEIVER

A1

A2

TRANSMITTER

A3

A11 A12

A13

A7

A14

A10

FREQUENCYSELECT OD GILD

FAULT RECEIVER AD 43 411 412

G

OBEC στο

A4

Ö Öö Ö FAIT อ e

FAULT RESET

Θ

CONTINUED

2-244

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-29.

DATA LINK TERMINAL AUTO SYNCHRONIZING- Continued

5

At CCIP A2A2, set PROCESSOR CONTROL switch to NORM

PROCESSOR CONTROL

DL TN ⚫

TRBY NORM

KGBY PROCESSORCONTROL

6

OBC CAL 8 88 88 AUTOSYNC ECONTRO

AUTO SYNC switch to AUTO SYNC

SYNC ୮ O AUTO SYNC

OFF

7

After 1 second , TIME OF DAY display

TIME OF DAY

will advance 9 seconds and stop . This cycle may be repeated up to six times in a 3 minute period.

DAY

HOUR

MIN

SEC

CONTINUED

2-245

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-29.

DATA LINK TERMINAL AUTO SYNCHRONIZING - Continued

CCIP A2A2 now controls resynchronization .

NOTE

8

Within 3 minutes, SYNC light or AUTO SYNC light will come on .

SYNC O AUTO SYNC

PROCESSORCONTROLAUTO SYNC 8 88 TIMECONTROL88

RADIOB

OFF

a.

If SYNC light comes on , synchronization is complete :

(1 )

Set AUTO OFF .

SYNC

switch to

(2)

Verify that ECS and LS TIME OF DAY clocks indicate same time . If clocks do not indicate same time, perform DLT slave

b.

synchronization per para 2-28.

OPERATE

If AUTO SYNC light comes on , set OPERATE and AUTO SYNC

OFF

switches to OFF and perform DLT slave synchronization per para 2-28.

RESET C.

Hold

RESET switch to

RESET

momentarily.

CONTINUED

2-246

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30

MARCH ORDER

The instructions in this paragraph prepare a properly emplaced launching station (LS) for road march . The procedure should be performed after a march order has been received and acknowledged . If you do not know the launching road march , refer to Equipment Data para 1-8.

station

dimensions important to

March order is essentially the same during daylight, nighttime , and blackout conditions . Nighttime does not always mean blackout. When blackout conditions are in effect blackout flashlights must be used . At night when blackout conditions are not in effect regular lights may be used . The following blackout conditions .

general precautions must be observed

under nighttime or

Use signals per FM 21-60. Use flashlights to see with. Be aware of each crewmember's position . Get help when tasks cannot be easily performed in the dark. Put tools and equipment away after using them . Make all movements sure and deliberate . Do not climb on the LS unless required .

Crewmembers on the LS must be

watched by another crewmember and warned of unsafe conditions . •

Do not move vehicles without a guide . Observe all cautions and warnings called out in the procedure and

marked

on equipment.

IF THE OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

HAS BEEN BELOW 32°F

(0°C) AND HAS RISEN ABOVE 32°F (0°C) , TORQUE THE CANISTER TIEDOWN BOLTS PER CHANGING WEATHER

CAU

PARAGRAPH 2-38 BEFORE ROAD MARCH .

CONTINUED

2-247

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

MARCH ORDER- Continued

DATA LINK MAST ASSEMBLY

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2

OUTRIGGER CONTROL PANEL GUIDED MISSILES

GENERATOR SET A6

LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1

ROADSIDE

Personnel Required . Three Tools and Equipment Required . Pliers, Slip Joint, 12- In . Long

CONTINUED

2-248

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued

CONFIRM WITH ECS OPERATOR THAT THE LS IS IN LOCAL Le

WARNING

MODE BEFORE GOING TO LS. YOU COULD BE SEVERELY INJURED OR KILLED IF LAUNCHER MECHANICS (LM ) ROTATES OR MISSILE FIRES .

STAY CLEAR OF LAUNCHER MECHANICS PLANE OF ROTA-

Le TION UNTIL KEYSWITCH IS SET TO LOCAL, LOCAL LIGHT

WARNING

IS ON, AND KEY IS REMOVED . WHEN KEYSWITCH IS SET TO RMT, TURNTABLE CAN BE ROTATED REMOTELY , CAUSING INJURY TO PERSONNEL WITHIN PLANE OF ROTATION .

MISSILES DROPPED ACCIDENTALLY MAY BE DANGEROUS .

Le REPORT ANY DROP OF 12 INCHES OR MORE IMMEDIATELY

WARNING

AND PROCEED AS FOLLOWS : IF MISSILE IS STILL IN CANISTER , CONSIDER MISSILE TO BE UNARMED . DO NOT MOVE MISSILE FOR 1 HOUR AFTER INCIDENT. AFTER 1 HOUR , UNIT COMMANDER MAY DIRECT MISSILE TO BE REMOVED TO DEPOT. IF

MISSILE

IS

PARTLY OR

COMPLETELY OUT

OF

CANISTER , CONSIDER MISSILE TO BE ARMED . TELL YOUR UNIT COMMANDER AND EVACUATE AREA.

DEATH MAY RESULT FROM EXPLOSION .

MISSILE

MISFIRE

MAY RELEASE

EXPLOSIVE

HYDROGEN

Le GAS INTO CANISTER . AFTER A MISFIRE , DO NOT GO NEAR

WARNING

CANISTER FOR 1 HOUR . DEATH MAY RESULT.

CONTINUED

2-249

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued

MISSILE MISFIRE MAY RELEASE CORROSIVE Le WARNING

UID CAN BURN YOU . HANDLE CANISTERS WITH CARE .

CREWMEMBERS Le WARNING

Le WARNING

POTASSIUM

HYDROXIDE FROM BATTERIES INTO CANISTER . THIS LIQ-

ON

LS

MUST BE WATCHED

CREWMEMBERS AND WARNED OF ANY

BY OTHER

UNSAFE CONDI-

TIONS TO PREVENT INJURY.

DATA LINK TERMINAL ( DLT) TIME OF DAY CLOCK MUST BE COUNTING BEFORE PROPER INDICATION CAN BE OBTAINED ON NIGSHE HAZARD LIGHTS. A SHE HAZAD LIGHT ON LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14 INDICATES A HAZARDOUS CONDITION FOR POSITIONS HAVING A LIVE MISSILE WITH UMBILICAL CONNECTED ONLY. ! .. LIGHTS WILL BE ON FOR ALL POSITIONS HAVING A DUMMY MISSILE , EMPTY CANISTER , EMPTY LOCATION , OR A LIVE MISSILE WITH UMBILICAL DISCONNECTED , BUT THESE CONDITIONS DO NOT CONSTITUTE A HAZARD. IF ANY ONE OF THE MISSILE HAZARO LIGHTS IS ON, VISUALLY CHECK THAT A MISSILE IS PRESENT AT THAT POSITION WITH UMBILICAL CONNECTED.

WHEN

IT IS DETERMINED THAT A

LIVE MISSILE IS PRESENT WITH UMBILICAL CONNECTED , IMMEDIATELY

NOTIFY

(ECS) OF CONDITION WILL REMAIN LEAVE

AREA

IN

ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION INDICATED,

LOCAL

MODE.

AND ADVISE THAT AFTER

AND AWAIT FURTHER

NOTIFYING

INSTRUCTIONS .

LS

ECS, AC-

CIDENTAL FIRING COULD SEVERELY INJURE OR KILL YOU .

A DAMAGED CANISTER CAN INDICATE AN UNUSABLE MISSILE . REPORT ANY CANISTER DAMAGE IMMEDIATELY. UNIT COMMANDER WILL DECIDE IF MISSILE IS TO BE REPLACED OR USED . CAUTION

CONTA

2-250

ΕΙ

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued

DO NOT MOVE GUIDED MISSILE (GM) WITHIN 50 FEET OF AN RF SOURCE THAT RADIATES 50 WATTS OR MORE .

CAUTION

1

SELECT LOCAL MODE .

LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (LEM - PDU ) A1A2 ACCESS DOOR MUST REMAIN CLOSED DURING SYSTEM OPERATION TO PREVENT DEGRADING EMI SHIELDING.

CAUTION

a.

Open LEM A1

right- hand door . If wind is over 45 knots ,

insert locking pin

in hole at top of door.

CONTINUED

2-251

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued

— 1

b.

Continued .

On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , set LOCAL- RMT switch to LOCAL

O

BITE

LAUNCHER LOCAL

LO

POWER SUPPLIES O MISSILE UPPER

PLATFORM

O

O

CA

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

L

이이 이이 O

RM

T

O

101

0101010

LAURICHINGSTA

START

C.

Verify that LOCAL light comes on .

d.

Remove key from LOCAL- RMT switch . Commander retain key.

STATUS LANDFEET

O

O

le

O

Ô LAFSON

Crewmember designated by Battery

STATUS LAMPS NORMAL

e.

Set STATUS

LAMPS switch to

NORMAL or DIM as desired .

DIM

2

ROTATE TURNTABLE TO TRAVEL POSITION .

a.

∞

Check travel position pointer. If alined between alinement strip gage marks , go to step 3.

CONTINUED

2-252

TM 9-1440-600-10 MARCH ORDER - Continued 2

b.

Continued .

Verify that engagement control handle is set to ROTATE

ROTATE

ELEV

ROADMARCH ROADSIDE

0

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

O

On LCU Display Panel A1A14, hold CCW- STOP - CW switch to

LAUNCHERLOCAL CRAFT

O 0

O

კიი

O

C W

!09

e

STOP

O

Ο

READY LC PLATFORM 이이 이이 MADY RAISED ATRUTH READY O DISCON MISSILE MECTED 0101010 Θ RAISE STOP CONNECT CONNECT Ο Ο [NSC CXSC DISC START 0 3 ODO FIRINGPLATOON BITETEST STATUSLA NORMAL OO OFF STATUS eOO LAMPTEST

O

correct position to rotate turntable to travel position .

O

POWER SUPPLIES OOOO O VDC 20 MISSILE PLATFORM LIPPER UPPERA HAZARD 0000

O

BITE

C.

101

2-30 .

d.

Release CCW- STOP - CW switch when travel position alinement strip gage marks .

pointer alines between

CONTINUED

2-253

TM 9-1440-600-10

MARCH ORDER- Continued

2-30 .

MISSILE IS FREE TO MOVE IN CANISTER IF TORQUE TUBE HANDLE IS NOT PROPERLY LOCKED . SUDDEN STOPS ON ROAD

WARNING

MARCH

COULD CAUSE

MISSILE TO

PENETRATE

TRACTOR CAB, RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

1.

Be very alert at night. Insure that working area is clear before starting . Make all movements sure and deliberate . Do not rush .

NOTES

2.

Check GM torque tube handles . If they are locked , go to step 3 h.

3.

Have a crewmember at LCU Display Panel A1A14 verify that MISSILE READY light at the correct GM position goes out as that GM torque tube handle is locked.

4.

Lock GM torque tube UL, LL.

handles in the following order : UR ,

LR ,

LOCK GM TORQUE TUBE HANDLES AND DISCONNECT GMs.

3

a.

Remove quick- release torque tube handle .

b.

Pull out and plunger.

hold

pin

by

memb

spring-loaded

Rotate torque tube han-

dle cw to LOCK position . C.

Release plunger . Check that plunger seats in left detent hole

d.

O O DESSICANTHOLDER

O

to secure torque tube handle . Check that no red paint shows to

CK

PUBL

O GESSICANTHOLDER

DONOT LATCHOR UNLATCH UNLESSGM ELEVATED

O RECORDS

RELIEFVALVE PUSHTO RELEASE O

CONTINUED

Change 1

PUSHTO RELEASE

Jill

LATCHOR ULATCH UNLESSCM ELEVATED

handle .

UNLO

left of torque tube

2-254

O

TM 9-1440-600-10

e.

Insert quick- release pin into hole to right of torque tube handle.

f.

Check with crewmember at LCU

O

Continued .

BITE

PLATFORM

LAUNCHER-

correct GM position went out.

POWER SUPPLIES O

O

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

Display Panel A1A14 and verify that MISSILE READY light for the

O

O

-

MISSILE

=0 | 0 |0 |0

이이 이이

RAISE

O

O 0|0|0|0

CHING STA

о

O

RLARY PLATFOR MAD RAISED ASMOUTH ööö

MISSILE READY STOP

O

START

O

3

MARCH ORDER - Continued

oooo

2-30 .

·

FING PLATOON

O

O! Ho

CITE TENT STATUR LAN FEST

Ο

g.

Repeat steps a thru f for LR , UL, and LL positions.

h.

Verify that all MISSILE READY lights are off.

i.

On

LCU

Display

Panel A1A14 ,

UPPER L

verify that MISSILE HAZARD light is off at each position that has a live GM with umbilical connect-

MISSILE UPPER R LWR L

LWR R

MISSILE HAZARD

ed.

j.

Raise cover and hold CONNECTDISC switches to

DISC

at all

positions until corresponding lights MISSILE - DISCONNECTED

MISSILE DISCONNECTED 0101010

go on.

CONNECT CONNECT

DISC

DISC

CONNECT CONNECT

DISC

DISC

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-255

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

4

MARCH ORDER - Continued

POSITION TRACTOR FOR COUPLING TO SEMITRAILER .

Le

TO PREVENT INJURIES, INSURE THAT ALL ARE CLEAR BEFORE MOVING TRACTOR .

WARNING

1.

PERSONNEL

Tractor should be positioned no more than 4 feet ( 1.22 meters) from semitrailer so that 28-volt power cable does not get grease on it.

NOTES 2.

This is a two crewmember task . One crewmember drives truck. One crewmember is beside front of semitrailer to assist in coupling .

a.

Pull out fifth wheel secondary lock release handle all the way and hook in out position .

SECONDARY LOCK

RELEASE

FIFTH WHEEL TAIL RAMPS GUIDE RAMP

PRIMARY LOCK RELEASE

ROADSIDE

b. C.

Pull out fifth wheel primary release handle all the way. Push down fifth wheel tail ramps so that ramps are level with or below guide ramps.

CONTINUED

2-256

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 . 4

MARCH ORDER - Continued —

Continued .

d.

Remove chock blocks from stowage and chock semitrailer wheels as follows :

(1 )

If LS is facing uphill , place chock blocks behind rear wheels , both roadside .

curbside

CHOCK BLOCK STOWAGE

and

CHOCK BOTH SIDES

ROADSIDE CHOCK BOTH SIDES

(2)

If LS is facing downhill, place chock blocks in front of rear wheels ,

both

curbside

and

roadside .

ROADSIDE

(3)

If LS is on level , place one chock block in front of curbside rear wheel and one chock block in back of roadside rear wheel. CURBSIDE ONLY

ROADSIDE ONLY

ROADSIDE

NOTE

Through remainder of this procedure , chock block will be shown for LS in level position only . Chock as described in step d.

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-256.1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30.

MARCH ORDER - Continued -

4

Continued.

INSURE THAT ALL PERSONNEL ARE CLEAR BEFORE MOVING TRACTOR. DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN RESULT WARNING

IF STRUCK BY TRACTOR .

BE CAREFUL NOT TO RUN KINGPIN UP GUIDE RAMPS OR DAMAGE TO KINGPIN , GUIDE RAMPS OR FIFTH WHEEL MAY RESULT.

CAUTION

e. f.

Remove chock blocks from tractor rear wheels. Drive tractor to emplaced site . One crewmember guide driver in backing tractor slowly to front of semitrailer.

CURBSIDE

g.

With crewmember guiding , tractor fifth wheel jaws.

maneuver tractor to aline semitrailer kingpin with

TRACTOR WHEELS MUST BE CHOCKED

BEFORE

DRIVER

La LEAVES CAB .

DEATH

OR

SERIOUS

INJURY

CAN

BE

WARNING CAUSED BY RUNAWAY TRACTOR .

CONTINUED)

2-256.2

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30.

MARCH ORDER - Continued -

4

h.

Continued .

Pull out tractor PARKING

BRAKE control ,

place transmission range selector

lever in neutral ( N) , and leave engine running . i.

Remove chock blocks from stowage in tractor roadside stowage box and chock tractor rear wheels as follows:

(1 )

STOWAGE

If tractor is facing uphill , place chock blocks behind tractor rear wheels , both curbside and

CHOCK BOTH SIDES

roadside .

ROADSIDE

CHOCK BOTH SIDES (2)

If tractor is facing downhill , place chock blocks in front of rear wheels, both curbside and roadside .

ROADSIDE

ROADSIDE ONLY

(3)

If tractor is level , place chock block in front of rear wheel on curbside and behind rear wheel

CURBSIDE ONLY

on roadside .

ROADSIDE

Through remainder of this procedure , chock blocks will be shown for tractor as

in

level

position

above

unless grade

is shown.

NOTE

Chock as described in step i .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-257

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued

5

PREPARE DLTM A2 FOR ROADMARCH .

a.

Remove padlock and open DLTM A2 doors . If wind is over 45 knots , insert locking pin in hole at top of door.

B 788 00 000

b.

On Computer-To -Communications Interface Processor (CCIP) A2A2, TEST switch to TEST

DLT TEST

set DLT

Θ

TEST

TEST MODE

PROCESSORCONTROL

(3) NORMAL

WARNING

8 88 89

TO PREVENT INJURY, MAKE SURE AREA IS CLEAR BEFORE LOWERING PLATFORM .

MAKE

SURE

THAT

GUARD

RAIL

IS

NOT

INSTALLED

AROUND GENERATOR SET BEFORE LOWERING LAUNCHER PLATFORM OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY OCCUR .

CAUTION

2-258

Change 1

CONTINUED

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

6

MARCH ORDER - Continued

LOWER LAUNCHER PLATFORM .

a.

Set engagement control handle to ELEV.

ROADSIDE

ELEV

ROTATE

ROADMARCH

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-258.1 /(2-258.2 blank)

TM 9-1440-600-10

MARCH ORDER- Continued

6

b.

Continued . PLATFORM RAISED

AZIMUTH READY

O

O

Verify that AZIMUTH READY light Panel

on LCU Display goes out.

A1A14

RAISE STOP

LWR START

NOTE

RAISE- STOP - LWR

Launcher platform can be stopped by setting switch to STOP.

10

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT BITE

momen-

steadyrest and stop.

PLATFORM

O

LAUNCHING STA

RAISED

light is off.

STOP

START

RASE- STOP - LWR switch to STOP.

Set

O DISC

DASC O

f.

RAISE

0| 0 | 0 |0 MISSA BASCOM NECTED 이이 이이

O

Verify that

101

Ø

e.

ASSA! MADY

O

LCNR PLATFORSA RAISED AZARUTH READY READY

lower to

O

up

will

Ο

tarily .

Platform

! O

START switch

VEX VEXC UPPER MISSILE NAZARD

O

Hold

PLATFORM

O

-LAUNCHER LOCAL

LWR d.

POWER SUPPLIES

RAISE- STOP - LWR switch to

! O

Set

O

C.

e

2-30.

FIRINGPLATOON BITETEST STATUS DEF STATUS

O OFF

AZIMUTH GEAR TRAIN MAY BE DAMAGED IF ENGAGEMENT

CANTI

CONTROL HANDLE IS WHILE TRAVELING .

NOT IN

ROAD

MARCH POSITION

CONTINUED

T

2-259

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-30 .

MARCH ORDER- Continued -

6

Continued . ELEV

ROTATE

g.

Set engagement control handle to ROADMARCH ROADMARCH

CONNECT TRACTOR AIR LINES AND ELECTRICAL CABLES TO SEMITRAILER. 7

a.

Remove dummy coupling from

semitrailer

SERVICE

and

EMERGENCY air

brake line connectors.

b.

Remove captive dust cover from Semitrailer Connector 42W2P1

192

A

AWJ

dr ythe Bid ei tripil

BIAR

CURBSIDE

CONTINUED

2-260

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30.

MARCH ORDER - Continued

7

C.

Continued .

Remove outrigger cable and inter-

BATTERY

vehicular light cable from tractor

BOX

roadside stowage box .

d.

Connect outrigger cable to tractor slave connector .

SLAVE CONNECTOR

OUTRIGGER CABLE

CURBSIDE

c

c

e

L

c

c

ec

c

c

c

c

e.

s

s

e

c

c

f.

Route outrigger cable across rear of tractor to connector tree. Connect intervehicular light cable to receptacle on base of connector tree .

g.

Fasten

both

electrical

cables to

top of connector tree.

ny

an

an n

INTERVEHICULAR LIGHT CABLE

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-261

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued —

7

Disconnect air

c c c c c c c c e c c e e c c e e c c o a)

h.

Continued .

brake lines from

dummy glad hand connector tree.

couplings on

) )) )

DUMMY COUPLING SEMITRA

VERGENC

CURBSIDE

i.

Carefully route cables and air brake lines from tractor to semitrailer .

Be

careful

not to

get

grease from fifth wheel on lines or cables . j.

Connect blue air brake line to SERVICE coupling on semitrailer. Connect red air brake line to EMERGENCY coupling on semitrailer.

CONTINUED

2-262

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued

— 7

k.

Continued .

Connect intervehicular light cable from tractor to Semitrailer Connector 42W2P1 .

I.

Connect outrigger service cable to its semitrailer connector, and lock in place with spring retainer.

m.

In tractor cab, push in TRACTOR AIR SUPPLY control.

n.

Make sure air lines and electrical cables are supported and will not catch or chafe .

8

MAIN POWER DC AC

RUN TIME

At Power Control Panel (PCP) A1A3, raise cover and set MAIN POWER DC CB2 to ON .

M1

• CREWMEMBERS

ON

LS

MUST

Θ

CB2 CB1 O →

BE WATCHED

BY OTHER

Le CREWMEMBERS

AND WARNED OF ANY

UNSAFE

CONDI-

WARNINGS TIONS TO PREVENT INJURY.

• DATA LINK MAST ASSEMBLY MAY BE HOT. USE PROTECTIVE

GLOVES

IF

NECESSARY TO PREVENT INJURY TO

HANDS.

HANDLE ANTENNA CAREFULLY TO PREVENT DAMAGE .

CAUTION

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-263

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued -

Continued .

8

Be alert at night . Insure that working area is clear before starting . Make all movements sure and deliberate . Do not rush .

NOTE

9

STOW DATA LINK MAST ASSEMBLY.

Two crewmembers are needed to perform this procedure , one NOTE

a.

on roadside work platform front roadside outrigger.

by Generator Set A6 and one on

Remove dust cap from dummy connector on flange of Upper Mast A7A12.

LOWER MAST

UPPER MAST

ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

2-264

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 . 9

MARCH ORDER - Continued -

Continued . LOWER MAST-

b.

Disconnect Cable A7A12W1P2 UPPER MAST

from RF Adapter A7A11J1 .

C.

Connect Cable

A7A12W1P2 to

Dummy connector on flange of LOWER MAST-

Upper Mast A7A12. d.

Install dust cap on

RF Adapter

A7A11J1 .

UPPER MAST

LOWER MAST SPRING CLIP

e.

Disconnect

Ground

Cable

A7A12W2 from Ground Connector A7A11J2 .

UPPER MAST f.

Stow Ground Cable A7A12W2 in spring clip on upper mast .

CONTINUED

2-265

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30.

MARCH ORDER - Continued -

9

g.

Continued .

Both crewmembers together , slide Upper Mast Assembly A7A12 out of Lower Mast Assembly A7A11 .

LOWER MAST-

UPPER MAST

h.

Rest upper mast in front cradle .

Crewmember on work platform hold upper

mast in place. Crewmember on outrigger climb to work platform over wheels.

ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

2-266

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued

-

Continued .

9

Release two hood latches and open front and rear cradle clamps.

i.

CLAMP UPPER MAST

HOOD LATCH CRADLE LOWER MAST

ROADSIDE

3

j.

Both crewmembers together, move upper mast to stow position . Place upper mast in cradle clamps .

k.

Close clamps on front and rear cradles and secure with hood latches.

CONTINUED

2-267

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-30. 10

MARCH ORDER - Continued SECURE TRAVEL LOCKPINS AND ROADSIDE WORK PLATFORMS .

Remove travel lockpin from bracket on roadside steadyrest .

a.

AJO

H BJOARD

ROADSIDE TEAM RBWOJ

‫ف‬ ‫ة‬ ‫ن‬

b.

Press and hold lockpin pushbutton .

C.

Insert lockpin through hole in platform and steadyrest .

d.

Release lockpin pushbutton .

CONTINUED

2-268

TM 9-1440-600-10

MARCH ORDER - Continued

2-30 .

10

-

e.

Continued .

Raise and fold over roadside side work platform .

HOOD LATCH

SIDE WORK PLATFORM

TYPICAL 2 PLACES

FENDER WORK PLATFORM ROADSIDE

11

f.

Secure work platform with hood latch at front end .

g.

Raise and fold over fender work platform .

h.

Secure work platform with hood latch at rear end .

i.

Install curbside travel lockpin.

DEENERGIZE LEM - PDU A1A2 .

a.

Open

LEM

A1

left- hand

door.

If wind is over 45 knots ,

insert

locking

pin

in hole at top of door.

CONTINUED

2-269

TM 9-1440-600-10

MARCH ORDER - Continued

2-30 .

11

Continued .

b.

In sequence listed below,

set the following

controls

on

LEM - PDU A1A2 to

OFF.

1

3

4

UPR R MSL

UPR L MSL

5

( 2 LWR L MSL

LWR R MSL

ON

OFF

+

+

ON

OFF

OFF

O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT Θ Θ

ON

BLOWER OFF

+

ON

OFF

O LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC, MAINA ON

9

MOT CONT UNIT AC

MSL GYRO/CLOCK PWR SPLY

(11):

10

+

7

6

LAMPS

Θ OFF

OFF

OFF

O Θ

ON

O

OFF

2 ON

OFF

O

ON

O

O

OFF

10

11

MSL 5 VDC PWR SPLY

OFF

9

OFF

58

OFF

3

OFF

13) (12) ON OFF OFF

ON

4

OFF

OFF

8

O Θ

MSL PAFUДITL PWR SPLY

BLOWER

→

ON

7

MSL TWT FIL PWR SPLY

+

+

ON

OFF

OFF

6

+

+

ON

Θ

CNVC OUT CANISTER HTR AC

+

13

12

LCHR ELEX 28 VDC PWR SPLY ON

OFF

+

ORD PWR SPLY

+

ON

OFF

+

LCHR ELEX 5 VDC PWR SPLY +

ON

OFF

CONTINUED

2-270

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30.

MARCH ORDER - Continued -

11

Continued.

15

14

O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT

MAIN B +

ON

Θ

+

MAIN A

BLOWER OFF

ON

LAUNC OFF

16

ORD PWRSPLY ON OFF

CNVCOUT CANISTERNTR

MOTCONT UNIT AC ON OFF

LAMPS

BLOWER

OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC, UPR & MOL UPRAMEL O ON V OFF

14

OFF

OFF

LOHRELEX SPLY PARSVDC ON OFF

17

RONCS AC. 15

16

OFF

OFF

LCHRELEX 28VDC FWR SPLY ON OFF

OFF

GYROCLOCK PWB SPLY ON OFF

PAFUSTL PWR SPLY

TWITFIL PWRSPLY

MBL&VOC PWRSPLY

CWN &MSL OFF

LWRRMSL ON OFF 17 ON OFF TEST

OFF

G

+

ON

+

ON + OFF

O OFF

C.

O

O

O

O

TEST

Close and secure both

LEM

A1

doors.

d.

Roll down and secure air exhaust cover on left side of LEM A1 . CONTINUED

2-271

TM 9-1440-600-10

MARCH ORDER - Continued

2-30 .

12

DEENERGIZE DLTM- PDU A2A4.

a.

In sequence listed below, set the following controls on DLTM -PDU A2A4 to

OFF

1

0 O NK TERM MDL POWER DISTR

CNVC OUT

OFF

O

+

O

CLK PWR ON

b.

PWR SPLY ON +

ON

3 OFF

O о

+

OFF

OFF

4

OFF

13

OFF

O

51

ON 6 TEST 5 OFF Θ O O

3

+

DGTL PROCESSOR

2 G

G

OFF

4

2

6

5

MAIN A ON +

Θ

OFF

LAMPS

BLOWER ON

ON OFF TEST

OFF

Close and secure both DLTM A2 doors . Lock left door with padlock .

AT PCP A1A3, RAISE COVER AND SET MAIN

MAIN POWER DC AC Θ

POWER - AC CB1 TO RUN TIME

OFF .

CB2

M1 Ꮎ

CONTINUED

2-272

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

14

MARCH ORDER- Continued

OPEN GENERATOR SET A6 CIRCUIT BREAKER .

a.

Open and latch Generator Set A6 control cubicle doors.

b.

Hold CKT BRK switch to open until CKT BRK light goes off.

O

O

ENGINE

O

FAULTINDICATOR

GENERATOR

O O CKT BRK CKT BRK CLOSE

Le WARNING

ED

OPEN

DCCONTROL BREAKER CIRCUIT PULLFOR EMERGENCY STOP

TO PREVENT INJURY, DO NOT STEP ON LS CABLES OR CABLE BUNDLES .

CONTINUED

2-273

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued

NOTE

15

Be alert at night. Insure that working area is clear before starting . Make all movements sure and deliberate . Do not rush .

SECURE LEM A1 AND DLTM A2 AIR INLET AND AIR EXHAUST COVERS.

a.

At rear of each module , untie each cover .

Secure each cover with six snap

fasteners at bottom and sides.

DIOFT

TYPICAL LEM A1 DLTM A2

b.

On right side of LEM A1

and on both sides of DLTM A2 , untie each cover.

Secure each cover with eight snap fasteners at bottom and sides .

CONTINUED

2-274

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued

1.

At night crewmembers must be very careful to coordinate work and signals while raising outriggers and coupling tractor to semitrailer.

Use lights to insure that area is clear before

starting .

Use lights as signals. Make all movements sure and deliberate . Do not rush .

NOTES 2.

One crewmember operate outriggers at

control panel .

Another

crewmember observe outrigger movements and semitrailer conditions . The observer signals operator when area is clear and keeps operator informed of outrigger position and semitrailer condition .

16

RAISE OUTRIGGERS.

KEEP FINGERS OUTSIDE OUTRIGGER CONTROL BOX COV-

Le ER UNTIL IT IS LOCKED OPEN . COVER SNAPS OPEN AND WARNING

a.

CAN INJURE FINGERS.

Remove locking

hook from

out-

rigger control box handle.

b.

Turn handle ccw and open cover with gentle pull on handle.

CURBSIDE

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-275

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30.

MARCH ORDER - Continued

— 16

Continued .

OUTRIGGERS C.

Lower cover until spring

loaded

plungers engage rods and cover is locked open .

d.

Set POWER switch to ON . Verify that leveling light comes on.

VERIFY THAT AREA IS CLEAR BEFORE OPERATING OUTLe RIGGERS . INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT IF STRUCK WARNING BY OUTRIGGER .

•TO PREVENT TWISTING SEMITRAILER FRAME, DO NOT OPERATE DIAGONAL PAIRS OF OUTRIGGERS AT SAME TIME . CAUTIONS

• VERIFY THAT

OUTRIGGER

LIMIT SWITCHES

ARE

FREE

FROM DEBRIS , MUD , OR OTHER SUBSTANCES THAT COULD PREVENT PROPER OPERATION OF SWITCHES.

For uneven sites , outriggers may have to be operated one at a time. NOTE

Use single control switch

if

required .

Upper switches

control roadside outriggers . Lower switches control curbside outriggers .

CONTINUED

2-276

Change 1

2-30 .

16

MARCH ORDER - Continued

-

Continued .

OFF

ON e.

POWER

Using two REAR rear outriggers

switches, raise until they clear

ground .

REAR OUTRIGGERS FRONT

f.

Verify that semitrailer rear wheels are chocked on both curbside and roadside .

CURBSIDE

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-277

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued

—

Continued.

16

g.

Using two FRONT outrigger switches, adjust height of semitrailer to aline kingpin with tractor fifth wheel ramp .

FIFTH WHEEL RAMP

0

KINGPIN CURBSIDE

17

COUPLE TRACTOR TO SEMITRAILER AND RAISE OUTRIGGERS .

DO

NOT

STAND

BETWEEN

TRACTOR

AND

SEMITRAILER

L WHEN GUIDING TRACTOR TO COUPLE WITH SEMITRAILER. WARNING YOU COULD BE SERIOUSLY INJURED OR KILLED .

One crewmember drive tractor. Another crewmember watch couNOTE pling and guide driver.

a.

Verify that:

(1 )

Tractor fifth wheel ramp is alined with LS kingpin plate .

(2)

Electrical cables and airlines are clear.

(3)

Working area is clear.

CONTINUED

2-278

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30. 17

MARCH ORDER - Continued —

Continued.

TO PREVENT WARNING

b.

INJURIES,

INSURE

THAT ALL

PERSONNEL

ARE CLEAR BEFORE MOVING TRACTOR .

Remove chock blocks from tractor rear wheels and

stow in tractor

STOWAGE

roadside stowage box.

ROADSIDE

C.

Slowly back tractor under semitrailer so that tractor fifth wheel jaws are alined with LS kingpin .

d.

Check that front of semitrailer is

1000

on the guide semitrailer

ramps and

height

as

adjust

needed

0

using forward outriggers .

Slowly continue to back tractor until fifth wheel jaws lock around kingpin . f.

Visually check that kingpin is locked in fifth wheel and that light cannot be seen between fifth wheel and bottom of semitrailer.

g.

Check coupling by inching tractor forward . If coupling is not secure , rock semitrailer slowly back and forth until kingpin is locked in fifth wheel .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-278.1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

17

MARCH ORDER - Continued

-

h.

Continued.

Push in primary lock release handle all the way.

SECONDARY LOCK

RELEASE

FIFTH WHEEL TAIL RAMPS GUIDE RAMP

PRIMARY LOCK RELEASE

ROADSIDE

i.

Unhook secondary lock release handle and push in all the way.

j.

In cab of tractor:

(1 )

Place transmission range selector lever in neutral ( N) .

(2)

Push trailer handbrake control all the way forward to OFF position .

(3)

Pull out PARKING BRAKE control ; leave engine running .

CONTINUED

2-278.2

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30 .

MARCH ORDER - Continued -

17

Continued .

Secure gooseneck curbside and roadside work platforms .

k.

(1 )

Raise and hold platform latch handle.

(2)

Raise platform .

(3)

Release latch handle.

ROADSIDE

k.1 .

Pick up and stow roadside and curbside semitrailer chock blocks .

k.2.

Insure that area is clear.

NOTE

Outrigger drive motors automatically stop when outriggers raised to travel position .

are

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-279

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-30.

MARCH ORDER - Continued -

17

1.

Continued .

At outrigger control

panel ,

hold

the two REAR outrigger switches

OFF until outriggers are in travel position . m.

Hold the two

FRONT outrigger

switches up until outriggers are in travel position .

n.

ON

POWER

REAR OUTRIGGERS FRONT

Set POWER switch to OFF.

La

KEEP

FINGERS

OUTSIDE

WHILE CLOSING COVER .

OUTRIGGER CONTROL BOX COVER SNAPS SHUT AND CAN

WARNING INJURE FINGERS .

Close and secure outrigger control panel cover.

p.

Connect safety chain snap hooks to all four outriggers .

T FOR RAVEL O TACTIL NCOACL K

O.

о о

CONTINUED

2-280

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-30.

18

MARCH ORDER - Continued

SHUT DOWN GENERATOR SET A6. START

a.

RUN

After 3 minutes operation with no load applied, set Generator Set A6 START- RUN - STOP switch to STOP.

b.

STOP

Verify that engine stops. FAULT INDICATOR ®

GENERATOR

ENGINE O

о

9 ㅎ

оо

OPERATION

お

BUTTLEGUY

O

Ο

C.

OCCONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER PULLFOR EMERGENCY STOP

Close control cubicle and air vent doors.

GROUNDING CABLE 42W3 19

PREPARE FOR ROAD MARCH .

a.

Loosen ground rod clamp and disconnect Grounding from ground rod .

Cable 42W3

GROUND CLAMP

CONTINUED

2-281

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-30 . 19

MARCH ORDER - Continued

-

Continued .

b.

Disconnect Grounding Cable 42W3 from semitrailer Connector 42J3.

42J3

42W3

ROADSIDE

ROADSIDE STOWAGE BOX

20

Y

C.

Remove upper section of ground rod .

d.

Stow ground rod and Grounding Cable 42W3 in LS roadside stowage box .

PREPARE TRACTOR FOR ROAD MARCH . One crewmember enter cab and turn on lights . One crewmember verify that

a.

all tractor and semitrailer lights work.

b.

Check semitrailer brake operation :

Before moving tractor, insure that AIR

(1 )

PRESS gage indicates at least 100

psi (690 kPa). (2)

Pull trailer hand brake control all the way back to ON position .

(3)

Push in tractor PARKING BRAKE control .

(4)

Driver move tractor and trailer forward while crewmember observes semitrailer wheels to verify brakes are locked .

(5)

2-282

Stop tractor and semitrailer .

C.

Verify that semitrailer to tractor coupling is secure .

d.

All crewmembers enter tractor cab and await march order.

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD

Personnel Required . Five Tools and Equipment Required . Guided Missile Transporter (GMT) Wrecker, M819 Plug , Shorting (4) ( 10252731 ) Socket, Deep 12- point , 3/4- In . , 1 /2-In . Drive Head , Ratchet, 1 /2- In . Drive Handle, Torque Wrench , 30-150 Foot- Pound Extension , 1 /2- In . Drive , 30- In . Long Test Set, Missile Round Cable (MRCTS)

Tape, Measuring , 100 - Foot Gloves, Work (1 Pair For Each Crewmember) (JJ -G -451-1-1B) Cable, Ground 27W1 ( 10253338) Taglines (2) ( 10252950)

Usually each canister removed from the launching station ( LS) is empty. Under certain conditions , live rounds

may be unloaded from_the_LS. When live

from the LS , the sling must be used in the LOADED be grounded when

it is

positioned

rounds are

removed

position , and the live round must

on the GMT. Warnings

regarding

sling

use are in

the procedure . These precautions must be strictly observed to prevent serious injury or possible death to crewmembers .

Canisters removed from the

LS may or may not be loaded onto the GMT.

Steps

for loading the canisters onto the GMT are included if required .

Crewmembers must be especially alert to prevent injury during bad weather and darkness. Anti -skid compound is on most working surfaces.

However, all surfaces must be

considered slippery when wet. All crewmembers must follow the safety rules listed below, U.S. Army directives, and standard operating procedures (SOP) as a minimum .

CONTINUED

T

2-283

TM 9-1440-600-10

33

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

Stand well clear of hoisted loads.

When climbing up or down ,

insure solid footing and solid handholds before

transferring body weight.

•

Keep hands,

arms ,

and feet clear of loads .

Be

extra careful when

guided

missile (GM) is lowered onto alining pins.

Do not leave tools and equipment unattended . When not in use , stow them.

Know the location

of all

crewmembers when

moving

loads.

When

working

together, do not leave a task without the other crewmember's knowledge . Check that the load certification date on all hoisting equipment (slings, etc.) has not expired .

Check that grounding cables are properly connected and that grounding hardware is clean.

Check that the torque tube

handle on

each

loaded

canister is

locked and

the quick release pin is installed before moving the GM . The missile is free to move in the canister unless it is locked .

Install grounds on all live GMs at the earliest opportunity.

•

Verify that the crane hook has a safety retainer in good operating condition .

Insure that all hoisting hooks and tag lines are firmly connected to the load.

CONTINUED)

2-284

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

Do not try to do two- person jobs alone . Get help .

•

Signals to the crane operator must be given by one designated crewmember. This crewmember must always be visible to the crane operator. If the crane operator loses sight of the signalling crewmember, crane motion must be immediately stopped .

Use

signals

per FM

21-60 . All

signals

must

be

clearly

understood by the crane operator and the crewmembers before starting the reload.

•

Handling

GMs

in

high

and

gusty wind

requires

extra

precautions .

Empty

canisters are more difficult to handle in wind than loaded ones. During windy conditions use more than one crewmember on each tag line . • Observe all warnings the equipment .

•

and

cautions

in the

procedure

and those

marked on

Make all actions sure and deliberate .

Wear work gloves and protective helmets .

Reload procedures are the same under daylight ,

nighttime , and blackout conditions .

Nighttime does not always mean blackout . When blackout conditions are in effect blackout flashlights must be used . At night when blackout conditions are not in effect any approved light may be used .

Operating signals between the signal person and the crane operator must be performed with lights .

Crewmembers other than the signal

person

must be careful to insure that

their lights do not interfere with the signals . The following general rules must be observed when reloading under blackout or nighttime conditions .

•

Read, understand , and comply with safety rules listed above .

Use signals per FM 21-60.

CONTINUED

2-285

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

Use flashlights to see with .

•

Do not move vehicles without a guide .

When light is limited , guides must be used to direct the driver to position the reload vehicles. General rules for guides are:

•

Inspect the paths the vehicles must follow for soft spots, shoulders, and obstructions .

Describe the approach to the driver.

•

The guide's position

is left-front of the vehicle ,

at a safe distance from the

vehicle, in sight of the driver. If visibility is bad use two guides , one in front and one by the side of the driver.

Do not lose eye contact with the driver. If eye contact is lost the driver must stop the vehicle .

Various vehicle positions may be used to reload . The positions shown in the following three figures have been found to be the best for level ground and sloping ground . The vehicle positions shown are typical . The GMT and wrecker may be positioned on either side of the LS. so ,

Site conditions

may force vehicle

extend the wrecker outriggers and

positioning the wrecker,

positions other than those shown . If

attach the GMT sling to the crane hook before

or verify that these actions can be performed after positioning .

Exhaust fumes from the wrecker engine can be annoying and possibly dangerous . Fume annoyance may be eased by parking the wrecker with the exhaust downwind from the LS and GMT if possible .

LS crewmembers must select and mark off vehicle positions best suited for the reload before the wrecker and GMT arrive . Mark the positions well . Appoint a guide or guides for the wrecker driver and refer to the general rules for guides listed above .

CONTINUED

2-286

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

GUIDED MISSILE TRANSPORTER

口

CANISTER CENTER OF BALANCE

WRECKER

B 9'

A 34'-35' NOTE 1

LAUNCHING STATION

C 9'

| LINE X

CANISTER CENTER OF BALANCE

DIMENSIONS (NOTE 1 ) CONDITION

A

B

LEVEL GROUND

APPROX 34-35 FEET

8-9 FEET WRECKER TIRE TO TRAILER SIDE

UP OR DOWN SLOPE

APPROX 34-35 FEET

CROSS SLOPE

APPROX 34-35 FEET

8-9 FEET LAUNCHER WRECKER TIRE-TO-TIRE

(NOTES 2 AND 3) ( NOTES 2 AND 3)

NOTES: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE FROM VEHICLE FRAMES AT APPROXIMATE CENTER LINE. 2. WRECKER AND GMT SHOULD BE POSITIONED DOWNHILL FROM LS WHEN ON A SLOPE IF POSSIBLE . 3. VEHICLE ON HIGH SIDE SHOULD BE 7-8 FEET FROM WRECKER . VEHICLE ON LOW SIDE SHOULD BE 9-10 FEET FROM WRECKER . CONTINUED

2-287

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

G

WRECKER

LAUNCHING STATION

1. OBSERVE FOLLOWING WHEN PLACING EMPTY CANISTERS ON GROUND : A. EXTEND WRECKER BOOM TO MAXIMUM LENGTH TO GET CANISTERS OUT OF WAY. B. PLACE CANISTERS OUT OF PATH LIVE GM'S WILL TRAVEL BETWEEN GMT AND LS. 2. IF POSSIBLE , DO NOT MOVE LIVE GM'S OVER EMPTY CANISTERS ON GROUND .

GUIDED MISSILE TRANSPORTER

CONTINUED

2-288

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

WRECKER LAUNCHING STATION

TWO-STACK OFFLOAD

GUIDED MISSILE TRANSPORTER

1. OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN PLACING EMPTY TWO-STACK ON THE GROUND : A. MAKE SURE WHEN SETTING A TWO-STACK ON A SLOPE THAT IT POINTS IN AN UPHILL/DOWNHILL DIRECTION. B. EXTEND WRECKER BOOM TO MAXIMUM LENGTH TO GET CANISTERS OUT OF THE WAY. C. PLACE CANISTERS OUT OF PATH THAT LIVE GM'S WILL TRAVEL BETWEEN GMT AND LS. 2. IF POSSIBLE , DO NOT MOVE LIVE GM'S OVER EMPTY CANISTERS ON THE GROUND.

CONTINUED

2-289

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

GENERATOR SET A6

MISSILE ROUND CABLE TEST SET A8

DATA LINK TERMINAL MODULE A2

LAUNCHER MECHANICS

CURBSIDE

LAUNCHER MISSILE ROUND DISTRIBUTOR A3

GUIDED MISSILE (ONE OF FOUR)

DATA LINK MAST ASSEMBLY

ROADSIDE

LAUNCHER ELECTRONICS MODULE A1 ENGAGEMENT CONTROL HANDLE

CONTINUED

2-290

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

The LS must be emplaced , outriggers extended , and the LS leveled to reload . Electrical power is not required after the platform is lowered until the MRCTS is used , unless the data link terminal ( DLT) clock has to remain synchronized .

DO NOT RELOAD GUIDED MISSILES DURING ELECTRICAL

WARNING

STORMS. DEATH MAY RESULT FROM LIGHTNING STRIKES.

MISSILES

DROPPED ACCIDENTLY

MAY

BE

DANGEROUS .

REPORT ANY DROP OF 12 INCHES OR MORE IMMEDIATELY AND PROCEED AS FOLLOWS. •

IF MISSILE IS STILL IN CANISTER, CONSIDER MISSILE TO BE UNARMED . DO NOT MOVE MISSILE FOR 1 HOUR AFTER INCIDENT. AFTER 1 HOUR, UNIT COMMANDER MAY DIRECT MISSILE TO BE RE-

WARNING

MOVED TO DEPOT. •

IF

MISSILE IS

PARTLY

OR

COMPLETELY OUT OF

CANISTER , CONSIDER MISSILE TO BE ARMED . TELL YOUR UNIT COMMANDER AND LEAVE AREA. DEATH MAY RESULT FROM EXPLOSION .

MISSILE WARNING

MISFIRE

MAY RELEASE

EXPLOSIVE

HYDROGEN

GAS INTO CANISTER . AFTER A MISFIRE , DO NOT GO NEAR CANISTER FOR 1 HOUR . DEATH MAY RESULT.

MISSILE

MISFIRE

MAY RELEASE CORROSIVE

POTASSIUM

HYDROXIDE FROM BATTERIES INTO CANISTER . THIS LIQ-

WARNING

UID CAN BURN YOU . HANDLE CANISTERS WITH CARE .

CONTINUED

2-291

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

STAY CLEAR OF LAUNCHER MECHANICS PLANE OF ROTATION UNTIL IS SET TO

KEYSWITCH ON LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14 LOCAL, LOCAL LIGHT IS ON, AND KEY IS RE-

MOVED. WHEN KEYSWITCH IS SET TO RMT, TURNTABLE CAN BE ROTATED REMOTELY CAUSING INJURY TO PER-

WARNING

SONNEL WITHIN PLANE OF ROTATION.

A DAMAGED CANISTER CAN INDICATE AN UNUSABLE MISSILE . REPORT ANY CANISTER DAMAGE IMMEDIATELY. UNIT COMMANDER WILL DECIDE IF MISSILE IS TO BE REPLACED OR USED. CAUTION

DO NOT MOVE GM WITHIN 50 FEET OF AN

RF SOURCE

THAT RADIATES 50 WATTS OR MORE .

CAUTION

LS crewmembers GMT arrive .

NOTE

1

perform steps

1

thru 4 before wrecker and

PREPARE LS FOR RELOAD .

a.

All crewmembers read and understand the above .

b.

general

information

Open Launcher Electronics Module

( LEM ) A1

doors .

If wind is

over 45 knots , insert locking pin in hole at top of door.

CONTINUED

2-292

TM 9-1440-600-10

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

On LCU Display Panel A1A14 , select local mode.

Set LOCAL - RMT switch to LOCAL.

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT

LAUNCHERLOCAL

0

Remove key from LOCAL - RMT switch .

PLATFORM

POWER SUPPLIES O O VDIC VDC MISSILE UPPERL UPPERA HAZARD 0000

о

(3)

Verify that LOCAL light comes on .

O

BITE (2)

O

(1 )

READY 0 | 0 |0 | 0 LOHR PLATFORM RAISED AZMUTH READY READY OOO DISCON NECTED 이이 이이

O

RAIST

STOP

O

101

LAUNCHING STA

O

C.

Continued

CONNECT CONNECT OOOO EPSC ODO O

START Ο

O

1

FIRINGPLATOON

LO

CA

L O

O

NORMALLAMPS PANEL LAN BITE TEST STATUS DIM OFF STATUS LAMPTEST

O

2-31 .

RM

O

T

GM IS FREE TO MOVE IN CANISTER IF TORQUE TUBE HANDLE IS NOT PROPERLY LOCKED . SUDDEN STOPS ON ROAD MARCH COULD CAUSE MISSILE TO PENETRATE TRACTOR WARNING CAB, RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

1.

Omit step d if there are no live GMs on LS.

2.

Lock GMs

NOTES in following order:

Upper Right

( UR) ,

Lower Right

(LR) , Upper Left ( UL) , Lower Left ( LL) .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-293

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

— 1

Continued .

d.

Lock GM torque tube handle on each live canister on LS.

Have a crewmember at LCU Display Panel A1A14 observe MISSILE READYlights while GM torque tube handles are being locked .

NOTE

(1 )

Remove quick release torque tube handle .

(2)

Pull out and hold spring - loaded plunger while

rotating

pin by

torque

tube handle cw to LOCK position . (3)

Release

plunger .

Check that

plunger seats in left detent hole to secure torque tube handle .

DESSICANT HOLDER

RECORDSH (4)

Check that no red paint shows

J2

to left of torque tube handle .

LOCK

OCK

UNL

DO NOT LATCH OR UNLATCH UNLESS GM ELEVATED

PULL

(5)

VALVE RELIEF PUSHTO RELEASE PRESSURE O о

Insert quick- release pin in hole to right of torque tube handle .

O DESSICANT HOLDER

RECORDS

J2

(6)

Check with

UNLOCK

DO NOT LATCH OR UNLATCH UNLESS GM ELEVATED

RELIEF VALVE PUSHTO RELEASE PRESSURE

crewmember at

LCU Display Panel A1A14 that MISSILE READY light at correct GM position went out.

CONTINUED

2-294

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

Continued .

1

(7)

Repeat steps ( 1 ) thru (6) for each remaining live GM on LS.

VERIFY THAT AREA IS CLEAR BEFORE ROTATING TURNTABLE AND LOWERING PLATFORM . INJURY OR DEATH CAN WARNING RESULT IF STRUCK BY MOVING MASS.

e.

If it is not already in

180° position ,

electrically rotate launcher mechanics to

180° position per para 2-22.

VERIFY THAT GUARD RAIL IS GENERATOR

SET BEFORE

NOT INSTALLED

LOWERING

AROUND

LAUNCHER

PLAT-

FORM OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT. CAUTION

f.

If it is not already lowered to steadyrest position ,

electrically lower launcher

platform to steadyrest per para 2-20.

CURBSIDE CONTINUED

Change 1

2-295

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

1

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

Continued .

If

g.

electrical

power

is

required

and

Generator Set A6 is to be shut down ,

power-down the LS per para 2-11 . If electrical power is not required , deenergize LEM A1 per para 2-15 , Data Link Terminal Module ( DLTM) A2 per para 2-16, and Generator Set A6 per para 2-17.

2

STOW DATA LINK MAST ASSEMBLY.

Two crewmembers are needed to perform this procedure ,

NOTE

a.

on roadside work platform by Generator Set A6, front roadside outrigger.

one

and one on

Remove dust cap from dummy connector on flange of Upper Mast A7A12.

paint shor LOWER MAST

HUORA UPPER MAST

ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

2-296

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

LOWER MAST2

b.

Continued . UPPER MAST Disconnect

Cable

A7A12W1P2 from

Connector RF Adapter

A7A11J1 .

LOWER MAST

C.

UPPER MAST

Connect Cable

A7A12W1P2 to

dummy connector on flange of Upper Mast A7A12.

d.

Install dust cap on A7A11J1 .

RF Adapter

LOWER MAST SPRING CLIP e.

Disconnect

Ground

Cable

A7A12W2 from Ground Connector

UPPER MAST

A7A11J2 .

f.

Stow Ground Cable A7A12W2 in spring clip on upper mast flange .

CONTINUED

T

2-297

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

2

g.

Continued .

Both crewmembers together slide Upper Mast Assembly A7A12 out of Lower Mast A7A11 .

LOWER MAST

UPPER MAST

h.

Rest upper mast in front cradle. Crewmember on work platform hold

upper

mast

Crewmember on

in

place .

outrigger climb

to work platform over wheels .

ROADSIDE

i.

Release two hood latches and open front and rear cradle clamps .

CONTINUED

2-298

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

-

Continued .

2

Both crewmembers together move upper mast to stow position . mast in cradle clamps.

j.

Place upper

CLAMP

UPPER MAST

HOOD LATCH

CRADLE LOWER MAST

ROADSIDE

k.

Close clamps on front and cradles

and

secure with

rear hood

latches .

NOTE

Two crewmembers working from rear LS work platform disconnect LS cables from all four canisters using step below.

3

DISCONNECT GM CABLES .

SHORTING PLUG MUST BE CONNECTED TO EACH LIVE GM AT 4A1J1 IMMEDIATELY AFTER CABLE CONNECTOR IS DIS-

WARNING

CONNECTED . OTHERWISE STATIC CHARGES MAY EXPLODE ORDNANCE DEVICES, RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

CONTINUED

2-299

TM 9-1440-600-10

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued 2-31 .

3

Continued.

If GMs are live , get shorting plugs from dummy connectors on launcher me-

a. chanics (LM ) .

UR DUMMY CONNECTOR FARSIDE

LR DUMMY CONNECTOR

UL DUMMY, CONNECTOR

ROADSIDE

LL DUMMY CONNECTOR

Disconnect cables from canisters.

b. If GM is live, install shorting plug on 4A1J1 of each canister. CONNECTOR

CABLE

A5W1P1 - UL

(2)

UL J1

23W2P2

(1 )

UL J2 UL J3

A5W20P1

A5W2P1 - LL

(2)

LL J1

23W2P3

(1 )

LL J2 LL J3

A5W3P1 - UL

UR J1

23W3P2

UR J2

A5W22P1

UR J3

23

A5W21P1

-2 A5W4P1 - LR

(2)

LR J1

23W3P3

(1 )

LR J2

A5W23P1

(3)

LR J3

TYPICAL 4 PLACES

CONTINUED

2-300

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

Continued .

3

NOTE

Perform step c for upper canisters only.

C.

Loosen hand

knob and

remove

clamp assembly that secures upper canister canister.

cables to

lower

TYPICAL 2 PLACES

d.

Connect large GM signal cable to large dummy connector at applicable position .

D

grung

UR DUMMY CONNECTOR FARSIDE

LR DUMMY CONNECTOR

UL DUMMY CONNECTOR

ROADSIDE LL DUMMY CONNECTOR CONTINUED

2-301

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

3

e.

Continued

Connect canister heater cable to small dummy connector at applicable position .

f.

Install dust cover on ground cable . Stow cable in spring clip at applicable position .

1.

All measurements are from edge of LS frame . Do not measure from overhanging platforms .

NOTES 2.

Make all measurements three times, once from each end of LS and once at about the center. Join these three points to establish location lines.

CONTINUED

2-302

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

4

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued PLACE VEHICLE MARKERS .

a.

Measure location for GMT 34 to 35 feet ( 10.36 to

10.67 meters) from

LS

baseline . b.

Place markers on measured line to mark far side of GMT.

BASELINE

LAUNCHING STATION

GMT LOCATION LINE 34-35 FT (10.36-10.67M)

34-35 FT (10.36-10.67M)

CONTINUED

2-303

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

4

C.

Continued .

Measure location for wrecker as described below. Level ground - 8 to 9 feet (2.43 to 2.74 meters) from LS baseline. •

LS uphill from wrecker - 7 to 8 feet (2.13 to 2.45 meters) from LS baseline .

•

LS downhill from wrecker - 9 to 10 feet (2.74 to 3.05 meters) from LS baseline .

d.

Place markers on measured line to mark near side of wrecker.

BASELINE

WRECKER LOCATION LINE

LAUNCHING STATION

CONTINUED

2-304

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

1.

NOTES

erator. Other crewmember observe vehicle position and signal first commander. 2.

5

Two crewmembers assist wrecker operator to position GMT. One crewmember stay at roadside corner of wrecker and signal op-

Driver take signals from crewmember at corner of wrecker only.

POSITION GMT.

a.

Guide wrecker with GMT to marked GMT location .

Far side of GMT must

be on GMT location line . Aline GMT CANISTER CENTER OF BALANCE with LS CANISTER CENTER OF BALANCE . Stop wrecker when GMT is on markers and canister center lines are alined .

GMT LOCATION LINE GUIDED MISSILE TRANSPORTER

CANISTER CENTER OF BALANCE

CANISTER CENTER OF BALANCE

LAUNCHING STATION LS BASELINE

CONTINUED

2-305

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

5

b.

Continued .

Wrecker operator set wrecker parking brake , set air brake hand control lever to applied position , and place transmission in neutral . Stay in cab and keep engine running.

C.

Check with wrecker crew to verify that live GMs for reload are safe and serviceable per TM 9-1410-600-14.

d.

Remove chock blocks from GMT stowage and chock GMT wheels.

CHOCK (EACH SIDE)

STOWAGE BOX

CURBSIDE

e.

When wheels are chocked , wrecker operator leave cab.

f.

Remove the two tag lines from GMT curbside vehicle stowage box and place them on GMT gooseneck.

CONTINUED

2-306

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

6

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

LOWER GMT LANDING LEGS.

a.

Unhook travel chain from GMT landing legs if applicable.

b.

Remove landing leg handcrank from retaining clip on curbside of GMT.

C.

Pull out handcrank until it locks in place.

O CURBSIDE

ROTATED 90°

d.

Using handcrank, lower leg until shoe sits firmly on ground .

CURBSIDE

‫م‬ STOWAGE BOX

FIFTH WHEEL

CONTINUED

2-307

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

6

Continued .

e.

Continue to lower landing fifth wheel .

f.

Push handcrank back into retracted position and secure in retaining clip .

g.

Clear area around wrecker- GMT coupling .

legs until weightis slightly relieved from wrecker

WRECKER AIR BRAKE HAND CONTROL LEVER IN APPLIED POSITION BEFORE

Le

MUST BE

UNCOUPLING AIR BRAKE

LINES. OTHERWISE , GMT BRAKES WILL BE RELEASED WHEN AIR LINES ARE DISCONNECTED. INJURY OR DEATH

WARNING

MAY RESULT.

7

DISCONNECT GMT FROM WRECKER .

a.

Disconnect over-the- road trical cable from dust cover

and

elec-

GMT by raising pulling

cable

straight out from connector. b.

Disconnect over-the- road cable from wrecker and stow in wrecker roadside stowage box .

O CURBSIDE

2-308

CONTINUED

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

7

C.

Continued .

Close shutoff valves on both air lines at rear of wrecker.

STOWAGE BRACKET

AIR LINE SHUT OFF VALVE

AIR HOSE

TYPICAL 2 PLACES CURBSIDE

d.

Disconnect SERVICE air line and EMERGENCY air line from GMT

EMERGENCY AIR LINE

glad hands connectors.

SERVICE AIR LINE

e.

Coil and secure both air lines on stowage brackets on wrecker.

CONTINUED

2-309

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

7

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued —

f.

Continued .

Swing fifth wheel locking plunger safety latch aside.

SAFETY LATCH

LOCK PLUNGER LEVER

g.

Move fifth wheel locking plunger lever forward to open jaws and release GMT kingpin .

h.

Clear area around GMT-wrecker coupling .

i.

Have wrecker operator slowly drive wrecker forward wrecker approach ramps.

зряза

until

GMT is

clear of

GMT APPROACH RAMP WRECKER

200

OO CURBSIDE

CONTINUED

2-310

TM 9-1440-600-10

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD 8

— Continued

PREPARE WRECKER FOR RELOAD .

a.

Guide wrecker to position on location line marked above .

Vehicle frame on

side nearest LS must be on location line . Stop wrecker when center of crane cab is alined with LS and GMT CANISTER CENTER OF BALANCE.

Jaoq be WRECKER

GUIDED MISSILE TRANSPORTER

E

2-31 .

CANISTER CENTER OF BALANCE

LAUNCHING STATION

b.

CANISTER CENTER OF BALANCE

WRECKER LOCATION LINE

Wrecker operator set parking brake and set controls in wrecker cab to operate crane .

CONTINUED

2-311

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued ―

8

C.

Continued .

Remove the two outrigger bases , one on each side of equipment box :

handle from

(1 )

Unscrew clamp threaded post.

(2)

Remove clamp bar from threaded post .

(3)

Lift base straight up off threaded post .

CLAMP HANDLE CLAMP BAR THREADED POST

CURBSIDE

CONTINUED

2-312

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

8

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

Continued.

d.

Attach one base to curbside and one to roadside rear outrigger leg.

(1 )

Remove retaining clip and retaining pin from base.

(2)

Pull L-shaped pin from side of storage tube .

30:28 . บว STOWAGE TUBE

MENU

BASE

AO RETAINING23 ИМИЯАМ MLPINE THEVER

RETAINING CLIP woled

OT 2830DIRTUO

int

get2 mohs 209ta

LEG CURBSIDE

L-SHAPED PIN

(3)

Pull outrigger leg out of storage tube , just far enough to aline hole in leg with holes in base.

(4)

Use retaining pin and clip to secure base to leg .

CONTINUED

2-313

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued —

8

e.

Continued .

On

curbside

move

and

L-shaped

securing front

roadside , retaining

repin

outrigger leg in

storage tube.

109

(S)

CURBSIDE

WEAR WORK GLOVES AND BE CAREFUL WHEN LOWERING

WARNING OUTRIGGERS TO PREVENT INJURY TO HANDS.

Perform steps f thru j below for each of the four wrecker out-

NOTE

f.

riggers. Lower forward outriggers first.

Pull outrigger leg from storage tube until outrigger frame hits

stop , then lower outrigger base.

g.

Aline pin holes and install L-shaped retaining pin to secure outrigger in extended position .

CONTINUED

2-314

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE FROAD - Continued

8

Continued .

h.

Grasp outrigger leg and rotate it to lower outrigger

base .

Stop

when base just touches ground .

RETAINING PIN

i.

Install outrigger handle in one of the holes in screw collar at top of outrigger leg . Use handle to turn screw out until base presses slightly against ground .

j.

Check that outrigger leg is vertical .

k.

Repeat steps f through j until all four outriggers are in place .

I.

When all outriggers are lowered , wrecker operator must verify that:

(1 )

All outriggers put pressure against ground .

(2)

Retaining pins are installed on all outriggers .

(3)

On sloped terrain , wrecker is not leaning toward downhill side .

CONTINUED

2-315

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

9

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

GROUND GMT TO LS.

a.

Remove Ground Cable 27W1 from GMT curbside vehicle stowage box .

b.

Connect one end of Ground Cable 27W1 to GMT grounding connector at rear of adapter platform . Turn clockwise to lock.

OMMATER 19

STOWAGE CURBSIDE

C.

Connect other end of GMT Ground

Cable 27W1

to

LS Ground

Connector

42J4. Turn cable connector clockwise to lock.

1800

2 ye

90sign 918 219ppintuo nuot its litnu 16dt vlnev taur hotshego

point Lage

42J49A ி

exostw ,benewal 81s 2190 ச

y

06 910229phtu www rob

ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

2-316

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

10

PREPARE CRANE HOOK AND BOOM .

CRANE

OPERATOR

MUST RECEIVE

SIGNALS FROM

ONE

DESIGNATED CREWMEMBER ONLY. SIGNAL PERSON MUST WARNING

BE VISIBLE TO CRANE OPERATOR AT ALL TIMES. WRONG SIGNALS MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH .

At night use lights to signal crane operator.

Refer to FM 21-60

for visual signals guidance. NOTE

a.

Have crane operator take position in crane cab . Have designated crewmember in position to give signals to crane operator.

b.

Remove crane pivot-post lockpin.

30

xem of mood boxe of hotshego eneo lengia Samosas brie

oral

planetxe mood gosig seint evome

Rem 0

HOOK

SHIPPER LOCKPIN

1001 C.

Signal crane operator to unwind enough cable to allow hook to be removed from

eye

on

side

of

shipper.

CONTINUED

2-317

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

10

Continued .

HOOK IS HEAVY. EXERCISE CARE . INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF HOOK FALLS .

WARNING

d.

Remove hook from eye on side of shipper.

e.

Walk hook to end of wrecker and lower it slowly to end of cable.

f.

Remove clips from two boom extension retaining pins . Pull retaining pins from boom.

BOOM CLIPS

RETAINING PINS O.O ROADSIDE

g. h.

Signal crane operator to extend boom to maximum length . Remove three piece boom extension pushout rod from stowage and assemble rod .

1200 30810 oldso di

nicht bev OO ROADSIDE

CONTINUED

2-318

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

10

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

i.

Continued.

Hold pushout rod between V-shaped brackets at end of shipper and at end of boom extension .

BOOM EXTENSION

BOOM CLIPS

RETAINING PINS

O ROADSIDE

SHIPPER

j.

PUSHOUT ROD

Signal crane operator to slowly retract boom so that boom extension is slowly forced out of boom . Stop retracting boom when retaining pin holes in boom and boom extension are alined.

k.

Insert the two retaining pins to lock extension and boom together. Place clips on retaining pins.

I.

Remove pushout rod from boom assembly . Disassemble and stow rod.

CONTINUED

2-319

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

11

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

PREPARE CANISTER SLING .

a.

Install GMT ladder as follows:

(1 )

Remove two quick release pins securing ladder in stowage position .

CURBSIDE

PIN

PIN

OMAT

AOR

BRACKET

(2)

LADDER

Slide ladder from stowage position under canister.

(3)

Position ladder on roadside of GMT and engage ladder hooks

vidmezes mood mont bin GMT support slots .

CONTINUED

2-320

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 . 11

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

Continued .

WHEN HANDLING AN EMPTY SLING , SLING HOISTING SHACKLE MUST BE IN EMPTY POSITION . OTHERWISE

La

SLING

WILL TILT AND

MAY

INJURE

NEARBY

CREW-

WARNING MEMBERS .

b.

Check that load certification date on canister sling has not expired .

C.

Check that hoisting shackle on canister sling is in

EMPTY position . To change

position , proceed as follows:

pin

from

hoisting

(1 )

Unscrew shackle .

(2)

Aline holes in shackle with hole marked EMPTY.

(3)

Install pin to secure shackle to

Дина -

RATED LOAD 7500 LBS EMPTY

LOADED

sling .

DAT 3M

HтO у @

0знOTAW

отпор

BRA

CUM О СВИРАНИ ЦВИЯА С

O 8 of op

bemoheo

ALINEMENT PIN

ebic pawollo!

LOCKING PIN d.

Signal

crane

operator to

move

hook over canister sling on GMT. Connect crane hook to canister

TYPICAL 2 PLACES

sling . e.

Remove the two locking pins that CONTINUED

secure canister sling to GMT.

2-321

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

11

2-322

Continued .

LINES TIGHT AT ALL TIMES WHEN MOVING LOAD. KEEP EXCESS LINE UNDER CONTROL TO PREVENT

KEEP TAG Le TRIPPING

WARNING

f.

OR

CATCHING

TAG

LINE

ON

OBSTACLES .

SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT IF TAG LINES AND SUSPENDED LOAD ARE NOT CLOSELY CONTROLLED .

Attach one tag line to shackle at each end of canister sling .

SLING

TAG LINE

Le

CREWMEMBERS

ON

CREWMEMBERS

AND WARNED OF

LS

MUST

BE WATCHED UNSAFE

BY OTHER

CONDITIONS

WARNING TO PREVENT INJURY.

1.

If the two-stack offload option 14.

2.

On level ground offload canisters in following order :

NOTES

•

is to be performed ,

go to step

Upper canister nearest wrecker. Other upper canister. Lower canister nearest wrecker. Other lower canister.

CONTINUED

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

— 11

Continued .

3.

On sloped ground offload canisters in following order: •

Upper canister on downslope side.

Remaining upper canister.

4.

Lower canister on downslope side .

•

Remaining lower canister.

At night one crewmember hold light for crewmember performing task .

PREPARE LS CANISTERS FOR SINGLE CANISTER OFFLOAD .

If any live GMs are to be offloaded , check that :

(1 )

Torque tube handle is in LOCK о O DESSICANT HOLDER

position. (2)

No red paint shows to left of torque tube handle .

NOTE

о RECORDS

J2

DONOT LATCH OR UNLATCH UNLESS GM ELEVATED

UNLOCK

(3)

Quick- release pin is installed on right side of torque tube handle .

CK

a.

LO

12

•

RELIEF VALVE PUSH TO RELEASE PRESSURE O

Deep well socket goes over nut and fits on driver beneath the nut.

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-323

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

12

b.

Continued .

Using 1 /2 - inch drive ratchet head, 30-150 foot- pound torque wrench handle , 30-inch extension , and 3/4-inch deep well tiedown bolts on canister to be offloaded .

19tainso

swol pninisme

socket,

loosen the

four canister

. TIEDOWN

moheq nadmerwero noi tripil blot hedmamweia eno tripin

BOLT

2112 803 283т2MQUÍCK RELEASE PIN TYPICAL 4 PLACES edut euphoT

( †)

noitieoq

TIEDOWN BOLT

9 - biu

(S)

re bi aar or tobi eg By OTHE

edur suprot

QUICK RELEASE PIN TYPICAL 4 PLACES

C.

Remove quick release pin , rotate tiedown bolt to raised position , and install quick- release pin .

STAY CLEAR OF BOOM AND SLING WHEN THEY ARE IN WARNING

MOTION. TO PREVENT INJURY, DO NOT GET YOUR HANDS CAUGHT BETWEEN SLING AND CANISTER .

CONTINUED

2-324

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

12

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

-

d.

Continued.

Signal crane operator to move sling over canister. Guide sling to top center of canister with hoist hooks on sling alined with hoisting rings on canister.

CANISTER SLING

ANCHOR SHACKLE (4 PLACES)

HOIST HOOK (4 PLACES) HOISTING RING (4 PLACES)

3

FORWARD

e.

With crane supporting weight of sling ,

connect four sling hoist hooks to four

canister hoisting rings . Verify that sling anchor shackles and hoist hooks, and canister hoisting rings are not kinked or twisted .

CONTINUED

2-325

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

12

Continued.

HANDLING EMPTY CANISTER , SLING HOISTING SHACKLE MUST BE IN EMPTY POSITION. WHEN HANDLING

WHEN Ave

WARNING

CANISTER CONTAINING EITHER A GM OR BALLAST, SLING HOISTING SHACKLE MUST BE IN LOADED POSITION . OTHERWISE SLING WILL TILT AND MAY INJURE NEARBY CREWMEMBERS .

f.

Verify that sling hoisting shackle is in correct position for canister to be moved : EMPTY for empty canister or LOADED for canister with GM installed . If necessary, change shackle position as follows:

(1 )

Signal crane operator to lower sling gently onto canister.

(2)

Unscrew pin from hoisting shackle .

(3)

Aline holes in shackle with hole at correct position .

(4)

Install pin to secure shackle to sling.

O

RATED LOAD 7500 LBS LOADED

EMPTY

10121060 or retainso FORWARD HEN

THEY ARE

AT YOUR HAN

TRIED

2-326

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

12

Continued .

KEEP TAG LINES TIGHT AT ALL TIMES WHEN MOVING SUSLe

WARNING

PENDED LOAD. KEEP EXCESS LINE UNDER CONTROL TO PREVENT

TRIPPING

OR

CATCHING

TAG

LINES

ON

OBSTACLES. SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT IF TAG LINES AND SUSPENDED LOAD ARE NOT CLOSELY CONTROLLED .

g.

Remove two tag

lines from

sling

and

connect to canister: one tag

line to

front bottom anchor shackle and other tag line to rear bottom anchor shackle .

TAG LINES

13

OFFLOAD CANISTERS FROM LS ONE - BY-ONE .

FJ

DO NOT STAND UNDER OR IN PATH OF HOISTED LOAD.

WARNING

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF STRUCK BY MOVING LOAD .

་

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-327

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

13

Continued .

a.

Verify that tag lines are tended and all crewmembers are clear of canister to be moved.

b.

Signal crane

operator to take

a strain

on

load , then

slowly

raise

canister

about 6 inches so that it clears alinement pins and canister or LM beneath it.

6 INCHES

CURBSIDE

c.

Verify that tag lines and hoist hooks are securely attached to load .

CONTINUED

2-328

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD – Continued

13

d.

Continued .

Verify that pathway to area where offloaded canisters will be placed is clear.

WRECKER

GUIDED MISSILE TRANSPORTER

点

LAUNCHING STATION

TYPICAL

CONTINUED

2-329

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

13

Continued.

DO NOT STACK OFFLOADED CANISTERS ON TOP OF EACH OTHER .

CAUTION

NOTE

e.

Place offloaded canisters out of path that live from GMT to LS.

Signal crane operator to raise canister and

GMs will travel

move it slowly to area selected

for offloaded canisters . Keep pressure on tag lines for positive control of load .

f.

Signal crane operator to lower canister carefully to ground .

g.

Signal crane operator to lower sling to relieve load.

h.

With crane supporting

sling

weight,

disconnect four sling

hoist hooks from

four canister hoisting rings.

CANISTER SLING

HOIST HOOK (4 PLACES) HOISTING RING (4 PLACES)

FORWARD

CONTINUED

2-330

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

13

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

i.

Continued .

Lower hoisting rings flat against canister.

Le

WHEN HANDLING AN EMPTY SLING , SLING HOISTING SHACKLE MUST BE IN EMPTY POSITION OTHERWISE SLING

WARNING WILL TILT AND MAY INJURE NEARBY CREWMEMBERS .

H

j.

Check that hoisting shackle on sling is in EMPTY position . If necessary change shackle position as follows:

(1 )

Signal crane operator to lower sling gently onto canister. HOISTING SHACKLE

(2)

Unscrew shackle .

pin

from

hoisting

PIN RATED LOAD 7500 LBS EMPTY

(3)

Aline holes in shackle with hole marked EMPTY.

(4)

Install pin to secure shackle to sling .

LOADED

k.

Remove tag lines from canister. Attach one tag line to shackle at each end of sling .

1.

Repeat steps 12 and 13 for each canister remaining on LS , then go to step 16.

CONTINUED

2-331

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

Le

WARNING

BOTH CANISTERS MUST BE EMPTY TO LIFT A TWO-STACK. HOISTING

EQUIPMENT AND

CANISTER

TIEDOWNS

WILL

NOT STAND THE WEIGHT IF ONE CANISTER IS LOADED.

14

PREPARE LS CANISTERS FOR TWO-STACK OFFLOAD.

a.

Verify that all canisters on the LS are empty . Canisters must not contain GMs or ballast (weight to represent a GM) .

Le WARNING

b.

CREWMEMBERS

ON

LS

MUST BE WATCHED

BY OTHER

CREWMEMBERS AND WARNED OF UNSAFE CONDITIONS.

Using a 1 /2-inch drive ratchet head , a 30-150 foot- pound torque wrench handle , a 30- inch extension , and a 3/4- inch deep socket , check torque on both upper canister tiedown bolts as follows.

E

கு

கு

UPPER TIEDOWN BOLT TYPICAL 8 PLACES

.81

CONTINUED

2-332

TM 9-1440-600-10

-

Continued .

Set the torque wrench handle micrometer for 60 foot- pounds of torque .

(2)

Climb

6

(1 )

up on

12 1

14

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

NDS POU T FO- O

2-31 .

upper canisters .

Tighten the four upper (two on each canister) inside tiedown bolts until the torque wrench handle clicks off at 60 footpounds .

(3)

Climb down from the top. Tighten the four upper (two on each canister) outside tiedown bolts until the torque wrench clicks off at 60 foot- pounds.

Le

STAY CLEAR OF BOOM AND SLING WHEN THEY ARE IN MOTION. TO PREVENT INJURY, DO NOT GET YOUR HANDS

WARNING CAUGHT BETWEEN SLING AND CANISTER .

NOTE

Offload two-stack nearest wrecker first.

CONTINUED

2-333

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

-

14

C.

Continued .

Signal crane operator to move sling over upper canister of two-stack .

(The

two-stack nearest the wrecker first. ) Guide sling to top center of canister with hoist hooks on sling alined with hoisting rings on canister.

CANISTER

SLING

ANCHOR SHACKLE (4 PLACES)

HOIST HOOK (4 PLACES)

HOISTING RING (4 PLACES)

FORWARD

d.

With crane supporting weight of sling , connect four sling hoist hooks to four canister hoisting rings . Verify that sling anchor shackles and hoist hooks , and canister hoisting rings are not kinked or twisted .

CONTE NUED

2-334

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

14

Continued.

WHEN HANDLING Le

WARNING

SHACKLE SLING

MUST

WILL

EMPTY CANISTER , BE IN

TILT

AND

EMPTY MAY

SLING

POSITION .

INJURE

HOISTING

OTHERWISE

NEARBY

CREW-

MEMBERS.

e.

Verify that hoisting shackle on canister sling is in EMPTY position . To change position , proceed as follows.

(1 )

Unscrew shackle .

(2)

Aline holes in shackle with hole marked EMPTY.

(3)

pin

from

hoisting

RATED LOAD 7500 LBS

LOADED

EMPTY

Install pin to secure shackle to sling .

KEEP TAG LINES TIGHT AT ALL TIMES WHEN MOVING SUSLe WARNING

PENDED LOAD. KEEP EXCESS LINE UNDER CONTROL TO PREVENT

TRIPPING

OR

CATCHING

TAG

LINES

ON

OBSTACLES. SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT IF TAG LINES AND SUSPENDED LOAD ARE NOT CLOSELY CONTROLLED .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-335

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

14

f.

Continued .

Remove two tag

lines from

sling

and connect to canister:

one tag line to

front bottom anchor shackle and other tag line to rear bottom anchor shackle .

TAG LINES

CONTINUED

2-336

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

14

g.

Continued.

Using a 1 /2- inch drive ratchet head , a 30-150 foot- pound torque wrench handle , a 30- inch extension ,

and a 3/4-inch deep socket, loosen the lower tiedown

bolt on two-stack that has sling attached .

LOWER TIEDOWN BOLT TYPICAL 4 PLACES

ROADSIDE

h.

Remove quick- release pin , rotate tiedown

bolt to

raised

position ,

and install quick- release pin . i.

Climb up on upper canister between canisters on same end . Using

same tools ,

loosen lower

inside tiedown bolt.

j.

Secure inside tiedown bolt to raised position as in step h .

k.

Move to opposite end , bolts in raised position .

loosen inside and outside tiedown bolts and secure

CONTINUED

2-337

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

Le

DO NOT STAND UNDER OR IN PATH OF HOISTED LOAD. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF STRUCK BY

WARNINGS

MOVING LOAD .

⚫USE

EXTREME

HIGH

OR

CARE WHEN

GUSTY

WIND .

HANDLING

USE

TWO

TWO-STACKS IN

PEOPLE

ON

EACH

TAGLINE WHEN WIND IN HIGH OR GUSTY.

• KEEP TAG LINES TIGHT AT ALL TIMES WHEN MOVING SUSPENDED LOAD. KEEP EXCESS LINE UNDER CONTROL TO PREVENT

TRIPPING

OR

CATCHING

TAG

LINE

ON

OBSTACLES. SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT IF TAG LINES AND SUSPENDED LOAD ARE NOT CLOSELY CONTROLLED.

15

OFFLOAD TWO- STACK FROM LS.

a.

Tend both tag lines . Clear crewmembers from two-stack .

b.

Signal crane operator to take a strain on load , then slowly raise stack about 6 inches so that it clears LS alinement pins .

albiuin evomeЯ of glod biop

6 INCHES

69

nwobail slani bns

no Qudmilo

CURBSIDE

nobell ebieni etupe2 5

C.

Verify that tag lines and hoist hooks are securely attached to load .

CONTINUED

2-338

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

15

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

-

d.

Continued .

Verify that pathway to area where offloaded two-stack will be placed is clear.

WRECKER LAUNCHING STATION

TWO-STACK OFFLOAD

1. OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN PLACING EMPTY TWO-STACK ON THE GROUND : A. MAKE SURE WHEN SETTING A TWO-STACK ON A SLOPE THAT IT POINTS IN AN UPHILL/DOWNHILL DIRECTION. B. EXTEND WRECKER BOOM TO MAXIMUM LENGTH TO GET CANISTERS OUT OF THE WAY. C. PLACE CANISTERS OUT OF PATH THAT LIVE GM'S WILL TRAVEL BETWEEN GMT AND LS. 2. IF POSSIBLE , DO NOT MOVE LIVE GM'S OVER EMPTY CANISTERS ON THE GROUND.

GUIDED MISSILE TRANSPORTER

CONTINUED

2-339

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

15

Continued .

GROUND WHERE TWO-STACK IS TO BE PLACED MUST BE WARNING

CLEAR, OTHERWISE TWO-STACK MAY BE UNSTABLE AND FALL OVER .

WHEN SETTING A TWO-STACK ON A SLOPE , MAKE SURE La WARNING

NOTE

IT POINTS IN AN UPHILL/DOWNHILL WISE IT MAY FALL OVER .

DIRECTION .

OTHER-

Place offloaded two-stacks well away from path GMs must follow when moved from GMT to LS. Two-stack will be about 6.5 feet (2.0 m ) high .

Examine the site before offloading to determine

where to place two- stacks .

e.

Signal crane operator to raise canister and move it slowly to area selected for offloaded two-stacks . load .

Keep pressure on tag

lines for positive

f.

Signal crane operator to lower two-stack carefully to ground .

g.

Signal crane operator to lower sling to relieve load .

a WARNING

control of

DO NOT CLIMB UP ON A TWO-STACK UNLESS IT IS FIRMLY SEATED ON THE GROUND AND IS STABLE .

PUSH ON IT,

IF IT ROCKS , MOVE IT.

WEAR WORK GLOVES WHEN ON A TWO-STACK. BE SURE

WARNING

OF FIRM FOOT-HOLDS AND HAND-HOLDS AT ALL TIMES .

h.

Check that the two-stack is stable on the ground .

i.

Two crewmembers climb up on the two-stack , one at each end of the sling. Other crewmembers assist the two to climb the two- stack.

CONTINUED

2-340

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

15

Continued .

j.

Remove tag end of sling .

k.

With

lines from

crane supporting

two-stack .

sling

Attach

weight,

one tag

line to shackle on

disconnect four sling

hoist

each

hooks from

four canister hoisting rings.

CANISTER

SLING

HOIST HOOK (4 PLACES)

3

HOISTING RING (4 PLACES)

FORWARD

I.

Lower hoisting rings flat against canister.

m.

Crewmembers climb down from two-stack with assistance from crewmembers

on ground .

CONTINUED

2-341

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

15

16

Continued.

n.

Signal crane operator to move sling to side of two-stack and lower it enough to attach tag lines.

O.

Repeat steps 14 and 15 for remaining two- stack, then go to step 16.

INSPECT LM ALINEMENT PINS.

a.

Inspect each

of the

eight alinement pins on

launcher platform for defects :

cracks , bends , distortion , etc.

ALINEMENT PIN

TYPICAL 8 PLACES

b.

If any faults are found , notify the Maintenance Officer.

CREWMEMBERS ON GMT MUST BE WATCHED BY OTHER Le CREWMEMBERS

AND WARNED

OF

UNSAFE CONDITIONS

WARNING TO PREVENT INJURY .

CONTINUED

2-342

TM 9-1440-600-10

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

2-31 .

1.

On level ground offload canisters in the following order. •

Upper canister nearest wrecker.

•

Remaining upper canister .

NOTES

Lower canister nearest wrecker.

Remaining lower canister. 2.

On sloped ground , offload canisters in the following order : •

Upper canister on downslope side .

•

Remaining upper canister. Lower canister on downslope side.

• 3.

Remaining lower canister.

At night, one crewmember hold light for crewmember performing task .

PREPARE GMS ON GMT FOR OFFLOAD .

On each of the four canisters on

O DESSICANT HOLDER

GMT, check that :

O RECORDS

J2

(1 )

Torque tube handle is in LOCK

(2)

Quick- release pin is installed on

DONOT LATCH OR UNLATCH UNLESS GM ELEVATED PULL

UNLOCK

position .

K

a.

LOC

17

RELIEF VALVE PUSH TO RELEASE PRESSURE о

right side of torque tube handle .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-343

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued —

17

Continued .

(3)

No red paint shows to left of torque tube handle.

NOTE

b.

Deep well socket goes over nut and fits on driver beneath the nut.

Using 1 /2-inch drive ratchet head, 30-150 foot- pound torque wrench handle , 30-inch extension , and 3/4- inch deep socket, loosen the four canister tiedown bolts on the canister to be offloaded .

TIEDOWN BOLT

QUICK RELEASE PIN upto

CE

TYPICAL 4 PLACES esale - biu TIEDOWN BOLT

QUICK RELEASE PIN TYPICAL 4 PLACES

(S)

bie tright

C.

Remove quick- release pin , rotate each tiedown bolt to the raised position , and install quick- release pin .

CONTINUED

2-344

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

17

-

Continued

STAY CLEAR OF BOOM AND SLING WHEN THEY ARE IN WARNING

d.

MOTION. TO PREVENT INJURY, DO NOT GET YOUR HANDS CAUGHT BETWEEN SLING AND CANISTER .

Signal crane operator to move sling over canister. Guide sling to top center of canister with hoist hooks on sling alined with hoisting ring on canister.

en Supr .SMOL

FORWARD

e.

With crane supporting weight of sling , connect four sling hoist hooks to four canister hoisting rings . Verify that sling anchor shackles and hoist hooks, and canister hoisting rings are not kinked or twisted .

Le

WARNING

WHEN HANDLING LOADED CANISTER , SLING HOISTING SHACKLE MUST BE IN LOADED POSITION . OTHERWISE SLING

WILL TILT

AND

MAY

INJURE

NEARBY

CREW-

MEMBERS .

CONTINUED

2-345

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

Continued .

17

f.

Move canister sling hoisting shackle to LOADED position as follows :

(1 )

Signal crane operator to lower HOISTING SHACKLE

sling gently onto canister.

PIN Unscrew shackle .

(2)

pin from

hoisting TED LOAD 500 LBS EMPTY

(3)

Aline holes in shackle with hole marked LOADED .

(4)

Install pin to secure shackle to

LOADED

sling .

KEEP TAG LINES TIGHT AT ALL TIMES WHEN MOVING SUSPENDED LOAD. KEEP EXCESS LINE UNDER CONTROL TO PREVENT

TRIPPING

OR

CATCHING

TAG

LINE

ON

WARNING OBSTACLES. SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT IF TAG LINES AND SUSPENDED LOAD ARE NOT CLOSELY CONTROLLED .

g.

Remove the two tag lines from

sling and connect to canister . One tag line

to front bottom ring and other tag line to rear bottom ring .

1.

Load GMs onto LS in following order. Lower position farthest from wrecker.

NOTES •

Lower position nearest wrecker. Upper position farthest from wrecker.

Upper position nearest wrecker. 2.

If possible do not move canister across canisters on ground .

CONTINUED

2-346

Change 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

18

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

MOVE GM FROM GMT TO LS.

DO NOT STAND UNDER OR IN PATH OF HOISTED LOAD. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF STRUCK BY

WARNING

MOVING LOAD.

a.

Verify that tag lines are manned and all crewmembers are clear of canister.

b.

Signal

crane

operator to take

a strain

on

load , then

slowly raise

canister

about 6 inches so that it clears alinement pins and canister or GMT beneath it.

N

6 INCHES

ROADSIDE

C.

Verify that all hoist hooks and tag lines are canister.

d.

securely attached to

Disconnect GMT grounding cable from GM connector 4A1J3.

GMT GROUNDING CABLE

CONTINUED

2-347

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

18

e.

Continued .

Verify that pathway to LS is clear.

WRECKER

FORWARD

GUIDED MISSILE TRANSPORTER

FORWARD FORWARD

LAUNCHING STATION

FORWARD

CONTINUED

T

2-348

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

18

Continued .

f.

Signal crane operator to raise GM and move it toward LS.

g.

At halfway point, signal crane operator to stop . Verify that FORWARD arrow on canister will be pointing towards front of LS. Use taglines to rotate canister if necessary. Do not get under load .

CREWMEMBERS

WARNING

ON LS MUST BE WATCHED

CREWMEMBERS AND WARNED

OF

BY OTHER

UNSAFE

CONDITIONS

GM over alinement pins on

lower GM or

TO PREVENT INJURY.

h.

Signal crane operator to position LS as applicable .

TIEDOWN POINT (4 PLACES)

ALINEMENT PIN

ROADSIDE TYPICAL 8 PLACES

CONTINUED

2-349

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

18

Continued .

DO NOT HOLD OUTSIDE OF CANISTER SKIDS WHEN ALINING

GM WITH

ALINEMENT

PINS.

YOUR

HANDS CAN BE

WARNING SERIOUSLY INJURED IF GM SWAYS .

i.

Signal crane operator to lower canister until it is just above alinement pins . Manually aline canister with alinement pins.

19

j.

Signal crane operator to slowly lower canister onto alinement pins .

k.

Signal crane operator to lower sling to relieve tension on load .

CONNECT GROUNDING CABLE TO GM .

FR 5

a.

For the lower GMs.

(1 )

Remove ground cable from spring clip at applicable stowed position .

(2)

Connect grounding cable to GM.

GM

CONNECTOR

CABLE

LL

4A1J3

A5W21P1

LR

4A1J3

A5W23P1

CONTINUED

2-350

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

19

-

Continued.

b.

For the upper GMs.

(1 )

At applicable stowed rotate screw on

position , quick-

disconnect loop clamp 1 /4-turn CCW. (2)

Open

clamp

and

remove

ground cable from clamp. (3)

Remove end of ground cable from spring clip .

(4)

Connect GM .

grounding

cable to

GM

CONNECTOR

CABLE

UL

4A1J3

A5W20P1

UR

4A1J3

A5W22P1

CONTINUED

2-351

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

20

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

SECURE GMS TO LS.

a.

With crane supporting weight of sling ,

disconnect four hoist hooks on sling

from four hoisting rings on canister.

CANISTER SLING

HOIST HOOK (4 PLACES) HOISTING RING (4 PLACES)

FORWARD

b.

Lower hoisting rings flat against canister.

SLING HOISTING SHACKLE MUST BE IN EMPTY POSITION WHEN HANDLING EMPTY SLING . OTHERWISE SLING WILL

WARNING TILT AND MAY INJURE NEARBY CREWMEMBERS .

CONTINUED

2-352

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

20

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

Continued .

C.

Transfer sling hoisting shackle to EMPTY position as follows:

(1 )

Signal crane operator to lower

HOISTING SHACKLE

sling gently onto canister.

Unscrew shackle.

(2)

pin

from

hoisting

PIN

RATED LOAD 7500 LBS EMPTY

(3)

Aline holes in shackle with hole marked EMPTY.

(4)

Install pin to secure shackle to sling .

LOADED

d.

Remove tag lines from canister. Attach one tag line to shackle on each end of sling .

e.

Signal crane operator to move sling away from LS.

CONTINUED

2-353

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

20

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

-

Continued .

f.

Remove quick- release pins from bolts to down position .

four canister tiedown bolts and flip tiedown

Make sure

bolts

enter slot

in

lower support.

Install

quick- release pin .

m buri smo

TIEDOWN BOLT

QUICK RELEASE PIN

g.

Using

1 /2-inch drive ratchet head , 30-150 foot- pound torque wrench handle ,

30-inch extension , and 3/4- inch tiedown bolts as follows:

(1)

deep socket,

torque

each

of four canister

Set torque wrench handle micrometer to 60 foot- pounds .

CONTINUED

2-354

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

20

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

—

Continued.

(2)

al

Using torque wrench , tighten wrench clicks off.

each

of the four tiedown

bolts until torque

3718

ALENA

te2 1231-9018

live 192

h.

Repeat steps 17 thru 20 until all four GMs are loaded and secured on LS .

ade er

ans

BITE test is required now, before MRCTS tests are performed . NOTE

21

AT LCU DISPLAY PANEL A1A14, PERFORM LOCAL BITE TEST .

a.

Energize power.

(1 )

If LS was powered down , power it up per para 2-10.

(2)

If Generator Set A6 was deenergized , energize it per para 2-14 .

CONTINUED

2-355

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

Continued .

21

(3)

If DLTM A2 was deenergized , energize it per para 2-13.

(4)

If LEM A1 was deenergized , energize it per para 2-12.

b.

Check that all five BITE lights are off.

BITE

OOOOO с B E D A

C.

Set

BITE

TEST- OFF - STATUS

LAMP TEST switch to

BITE TEST

STATUS

OFF LAMP TEST. Check that all BITE STATUS LAMP TEST

lights are on . d.

Set switch to

BITE TEST. BITE

о

lights cycle on and off for 6 sec-

C

LAUNCH CONTROL UNIT O POWER SUPPLIES

onds. If all BITE lights remain on ,

BITE

"

.

Deenergize 2-15.

A1

per

VDC VDC MISSILE UPPERL LIPPER A HAZARD

O

O LEM

PLATFORM

O

f.

LAUNCHERLOCAL para

C

Set switch to OFF.

iO

e.

O

test passed .

O

O

0

RAISE STOP 10 10: START

O

0

G LAUNCHING STA

O

LOE PLATFORM 이이 이이 READY RAISED AZIMUTH READY OOO DISCON NECTED 0000

O

FIRINGPLATOON

O

OFF

O

10

Ô

NORMAL BITETEST STATUSLAMPS OFF DIM STATUS LAMPTEST

RELEASE HANDLE

MRCTS

22

PREPARE MRCTS FOR USE.

a.

Release strap assembly securing MRCTS A8 to LS stowage brack-

et.

CONTINUED STRAP

2-356

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

22

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

-

b.

Continued.

Set MRCTS A8 on work platform behind Launcher Missile Round Distributor (LMRD) A3 in position to test GM cables.

C.

Press PRESSURE RELIEF valve to relieve pressure in case.

d.

Release four latches and remove cover.

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

e.

Release two pushbutton fasteners on inner lid , swing open , and remove cable A8W1.

f.

9.

Set MRCTS OFF.

Close and secure inner lid.

POWER switch to Θ POWER ON

POWER SAFE TESTTO RESET

START

OFF STEP H O

MO OT

CONTINUED

2-357

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

22

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

h.

Continued .

Remove dust cap from

LMRD

connector A3J6 and from MRCTS

i.

Jack

Plug

connector A8J1 .

P1

LMRD A3J6

Connect MRCTS cable A8W1 as

P2

MRCTS A8J1

follows:

LMRD A3

A3J6 MRCTS A8

A8J1

j.

23

CABLE A8W1

lights by rotating lens cover fully Open dimmers on each of four MRCTS A8 CCW.

PERFORM MRCTS TEST AND CONNECT GM CABLES .

CHECK IDENTIFICATION SLEEVE ON EACH CABLE TO INSURE THAT YOU TEST AND CONNECT CORRECT CABLE TO GM . CAUTION

CONTINUED

2-358

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

23

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD – Continued

-

Continued .

Remove cables from stowed position .

a.

UR DUMMY CONNECTOR FARSIDE

A LR DUMMY CONNECTOR

UL DUMMY CONNECTOR

ROADSIDE LL DUMMY CONNECTOR

(1 )

Disconnect canister heater cable from small dummy connector at applicable position .

(2)

Disconnect large GM signal cable from large dummy connector at applicable position .

b.

Connect P1 of large GM signal cable (W1 , W2, W3 or W4) to MRCTS connector J2.

C.

Perform MRCTS test as follows:

(1 )

Energize LEM per para 2-12.

CONTINUED

2-359

TM 9-1440-600-10

P1 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued 233

-

Continued . A8J2

(2)

Θ

(3)

Set POWER switch to ON . Check POWER ON and SAFE TO TEST lights on .

(4)

5:

Press to test NO GO and GO lights . Lights on when pressed .

(5)

Momentarily hold RESET switch @

Θ

up. STEP display indicates 00 . Θ @

→ POWER ON

POWER SAFE TO NO GO ON TEST

Ө

GO

RESET

START

: O

Θ

OFF

STEP →

Θ

SAFE TO TEST LIGHT MUST STAY ON 98 WHEN WARNING

GOES

IT WILL

OFF

EXCEPT AT STEP

FLASH OFF. IF SAFE TO TEST

AND STAYS OFF,

LIGHT

DO NOT CONNECT CABLE

TO GM. OTHERWISE ORDNANCE

DEVICE MAY EXPLODE ,

RESULTING IN INJURY OR DEATH .

MRCTS takes about 35 seconds to step from 00 to 99. During

NOTE

step 98 , SAFE TO TEST light will go off, then on . This is normal . When step 99 is displayed and GOlight is on , test passed.

CONTINUED

2-360

TM 9-1440-600-1 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

23

-

Continued .

(6)

Momentarily hold START switc

POWER ON

up. STEP display starts count

Ө

Ꮎ

Θ SAFE POWER TESTTO NOGO ON

GO

ing. RESET

START (7)

After about 35 seconds , STE

OFF STEP

display 99 and GOlight come

A

on. Test has passed .

Θ

(8)

Set POWER switch to OFF .

+

☐ Ө

Ө

Ө

d.

Deenergize LEM A1 per para 2-15.

e.

Disconnect P1 of GM signal cable from MRCTS connector J2.

CHECK IDENTIFICATION SLEEVE ON EACH CABLE TO IN

SURE THAT YOU CONNECT THE CORRECT CABLE TO EACI GM .

CAUTION CONTINUED

2-36

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

23

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

Continued .

f.

Connect cables to GM. Remove shorting plug from

GM connector 4A1J1 just

before connecting cable to the connector.

06

CABLE

CONNECTOR

A5W1P1 - UL

(2)

UL J1

23W2P2

(1 )

UL J2

A5W2P1 - LL

LL J1

23W2P3

LL J2

A5W3P1 - UR

UR J1

23W3P2

UR J2

A5W4P1 - LR

(2)

LR J1

23W3P3

(1 )

LR J2

-2

TYPICAL 4 PLACES

NOTE Perform step g for upper GMs only.

g.

Install cable clamp assembly for upper GM cables on lower canister.

(1 )

Position cable clamp assembly

4 (1 ) on side of canister (2). (2)

3

Seat clamping block (3) fully behind outside flange (4) of canister (2) . Make sure cables are not kinked or twisted .

(3)

Tighten hand knob (6) to secure cable clamp assembly (1 ) to canister (2).

6

2

CONTINUED

2-362

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

23

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

-

Continued . 3 (4)

Open loop clamp (5) and lay upper GM ground cable in clamp .

(5)

Close loop clamp and rotate screw 1 /4- turn cw to lock

6 5

clamp .

24

h.

Repeat steps a thru g to test and connect all cables for all four GMs.

i.

Store shorting plugs removed from GMs on large dummy connectors .

STOW MRCTS.

a.

Disconnect cable A8W1P2 from from LMRD connector A3J6 .

MRCTS connector A8J1

and cable A8W1P1

CABLE A8W1 b.

Install protective covers on both MRCTS connectors and on LMRD

connector A3J6.

A C.

Install cable A8W1 in MRCTS inner lid.

PUSHBUTTON FASTENERS d.

Install

cover

on

MRCTS

and

secure with four cover latches.

B

CONTINUED

2-363

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

24

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

-

Continued .

RELEASE HANDLE

MRCTS

e.

Install MRCTS in stowage bracket with connectors facing direction of arrows on

bracket,

and

secure

with strap assembly.

STRAP

25

ENERGIZE LEM A1 PER PARA 2-12.

DO NOT LOAD AN WARNING

EMPTY TWO-STACK ONTO THE GMT.

UNCOUPLE THE TWO-STACK PER STEP 26a IF THE EMPTY CANISTERS ARE TO BE LOADED ONTO THE GMT.

e

NOTE

Perform steps 26 and 27 below only if canisters offloaded from LS are to be loaded onto GMT. If canisters are not to be loaded onto GMT , go to step 28.

26

LOAD OFFLOADED LS CANISTERS ONTO GMT.

STAY CLEAR OF BOOM AND SLING WHEN THEY ARE IN MOTION. DO NOT GET HANDS CAUGHT BETWEEN SLING WARNING AND CANISTER . SERIOUS INJURY CAN RESULT.

CONTINUED

2-364

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

-

Continued .

26

a.

If empty canisters were offloaded as follows:

as a two-stack,

uncouple each two-stack

(1 )

Loosen each of the four upper canister tiedown bolts.

(2)

Remove quick- release pin , rotate tiedown bolt to raised position , and install quick-release pin .

DA

(893

CONTINUED

2-365

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

26

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

b.

Continued .

Signal

crane

operator to

move sling

over canister on

ground .

Guide

sling

to top center of canister with hoist hooks on sling alined with hoisting rings on canister.

CANISTER SLING

ANCHOR SHACKLE (4 PLACES)

HOIST HOOK (4 PLACES) HOISTING RING (4 PLACES)

FORWARD

C.

With crane supporting weight of sling ,

connect the four sling hoist hooks to

four canister hoisting rings . Verify that sling anchor shackles and hoist hooks, and canister hoisting rings are not kinked or twisted .

CONTINUED

2-366

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

Continued .

26

WHEN HANDLING EMPTY CANISTER , SLING HOISTING SHACKLE MUST BE IN EMPTY POSITION . WHEN HANDLING CANISTER CONTAINING EITHER A GM OR BALLAST, SLING

WARNING

HOISTING

SHACKLE

MUST

BE

IN

LOADED POSITION .

OTHERWISE SLING WILL TILT AND MAY INJURE NEARBY PERSONNEL .

d.

Verify that sling hoisting shackle is in correct position for canister to be moved : EMPTY for empty canister or LOADED for canister with GM installed . If necessary, change shackle position as follows:

(1 )

Signal crane operator to lower sling gently onto canister.

(2)

Unscrew shackle .

pin

from

HOISTING SHACKLE

hoisting

PIN (3)

Aline holes in shackle with hole

RATED LOAD 7500 LBS

in correct position .

LOADED

EMPTY (4)

Install pin to secure shackle to sling .

KEEP TAG LINES TIGHT AT ALL TIMES WHEN MOVING SUSLa

WARNING

PENDED LOAD . KEEP EXCESS LINE UNDER CONTROL TO PREVENT

TRIPPING

OR

CATCHING

TAG

LINE

ON

OBSTACLES. SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT IF TAG LINES AND SUSPENDED LOAD ARE NOT CLOSELY CONTROLLED .

e.

Remove the two tag lines from

sling and connect to canister. One tag line

to front bottom anchor shackle and other tag line to rear bottom anchor shackle .

CONTINUED

Change 1

2-367

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

— 26

Continued .

La WARNING

DO NOT STAND UNDER OR IN PATH OF HOISTED LOAD. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF STRUCK BY MOVING LOAD.

f.

Signal crane operator to

take

a

strain

on

load , then

slowly raise

canister

about 6 inches above ground .

g.

Verify that tag lines and hoist hooks are securely attached to load .

h.

Signal crane operator to raise canister and move it towards GMT.

CONTINUED

2-368

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

26

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

i.

Continued.

At halfway point, signal crane operator to stop . Verify that

FORWARD arrow

on canister will be pointing toward front of GMT. Use tag lines to rotate canister if necessary . Do not get under hoisted load . Use flashlights if it is dark.

WRECKER

GUIDED MISSILE TRANSPORTER

FORWARD

LAUNCHING STATION

CONTINUED

2-369

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

26

2-370

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

Continued .

CREWMEMBERS ON GMT MUST BE WATCHED BY OTHER

La WARNING

CREWMEMBERS

AND WARNED OF

UNSAFE

CONDITIONS

TO PREVENT INJURY.

1.

Load GMs onto GMT in following order: Lower position farthest from wrecker.

·

Lower position nearest wrecker.

•

Upper position farthest from wrecker.

•

Upper position nearest wrecker.

NOTES

2.

Crewmembers stand

on

ground alongside

GMT to aline lower

canisters with GMT alinement pins .

CONTINUED

6

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

265

—

j.

Continued .

Signal crane operator to position lower canister as applicable .

canister over alinement

pins on

GMT or

ER

NS

D

wer

CURBSIDE ALINEMENT PINS

Le WARNING

DO NOT HOLD OUTSIDE OF CANISTER SKIDS WHEN ALINING CANISTER WITH ALINEMENT PINS. YOUR HANDS CAN BE SERIOUSLY INJURED IF CANISTER SWAYS .

CONTINUED

2-371

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued -

26

k.

Continued .

Signal crane operator to lower canister until it is just above alinement pins. Manually aline canister with alinement pins .

E

CURBSIDE ALINEMENT PIN

GMT

27

I.

Signal crane operator to lower canister slowly onto alinement pins .

m.

Signal crane operator to lower hook to relieve tension on load.

SECURE CANISTERS TO GMT.

a.

Disconnect the four hoist hooks on sling from the four hoisting rings on canister.

CONTINUED

2-372

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

27

Continued .

S

HOISTING RINGS ON LOWER GMS MUST BE IN DOWN POSITION, FLAT AGAINST CANISTER TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CANISTERS .

CAUTION

CANISTER SLING

HOIST HOOK (4 PLACES)

130

HOISTING RING (4 PLACES)

FORWARD

b.

Lower hoisting rings flat against canister.

C.

Connect GMT grounding cable to canister connector 4A1J3.

GMT GROUNDING 'CABLE

CONTINUED

A

2-373

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD

27

- Continued

Continued .

Le

WHEN HANDLING AN EMPTY SLING , SLING HOISTING SHACKLE MUST BE IN EMPTY POSITION . OTHERWISE SLING

WILL

TILT

AND

MAY

INJURE

NEARBY

CREW-

WARNING MEMBERS .

d.

Transfer sling hoisting shackle toEMPTY

position as follows:

(1 )

Signal crane operator to lower sling gently onto canister.

(2)

Unscrew

hoisting

pin from

HOISTING SHACKLE

shackle . PIN (3)

Aline holes in shackle with hole markedEMPTY . EMPTY

(4)

€

RATED LOAD 7500 LBS LOADED

Install pin to secure shackle to sling .

e.

Remove taglines from of sling .

f.

Signal crane operator to move sling away from GMT.

g.

canister. Attach one tag line to shackle on each end

Remove quick- release pins from the four canister tiedown bolts and flip tiedown bolts to down positions .

Make sure bolts enter slot in lower support. Install

quick- release pin . h.

Using

1 /2-inch drive ratchet head ,

30-inch extension , and tiedown bolts as follows :

3/4- inch

30-150 foot- pound torque wrench handle,

deep socket ,

torque

each

of four

canister

CONTINUED

2-374

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

27

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

Continued .

(1 )

Set torque wrench handle micrometer to 60 foot - pounds.

(2)

Using torque wrench , wrench clicks off.

tighten

each

of the

four tiedown

bolts

until torque

TIEDOWN BOLT

QUICK RELEASE PIN

chen

do ptie port st i.

Repeat steps 26 and 27 for each canister to be loaded onto GMT.

e nch hand r e t s Urcani

CONTINUED

2-375

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

28

2-376

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

STOW GMT EQUIPMENT .

a.

Signal crane operator to position sling over GMT gooseneck .

O.C

O.O

ALINEMENT PIN b.

Aline sling with the two alinement pins on GMT gooseneck and signal crane operator to lower sling .

C.

Guide sling to engage alinement pins.

d.

Install locking pin in each of the two alinement pins to secure

LOCKING PIN

sling . TYPICAL 2 PLACES e.

Remove the two tag lines from the sling.

f.

Stow both tag lines in roadside GMT stowage box.

g.

Disconnect ground cable 27W1 between LS and GMT and stow cable.

CONTINUED

C

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

28

Continued .

(1 )

Under LEM A1 on LS, turn connector on GMT Grounding Cable 27W1 ccw to unlock.

(2)

(3)

Remove Cable 27W1 connector 42J4.

from

LS

At rear of GMT adapter platform , turn connector on Cable 27W1 ccw to unlock.

(4)

Remove

Cable

27W1

from

GMT grounding connector . (5)

Stow

Cable

27W1

in

GMT

curbside stowage box.

VIEW ON REAR CURBSIDE GMT

h.

Remove GMT ladder and stow it on GMT.

(1 )

Lift ladder from support slots .

CONTINUED

2-377

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

28

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

Continued .

(2)

Slide ladder into ladder stowage bracket under canisters on rear curbside of GMT.

CURBSIDE

-PIN

BRACKET

29

PIN

LADDER

(3)

Aline holes in top and bottom of GMT ladder with holes in stowage bracket .

(4)

Press and hold pushbutton on quick- release pin and slide pin through holes in ladder and bracket to secure ladder.

STOW WRECKER HOOK AND BOOM .

a.

Signal crane operator to retract boom .

CONTINUED C

2-378

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

29

b.

Continued .

Remove clip from two boom

ex-

tension retaining pins . Pull retaining pins from boom.

CLIPS

RETAINING PINS

C.

Signal

crane

operator to slowly

raise crane block until it contacts

EXTENSION

end of boom extension .

BOOM d.

Signal crane operator to continue to retract cable until boom extension is pulled to fully

retracted

position .

e.

Aline holes in boom and holes in extension . Insert the two retaining SHIPPER pins and secure with clips .

CRANE BLOCK

CONTINUED

2-379

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

29

Continued .

DO NOT STAND UNDER BOOM OR IN PATH OF BOOM. INJURY OR

DEATH

MAY

RESULT IF STRUCK BY MOVING

WARNING

BOOM.

f.

horizontal posi-

Lower boom to tion ,

centered

between

rear

wheels and fully retracted.

O.O ROADSIDE

g.

Install crane pivot- post lockpin to secure crane .

MOIRASTO

MOOR of

eld

O.O

0

ROADSIDE DONAT

nia LOCKPIN

h.

Signal crane operator to let out enough cable so that crane hook can be stowed in eye on side of shipper.

CONTINUED

2-380

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-31 .

29

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

-

i.

Continued .

Signal crane operator to retract cable until hook and cable are secure against shipper.

j.

30

Crane operator can secure crane operations .

PREPARE WRECKER FOR TRAVEL.

G

WARNIN

WEAR WORK GLOVES AND BE CAREFUL WHEN RAISING OUTRIGGERS TO PREVENT INJURY TO HANDS.

a.

Install outrigger handle

in screw

collar at top of outrigger.

b.

Using handle turn outrigger screw collar until outrigger base is lifted clear of ground . Remove handle .

C.

Grasp outrigger leg

and

turn it

clockwise to continue lifting base from ground . Continue until you reach screw stop .

CONTINUED

2-381

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

30

d.

Continued .

Remove L-shaped from

side

retaining

pin

of outrigger storage

tube .

RETAINING PIN

e.

Two crewmembers raise outrigger leg to horizontal,

then

push

leg

into storage tube.

NOTE

Perform steps f thru h for rear outrigger legs only.

f.

Remove retaining clip and pull retaining pin to release base from outrigger leg .

g.

Install pin in base and secure with retaining clip.

RETAINING PIN CONTINUED

CLIP

2-382

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD

-

- Continued

Continued.

30

h.

Store outrigger base on wrecker as follows :

(1 )

Lower base over threaded post on wrecker bed.

CLAMP HANDLE

Place clamp bar on threaded

(2)

CLAMP BAR

post, straddling base mounting bracket. (3)

THREADED POST

Screw handle onto threaded post to secure base to wrecker bed .

O CURBSIDE

i.

Aline retaining pin holes in leg with retaining pin holes in storage tube . Install retaining pin .

NOTE

Figure below is typical . Front outriggers have base attached .

ए

l

Youl

j.

Repeat steps a thru i above until all four outriggers are stowed .

k.

Have wrecker operator verify outrigger storage .

CONTINUED

2-383

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

31

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued

PREPARE GMT FOR TRAVEL.

a.

Aline wrecker with the GMT.

b.

Slowly back wrecker into position .

Be sure that kingpin

on GMT is in line

with fifth wheel jaws on wrecker.

CURBSIDE

C.

Before GMT kingpin plate begins to ride wrecker approach ramp , check that kingpin plate is above approach ramps .

d.

Slowly back wrecker until coupler

APPROACH RAMP

jaws on fifth wheel engage GMT kingpin .

COUPLER JAWS FIFTH WHEEL &

e.

Make sure that coupling is secure by inching wrecker forward . If coupling

is

not locked , rock wrecker back and forth slowly until kingpin is locked in fifth wheel.

CONTINUED

-384

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

31

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD- Continued

-

f.

Continued .

Remove landing leg hand crank from retaining clip on curbside of GMT, and pull it out until it locks in place .

O CURBSIDE

ROTATED 90°

g.

Using hand crank , raise GMT landing legs until they are completely elevated , and then secure hand crank in stowed position.

h.

Install landing legs travel chain if applicable .

CONTINUED

2-385

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

31

i.

Continued .

Get SERVICE and side of wrecker.

EMERGENCY air lines from stowage

bracket on either

EMERGENCY AIRLINE STOWAGE BRACKET SERVICE AIRLINE

3012

AIR LINE SHUT OFF VALVE

E AIR HOSE

TYPICAL 2 PLACES CURBSIDE

j.

Connect SERVICE and GMT .

k.

Open shutoff valves on both air lines.

EMERGENCY air lines to glad

hand connectors on

CONTINUED

2-386

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-31 .

GUIDED MISSILE RELOAD - Continued -

31

Continued .

I.

Connect over-the - road electrical cable from wrecker to GMT as follows :

(1)

Raise dust cover.

(2)

Push

over- the - road

DUST 'COVER cable

straight into GMT connector.

(3)

Hook spring -loaded dust cover onto cable connector to secure

&

cable . FRONT OF GMT

Remove chock blocks from GMT wheels and stow on GMT.

3

m.

ELECTRICAL CABLE

n.

Wrecker operator get in

cab and

operate lights

and

brakes .

Have

another

crewmember verify that GMT and wrecker lights work properly.

Procedures to be performed at this point depend on orders reNOTE

ceived . If LS is to rejoin firing platoon , crewmembers perform emplacement per para 2-8. If road march is to be performed , crewmembers perform march order per para 2-30

2-387

TM 9-1440-600-10

Section IV .

2-32 .

OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS

CHEMICAL , BIOLOGICAL , AND RADIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

The launching station ( LS) is remotely operated . No special requirements are necessary to operate in this environment. Personnel comply with SOP for their protection .

2-33 .

1

HIGH VELOCITY WINDS

Road march - When wind speed is over 51

mph (45 knots) the launching station

(LS) should be parked in a protected place and tied down . 9-2330-357-14 for tiedown instructions .

2

2-34.

1

See semitrailer TM

Emplaced When wind speed is over 96.5 mph (85 knots) the LS must be tied down. See semitrailer TM 9-2330-357-14 for tiedown instructions .

EXTREME COLD WEATHER OPERATION

See TM 5-6115-464-12 for Generator Set A6 cold weather operation . Generator Set A6 requires special preparation when temperature reaches -25° F (-31.7°C) .

2

See TM 9-2330-357-14 for semitrailer cold weather operation .

CONTINUED

G

2-388

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-34 .

3

EXTREME COLD WEATHER OPERATION - Continued

Remove all snow and ice from snow and ice from :

•

launcher mechanics

(LM ) .

Be sure you

remove

Azimuth bearing gear teeth ( 1 ) .

Azimuth actuator pinion gear teeth (2). •

Two vent holes in each elevation actuator gear case (3) .

ROADSIDE TYPICAL 2 PLACES SHOWN RAISED

2 1

CONTINUED

2-389

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-34.

EXTREME COLD WEATHER OPERATION - Continued

Remove snow and ice from both air 4

exhaust louvers ( 1 ) and air inlet louver (2) on Launcher Electronics Module ( LEM ) A1

and

Data

Link

Terminal

1 2

Module ( DLTM) A2. Cover louvers as soon as possible after shutdown .

TYPICAL LEM A1 DLTM A2

Remove snow and ice from both air 5

flow louvers

on

Launcher

Missile

Round Distributor (LMRD) A3.

TYPICAL BOTH SIDES

NOTE

Perform steps 6 thru 10 below only when directed to turn canister

heaters on .

Remove canister heater Power Control

N

IO

6

UT

Box 23A1 cover by loosening 14 cap-

CA

0 C 12 VA

tive screws .

CONTINUED

C

2-390

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-34.

7

EXTREME COLD WEATHER OPERATION- Continued

O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O

On LEM Power Distribution Unit (PDU ) A1A2 , set CNVC OUT CANISTER

G

BLOWER OPE HTR AC circuit breaker to ON .

BLOWER ON OFF LCHRSVDCELEX PWRSPLY O

CNVC OUT CANISTER HTR AC

OFF

ENVE OUT CANISTERHTH

ON

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC MAIN A ON OFF

PWRORGSPLY ON OFF

LCHRELEX 28VDC SPLY FWR

MSL5VDC FWRSPLY

OFF

OFF

MOT UNITCONT AC ON OFF

MISSILE HEATER AC LIPA & MSL UPA AMSL ON OFF OFF

MAIN 8 ON OFF MS GYRO-CLOCK PWR SPLY ON OFF

PAFUTTL PWR SPLY

MS TWTFIL SPLY PWR ON OFF

OFF

LIVEL MOL OFF

LWRR MS ON OFF LAMPS ON OFF TEST

O

O

OFF

O

O

O

O

0

Ꮎ CANISTER HEATER POWER

8

UPHL LWRL UPRA LWRR

On Power Control Box 23A1 , set four CANISTER HEATER POWER circuit breakers to ON .

O

9

O

Insure that four CANISTER HEATER POWER lights are on .

GASKET ON POWER CONTROL BOX 23A1 COVER MUST BE PROPERLY SEATED AND SCREWS TIGHT TO KEEP WATER OUT OF POWER CONTROL BOX 23A1 .

CAUTION

10

Install canister heater Power Control Box 23A1 cover, and secure by tight-

ION E R

AUT

ening 14 captive screws.

NOTE

Perform steps 11

thru

15 below when directed to turn canister

heaters off.

CONTINUED

2-391

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-34.

11

EXTREME COLD WEATHER OPERATION - Continued

Remove canister heater Power Control

Box 23A1 cover by loosening 14 captive screws .

7B B B B ON

TI

U CA

0 C 12 VA

0 12 TP

@ CANISTER HEATER POWER

On Power Control Box 23A1 , set four CANISTER HEATER POWER circuit breakers to OFF .

9

0000 UPAL LWRL UPRR LWAR

13

Insure that four CANISTER HEATER POWER lights are off.

GASKET ON POWER CONTROL BOX 23A1 MUST BE PROPERLY SEATED AND SCREWS TIGHT TO KEEP WATER OUT OF POWER CONTROL BOX 23A1 . CAUTION

14

Install canister heater Power Control Box 23A1 cover, and secure by tightening 14 captive screws.

N

TIO

CAU

LO

CONTINUED

2-392

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-34.

EXTREME COLD WEATHER OPERATION - Continued

15 | On LEM - PDU A1A2 , set CNVC OUT CANISTER HTR AC circuit breaker to

O O O LCHR ELEX MDL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT O O BLOWER OPE

0

OFF . o

CNVC OUT CANISTER HTR AC Θ ON Θ

BLOWER OFF LCHRELEX PWR3 VDCSPLY O

LAUNCH ELECTRONICS AC MAINA O OFF

FWRORDSPL OFF

ELEX LCHR SPLY PWR28 VDC Ofe OFF

MAIN 8 OFF

MSL PWR5VDC SPLY

LOCK GVROPWR CSPLY

OFF

OFF

MSL PAFUITL FWR SPLY ON OFF

MS TWTFIL PWR SPLY ON OFF

O

MISSILE HEATER AC UPE MSL LIPA MSL ON ON CIFF OFF

LWR MSL OFF

OFF

OFF

O

CNVC OUTNTA CANISTER ON

MOT AC UNITCONT ON OFF

LAMPS TEST

®

O

16

Remove drain plug and drain water from LEM A1 , DLTM A2, and LMRD A3 immediately after shutdown per para 2-6.

17

After shutdown , call organizational maintenance , remove air filters and inspect them for dirt, in it.

dust,

and

moisture .

Replace

any filter that

is clogged

or has

moisture

18

Refer to TM 21-305 for special instructions on driving hazards .

19

When performing maintenance in rain or snow , use weather shield to protect LEM A1 or DLTM A2 . Assemble weather shield per para 2-39 . 2-40 .

Disassemble per para

CONTINUED

2-393

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-35.

EXTREME HOT WEATHER OPERATION

1

See TM 5-6115-464-12 for Generator Set A6 hot weather operation .

2

See TM 9-2330-357-14 for semitrailer hot weather operation .

3

Organizational maintenance should

remove air filters often and inspect them for

dirt, dust and moisture . Replace any filter that is clogged or has moisture in it.

2-36 .

1

SANDY OR DUSTY CONDITIONS

Use the general guides listed below for all launching station ( LS) parts :

•

Use shelters when possible to protect from blowing sand and dust.

•

Keep doors and panels closed as much as possible.

Remove sand and dust from inlets , outlets , and moving parts.

2

See TM 5-6115-464-12 for operating Generator Set A6 in sandy or dusty conditions .

3

See TM 9-2330-357-14 for operating semitrailer in sandy or dusty conditions .

CONTINUED

2-394

Remove sand and dust from :

•

Azimuth bearing gear teeth ( 1 ) .

•

Azimuth actuator pinion gear teeth (2). Two vent holes in each elevation actuator gear case (3) .

3 ROADSIDE TYPICAL 2 PLACES SHOWN RAISED

2

10

О (

4

SANDY OR DUSTY CONDITIONS 1 Continued

B

2-36 .

です

APP

TM 9-1440-600-10

[

CONTINUED

2-395

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-36.

5

SANDY OR DUSTY CONDITIONS - Continued

Remove sand and dust from both air exhaust louvers ( 1 ) and air inlet louver (2) on Launcher Electronics Module ( LEM ) A1

and Data Link Terminal Module ( DLTM )

A2 . Cover louvers as soon as possible after shutdown.

2

TYPICAL LEM A1 DLTM A2

6

Call organizational

maintenance to clean

doors and

panels gaskets

every time

before closing . Sand and dust will lower shielding effect and damage gaskets .

7

Shorten preventive maintenance checks and services interval for lubrication and air filter replacement .

8

When performing

maintenance ,

use weather shield to protect LEM A1

or DLTM

A2 . Assemble weather shield per para 2-39. Disassemble per para 2-40.

CONTINUED

2-396

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-37.

HIGH HUMIDITY

It is usually raining when humidity is high . Even when it is not raining high humidity will cause metal to rust. Keep metal clean and apply touch-up paint to surfaces where paint is broken .

1

Use the general guides listed below for all launching station (LS) parts : •

Use shelters when possible to protect from rain or snow.

•

Keep doors and panels closed as much as possible .

2

See TM 5-6115-464-12 for operating Generator Set A6 in high humidity.

3

See TM 9-2330-357-14 for operating semitrailer in high humidity.

4

Cover air exhaust louvers and air inlet louver on Launcher Electronics Module (LEM ) A1 and Data Link Terminal Module (DLTM) A2 as soon as possible after shutdown.

TYPICAL LEM A1 DLTM A2

5

Call organizational

maintenance to clean doors and

panels gaskets

every time

before closing . Moisture will lower gaskets shielding effect . CONTINUED

2-397

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-37.

6

HIGH HUMIDITY - Continued

Shorten

preventive

maintenance checks

and services

interval for lubrication ,

filter replacement , water draining and water removal from LEM A1 door channels .

7

When performing maintenance , use weather shield to protect LEM A1 A2. Assemble weather shield per para 2-39 . Disassemble per para 2-40.

8

Observe humidity indicator on each guided missile (GM) instrument panel . to TM 9-1410-600-14 for services .

2-398

air

and DLTM A2

or DLTM

Refer

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-38 .

CHANGING WEATHER

ALL 16 CANISTER TIEDOWN BOLTS MUST BE RETORQUED WHEN

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

HAS

BEEN

BELOW 32°F

(0°C) AND RISES ABOVE 32° F (0°C). CAUTION

GUIDED MISSILE (4)

UPPER TIEDOWN BOLT TYPICAL 8 PLACES ROADSIDE

LOWER TIEDOWN BOLT TYPICAL 8 PLACES

Personnel Required . Two Tools and Equipment Required . Head Ratchet, 1 /2- In . Drive

Handle, Wrench , Torque , 30-150 Foot- Pounds Extension , 1 /2- In . Drive, 30- In . Long CONTINUED

Socket , Deep Well , 3/4- In . , 1 /2- In . Drive

2-399

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-38 .

1

CHANGING WEATHER- Continued

Set the torque wrench handle micrometer for 60 foot- pounds of torque .

2

Climb up on

the

upper canisters .

the two lower inside tiedown clicks off at 60 foot- pounds .

Get

between

bolts on that end

།། 1 2

NDS POUOT FO-

6

3877

canisters

on

one

end .

until the torque wrench

Tighten handle

3

Tighten the two upper inside tiedown bolts until the torque wrench handle clicks off at 60 foot-pounds.

4

Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the four inside tiedown bolts on the other end .

5

Climb down from the top . Tighten the eight upper and lower outside tiedown bolts until the torque wrench clicks off at 60 foot- pounds .

2-400

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-39.

WEATHER SHIELD ASSEMBLY

Weather shield may be installed on Launcher Electronics module (LEM ) A1

or Data

Link Terminal Module ( DLTM ) A2.

CURBSIDE

Personnel Required . Two

FRONT STOWAGE CONTAINER

Tools and Equipment Required . None

1

On

curbside ,

release

hood latch

securing front stowage container end cover.

2

Remove bag containing weather shield kit from container.

8

3

Release three snap fasteners securing bag cover.

4

Remove weather shield kit from bag .

CONTINUED

2-401

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-39 .

5

WEATHER SHIELD ASSEMBLY- Continued

Put bag back in storage hood latch .

container.

Close container end cover and secure with

There are two support arms in kit. When support arms are inNOTE

6

stalled , the two hangers must be inboard and pointing up.

Install one support arm (2) in module

2 right side support blocks ( 1 ) with two

1 hangers (3) inboard and pointing up. Spring pin (4) must seat between two 3 support block pins (5).

7

Install other support arm in module left side support above .

block,

same as step 6

5

NOTE

8

If cross supports are installed in weather shield , go to step 10 below.

Lay weather shield on flat surface with inside down . The two sewn channels are on the inside. Fold side and back panels over the outside.

9

Insert one cross support into each sewn channel. Holes in ends of cross support should be visible on each end. Holes will clip into support arms installed above .

VIEW TURNED OVER FOR CLARITY

2-402

CONTINUED

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-39.

WEATHER SHIELD ASSEMBLY- Continued

If steps 8 and 9 were performed , go to step 11 .

NOTE

10

Unroll weather shield . Lay it on flat surface with inside down .

11

Using two people lift weather shield . Clip holes in each end of each cross support (3) into hangers ( 1 ) on support arms (2).

3

2

12

Fasten top of weather shield to top of module with 13 snap fasteners .

13

Fold side

and

back

panels

down .

Fasten side panels to side of module . Four snap fasteners on each side.

CONTINUED

2-403

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-39 .

14

WEATHER SHIELD ASSEMBLY- Continued

Fasten back panel to side panels. Eight snap fasteners on each side .

Three metal grommets at bottom

NOTE

2-404

of each side

used to tie panels to ground anchors.

panel

may be

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-40 .

WEATHER SHIELD DISASSEMBLY

CURBSIDE

FRONT STOWAGE CONTAINER

Personnel Required . Two Tools and Equipment Required . None

1

On

curbside ,

release

hood

latch

securing front stowage container end cover.

2

Remove weather shield kit bag from container.

NOTE

If side and rear panels are tied to ground be untied .

anchors they must

CONTINUED

2-405

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-40 .

3

WEATHER SHIELD DISASSEMBLY - Continued

Unsnap eight snap fasteners on each side that

secure

rear panel to

side

panels.

4

5

Neatly fold rear panel and two side panels over top of weather shield.

6

Unsnap

13

Unsnap four snap fasteners on each side that secure side panels to module.

fasteners that secure

weather shield to top of module .

CONTINUED

2-406

TM 9-1440-600-10

2-40.

WEATHER SHIELD DISASSEMBLY

- Continued

7

Using two people , lift weather shield to raise two cross supports ( 1 ) off support arm (2) hangers.

8

Lay weather shield

on flat surface .

Tightly roll weather shield cross supports inside .

2

up with

2 9

Install rolled up weather shield in bag .

1 10

Remove two support arms

(2) from

module support blocks (1 ).

11

Install two support arms in bag.

12

Close bag and secure with three snap fasteners .

13

Install bag containing weathershield kit in stowage container.

14

Close stowage container end cover and secure with hood latch .

CONTINUED

2-407

TM 9-1440-600-10 2-41 .

LIGHTNING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

When possible, launching stations (LS) should be emplaced on sites with air terminals on telephone poles or towers and connected to earth through down conductors . When air terminals are not used , crewmembers must insure the LS is grounded through the ground rods . When lightning is near perform the following when directed by the Unit Commander:

1

Rotate platform to 180° position per para 2-22.

2

Lower platform per para 2-20 .

3

Power-down LS per para 2-11 .

4

Leave LS. Stay at least 800 feet (244 meters) away.

NOTE

When directed by Unit Commander to return to operation , perform the following :

€

5

Power- up LS per para 2-10.

6

Raise platform per para 2-19.

7

Rotate platform to azimuth directed by engagement control station (ECS) per para 2-22.

ENGAGEMENT CONTROL HANDLE

MUST BE

IN ROTATE

POSITION FOR ECS TO HAVE REMOTE CONTROL OF AZIMUTH POSITION. CAUTION

CONTINUED

2-408

TM 9-1440-600-10

APPENDIX A REFERENCES

A- 1 .

SCOPE

This appendix lists all forms, field manuals , and technical manuals referenced in this manual .

A-2.

A-3 .

A-4 .

FORMS

Recommended Changes to DA Publications

DA Form 2028-2

Quality Deficiency Report

SF 368

FIELD MANUALS

Basic Cold Weather Manual

FM 31-70

Field Artillery Survey

FM 6-2

First Aid for Soldiers

FM 21-11

Visual Signals

FM 21-60

TECHNICAL MANUALS

Hot Weather Clothing and Equipment

TM 10-276

Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Generator Set, Diesel

TM 5-6115-464-12

Driven, Tactical Skid MTD. 15KW, 3 phase, 4 wire , 120/208 and 240/416 volts Operator , Organizational , and Intermediate

TM 9-1410-600-14

Maintenance Manual : Guided Missile , Aerial Intercept MIM- 104 Operator, Organizational , DS and GS

TM 9-2330-357-14

Maintenance Manual : Semitrailer , Flatbed, Radar Set and Launching Station M860 and M860A1

A- 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

A-4 .

TECHNICAL MANUALS - Continued

Organizational Maintenance Manual :

TM 9-1440-600-20

Launching Station M901 , Guided Missile, Semitrailer Mounted PATRIOT System Description

TM 9-1425-600-10

Shipping and Limited Storage

TM 9-1425-609-15

The Army Maintenance

TM 38-750

Management System (TAMMS)

A- 5 .

MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS

Electronics Key Generator KG - 30

KAO- 137E/TSEC

Lubrication Order: Launching Station M901 , Guided Missile , Semitrailer

LO 9-1440-600-14

Mounted

A- 2

TM 9-1440-600-10

APPENDIX B COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS

Section I.

B -1 .

INTRODUCTION

SCOPE

This appendix lists components of end item and basic issue items for the launching station to help you inventory items required for safe and efficient operation .

B-2.

GENERAL

The Components of End Item and Basic Issue Items Lists are divided into the following sections:

Section II . Components of End Item . This listing is for informational purposes only, and is not authority to

requisition

replacements . These items are part of the end

item , but are removed and separately packaged for transportation or shipment. As part of the end item , these items must be with the end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts . Illustrations are furnished to assist you in identifying the items .

b.

Section III . Basic Issue Items . These are the minimum essential items required

to place the launching station in operation , to operate it , and to perform emergency repairs . Although shipped separately packaged , BII must be with the launching station during operation

and whenever it is transferred

between

property accounts .

The illustrations will

assist you with hard -to-identify items . This manual is your authority to request/requisition replacement BII , based on TOE/MTOE authorization of the end item.

B -3 .

EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS

The following provides an explanation of columns found in the tabular listings.

a. Column (1 ) - Illustration Number ( Illus number of the illustration in which the item is shown .

Number) .

This column

indicates the

B-1

TM 9-1440-600-10

Section I.

INTRODUCTION - Continued

b.

Column (2)

National Stock Number. Indicates the National stock number as-

signed to the item and will be used for requisitioning purposes . c.

Column (3)

Description . Indicates the federal item

name and , if required , a

minimum description to identify and locate the item . The last line for each item indicates the FSCM (in parentheses) followed by the part number . If item needed differs for different models of this equipment , the column.

d.

model is shown

under the " Usable On "

heading in this

Column (4) - Unit of Measure ( U/M) . Indicates the measure used in performing

the actual operation/maintenance function . This measure is expressed by a two-character alphabetical abbreviation (e.g. , ea , in , pr) .

e. Column (5) - Quantity Required (Qty Rqr) . Indicates the quantity of the item authorized to be used with/on the equipment .

B-2

TM 9-1440-600-10

Section II .

COMPONENTS OF END ITEM

1

2

(1) ILLUS NUMBER

(2) NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER

1

1290-00-614-0008

(3) DESCRIPTION FSCM AND PART NUMBER

Aiming Circle M2 (in

U/M

(5) QTR RQR

EA

1

EA

6

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

(4) USABLE ON CODE

storage box curbside)

(19200 ) 5800554 Not Illus-

Batteries (in storage

trated

box curbside) (55716) W-B-101

Not

Bell Crank (stored aft

Illustrated Not Illustrated

of launcher) ( 18876) 10250775-1

Container, Storage (located below launcher in front) (18876) 10250909-29

Not Illustrated

Not Illustrated 2

Container, Storage (aft end of launcher) (18876) 10250907-39 Coupling , Engagement (aft launcher) ( 18876) 10250774-1 Crank, Hand Actuator

(in storage box roadside) ( 18876) 10250828-29

B-3

TM 9-1440-600-10

Section II .

COMPONENTS OF END ITEM - Continued

4

3

5

6

(1 ) ILLUS NUMBER

Not Illus-

(2) NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER

5810-01-090-0814

(3) DESCRIPTION FSCM AND PART NUMBER

Electronic , Key

U/M

(5) QTR RQR

EA

1

EA

3

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

(4) USABLE ON CODE

Generator TSEC/

trated

KG-30-124 (98230) (5A2A1 )

Not

Flashlight, Spec. (in

Illus-

storage box curbside)

trated 3

(55717) MIL- F-3747 1290-00-891-9999

Gunner Quadrant Fire

Control M1A1 (in storage box curbside)

(19200) 7197156 Not

Handle, Engagement

Illus-

(stored aft on

trated

launcher) ( 18876) 10250773-19

4

Kit , Weather Shield (in storage container 10250907-29) (18876) ( 10253780-19)

5

1440-00-109-1466

Lead , Electrical (stored roadside ) (18876) 10253829-9

6

6675-00-244-0446

Level, Rod MIL-

L-11566 (81349)

B-4

TM 9-1440-600-10

COMPONENTS OF END ITEM - Continued

Section II .

8

7

CBBB

HI 9

B

(1) ILLUS NUMBER

(2) NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER

7

(3) DESCRIPTION FSCM AND PART NUMBER

Missile Round Cable

U/M

(5) QTR RQR

EA

1

EA

2

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

(4) USABLE ON CODE

Test Set (stored aft of launcher) (18876) 11450280-29

Not

Pin , Quick Release

Illus-

(accompanies stor-

trated

age box curbside) (18876) 10250219-2

8

6675-00-514-5575

Pole, Range MILP-20192 (stored

aft of launcher) (81349) Not

Radio Set (stored

Illus-

in cab of truck )

trated

(80063) SC- D866058

9

5975-00-878-3791

Rod , Ground ST2 ,

TY2 (stored roadside) MIL-

R-11461 ( 81349) Not Illustrated

Security Equipment

(stored in cab of truck) (80063) SC- D-866060

B-5

TM 9-1440-600-10

Section II .

COMPONENTS OF END ITEM - Continued

10

(1 ) ILLUS NUMBER

(3) DESCRIPTION FSCM AND PART NUMBER

(2) NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER

Not

Spare Tire Kit

Illus-

U/M

(5) QTR RQR

EA

1

EA

2

EA

2

EA

1

(4)

U/M

(5) QTR RQR

EA

1

(4) USABLE ON CODE

(stored aft of

trated

truck) ( 18702) 12258236

Not

Support Tiedown

Illus-

(stored in storage

trated

container 10250907-

29) (18876) 10250219-2 10

Tool Kit (in

roadside storage box) ( 18876) 10252289-19

Not

Tape, Measuring (in storage box curb-

Illustrated

side) (55717) GGG-T- 106

Section III .

BASIC ISSUE ITEMS

1

(1) ILLUS NUMBER

3-6

1

(2) NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER

7510-00-889-3494

(3) DESCRIPTION FSCM AND PART NUMBER

Logbook Cover ( 19207) 11677003

USABLE ON CODE

TM 9-1440-600-10

APPENDIX C ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION

Section I.

C- 1 .

LIST

INTRODUCTION

SCOPE

This appendix lists additional items you are authorized for the support of the launching station .

C - 2.

GENERAL

This list identifies items that do

not have to accompany the launching station and

that do not have to be turned in with it . These items are all authorized to you by CTA , MTOE, TDA, or JTA.

C-3 .

EXPLANATION OF LISTING

National stock numbers , descriptions , and quantities are provided to help you identify and

request the additional items you

require to support this equipment . The items are

listed in alphabetical sequence by item name under the type document ( i.e. , CTA, MTOE , TDA, or JTA) which authorizes the item (s ) to you . If the item you require differs between serial numbers of the same model , effective serial numbers are shown in the last line of the description .

C- 1

TM 9-1440-600-10 Section II .

(1 ) NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER

ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST

(2) DESCRIPTION FSCM & PART NUMBER

USABLE ON CODE

(3)

(4)

U/M

QTY AUTH

EA

3

EA

3

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

EA

1

EA

3

EA

1

EA

1

MTOE AUTHORIZED ITEMS 1080-00-623-7295

CAMOUFLAGE SCREEN SUPPORT SYSTEM WOODLAND/DESERT PLASTIC POLES (97403)

1080-00-103-1246

CAMOUFLAGE SCREEN SYSTEM : WOODLAND LT. WT. RADAR SET W/O SUPPORT SYSTEM (98230)

5810-01-058-2513

CASE , BATTERY 2 -A1J/TSEC ON 199089 (98230)

5820-00-351-3003

INSTALLATION KIT, MK- 1454/UR/VRC 53, 64, GRC 125, 160 (80063)

5820-01-063-1984

INSTALLATION KIT, 1910/VF/GRC- 160 IN M818 SC- D-866058

(80063) 5810-01-043-1047

INSTALLATION KIT, MK- 1852/VRC F/KY- 57 W/GRC- 160- IN M818 (80063)

5820-00-223-7473

RADIO SET ; AN/GRC- 160 (80063) PPL-4326

5810-01-026-9621

VEHICULAR POWER SUPPLY VPS HYP-57 TSEC (98230) ON 241780

CTA AUTHORIZED ITEMS 4240-00-022-2946

AURAL PROTECTOR : SOUND W/O HELEMET

(81349) MIL- P -38268 8465-00-001-6476

SHELF CARGO SUPPORT RACKSACK

(81349) MIL-S-43834 8465-00-001-6477

STRAP, WEBBING (ARGO TIEDOWN) (81349) MIL- S-43828

C- 2

TM 9-1440-600-10

APPENDIX D EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST

Section I.

D- 1 .

INTRODUCTION

SCOPE

This appendix lists expendable supplies and materials you will need to operate and maintain the launching station . These items are authorized to you

by CTA 50-970 ,

Ex-

pendable Items (Except Medical , Class V , Repair Parts , and Heraldic Items) .

D-2.

EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS

a.

Column ( 1 ) - Item Number. This number is assigned to the entry in the listing

and is referenced in the narrative instructions to identify the material ( e.g. , “ Use cleaning compound , item 5 , App . D" ) .

Level . This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that b. Column (2) requires the listed item .

C - Operator/Crew

O - Organizational Maintenance H - Intermediate Maintenance

c.

Column (3) - National Stock Number. This is the National stock number assigned

to the item ; use it to request or requisition the item .

d. Column (4) - Description . Indicates the Federal item name and , if required , a description to identify the item . The last line for each item indicates the Federal Supply Code for Manufacturer (FSCM ) in parentheses followed by the part number.

D-1

TM 9-1440-600-10

Section I.

e.

INTRODUCTION - Continued

Column (5) - Unit of Measure ( U/M) . Indicates the measure used in performing

the actual maintenance function . This measure is expressed by a two- character alphabetical abbreviation (e.g. , ea , in , pr) . If the unit of measure differs from the unit of issue , requisition the lowest unit of issue that will satisfy your requirements.

Section II .

D-2

(1 ) ITEM NUMBER

1

EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIEL LIST

(4)

(5)

LEVEL

(3) NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

U/M

C

9505-00-221-2650

Wire, nonelectrical

LB

(2)

TM 9-1440-600-10 GLOSSARY

AAL

BII

Additional authorization list

LP

Lubrication order

LOS

Line-of-sight Lower right

Basic Issue Items LR

BITE

Built-in-test - equipment

CCIP

Computer-To-Communications interface processor

CTA

Components of end item list Common table of allowances

DLT

Data link terminal

DLTM

Data link terminal module

ECS Engagement control station

FP FSCM

Motor control unit

MRCTS

Missile round cable test set

MTOE

Modified table of equipment

para PCP

Paragraph Power control panel

PDU

Power distribution unit

PIFA

Power input filter assembly Preventive maintenance

PMCS Federal supply code for manufacturers

checks and service

QDR

Quality deficiency report

Guided missile transporter

RS

Radar set

Joint table of allowances

SOP

Standard operating procedure

TDA

Table of distribution and allow-

TM TOE

Technical manual

Table of equipment

T.W.T.

Traveling wave tube

Guided missile

GMT

JTA LCU

Launch control unit

LE

Launcher electronics

LED

Light emitting diode Launcher electronics module

LL

MCU

Firing platoon

GM

LEM

Launching station Launching station test set

ances

LM

Lower left Launcher mechanics

LMRD

Launcher missile tributor

round

dis-

OFF

COEIL

LS LSTS

UL

Upper left

UR

Upper right

GLOSSARY 1 /(GLOSSARY 2 blank)

)

)

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX Para

Subject

Page

A Actuators , elevation Electrically lower

2-20

2-190

Electrically raise Location and description

2-19

2-185

1-6

1-12

Manual operation

2-21

2-195

Principles of operation

2-1D

2-28

Aiming circle 1-6

1-11

2-8

2-94

Location and purpose

2-1D

2-28

Use

2-8

2-111

Storage

Use in emplacement Alignment datum

Alinement pin 2-31

2-342

2-1D

2-28

Location and description

1-6

1-8

Principles of operation

2-1D

2-29

2-29

2-243

Electrically operate

2-22

2-199

Location

1-6

1-13

Manual operations

2-23

2-202

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-2

2-1D

2-29

Inspection Location and purpose Antenna , data link

Auto synchronizing , data link Azimuth actuator

Principles of operation Azimuth bearing

Location and description Principles of operation Azimuth drive motor

Location

1-6

1-13

2-1

2-29

1-6

1-13

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-2

Purpose

2-1D

2-29

Azimuth drive unit

Location and description Principles of operation Azimuth limits and rates

1-6

1-13

2-1D

2-29

1-8

1-16

2-23

2-202

2-18

2-183

Azimuth limit switches (see limit switches , azimuth)

Azimuth manual operations B

Bearing (see azimuth bearing) BITE test

Index 1

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX - Continued Para

Subject

Page

Blackout conditions Emplacement Guided missile reload

2-8

2-41

2-31

2-285

March order

2-30

2-247

2-21

2-197

Cold weather operation

2-34

2-390

Controls and indicators

2-1F

2-31

Location and description

1-6

1-11

Single

2-31

2-323

Two-stack

2-31

2-332

1-5

1-4

Changing weather, procedures for

2-38

2-399

Checks, preventive maintenance

2-6

2-35

Chemical , biological , and radiological environment

2-32

2-388

Energizing , control for Location

2-1B

2-17

1-6

1-10

Nomenclature cross-reference

1-4

1-2

2-34

2-388

2-1B

2-13

Brake, elevation motors C Cable test set, missile round (see missile round cable test set) Canister heaters power control box

Canisters, offload

Capabilities and features of equipment CCW and cw limit switches (see limit switches, azimuth) Centrifugal fan (see fan)

Clock power supply

Cold weather operation Computer-To-Communications - Interface Processor (also see data link terminal) Controls and indicators

1-6

1-10

2-1

2-1

Curbside stowage box

1-6

1-11

Front stowage

1-6

1-7

Rear stowage

1-6

1-9

Location Controls and indicators

Containers, location

1-6

1-8

Cross- reference , nomenclature

1-4

1-1

Curbside stowage box , location

1-6

1-11

Roadside stowage box

D

Data link antenna Location and description

1-6

1-8

Principles of operation

2-1D

2-29

Index 2

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX - Continued

Subject

Para

Page

Data link mast assembly Location and description

1-6

1-8

Principles of operation

2-1D

2-29

Data link terminal (also see data link terminal module) Assemblies included in

1-4

1-2

Auto synchronizing

2-29

2-243

Loopback test Quick start

2-27

2-227

2-25

2-209

Slave synchronizing

2-28

2-235

Tuning Turn -on

2-26

2-213

2-24

2-205

Controls and indicators

2-1B

2-10

Deenergizing

2-16

2-179

Energizing

2-13

2-167

Location and description

1-6

1-10

Position of controls prior to application of power Preventive maintenance checks and services

2-9

2-127

2-6

2-35

Data link terminal module (also see data link terminal)

Deenergize Data link terminal module

2-16

2-179

Generator set

2-17

2-182

Launcher electronics module

2-15

2-175

Description Major components Controls and indicators

1-6

1-5

2-1

2-1

2-1

2-1

1-7

1-13

1-6

1-13

2-1D

2-29

Dimensions

1-8

1-14

Display panel , LCU (also see launcher electronics module) Controls and indicators

2-1A

2-6

1-6

1-7

Distributor modules , launcher missile round distributor , location

1-6

1-9

DLT power supply ( also see data link terminal ) Controls and indicators

2-1B

2-21

1-6

1-10

Designators , reference Differences between models Digital encoder Location Purpose Digital processor (see computer -to- communication interface processor)

Location

Location

Nomenclature cross- reference Dusty and sandy conditions

1-4

1-2

2-36

2-394

Index 3

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX - Continued Para

Page

Subject

E

Electrically operate launcher mechanics Lower

2-20

2-190

Raise

2-19

2-185

2-22

2-199

1-8

1-15

2-1B

2-11

1-6

1-10

Electrically lower

2-20

2-190

Electrically raise

2-19

2-185

Handcrank operations

2-21

2-195

Rotate Electrical power requirements Electronic key generator (also see data link terminal) Controls and indicators Location Elevation actuators

1-6

1-12

2-1D

2-28

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-2

2-1D

2-28

Purpose

Location and description Principles of operation Elevation drive motors

Elevation handcranks 1-6

1-8

2-21

2-195

1-8

1-15

Storage

Use in operation Elevation limits and rates Emplacement

Maximum ground slope

1-8

1-15

Maximum wind velocity

1-8

1-15

Procedure

2-8

2-39

Site selection

2-8

2-39

16

1-13

2-1

2-29

2-13

2-167

Generator set

2-14

2-169

Launcher electronics module

2-12

2-161

2-1D

2-27

2-1D

2-27

2-1

2-1

2-30

2-251

2-8

2-120

1-8

1-14

Encoder, digital Location Purpose Energizing Data link terminal module

Engagement control handle Location Principles of operation

Engagement control station Control of launching station Transfer control from (go to local)

Transfer control to (go to remote)

Equipment data

Index 4

TM 9-1440-600-1

INDEX - Continued Para

Subject

Page

Equipment description (also see individual equipment)

1-6

1-5

Equipment improvement recommendations

1-3

1-1

Equipment purpose , capabilities , and features Extreme weather operations

1-5

1-4

Changing weather

2-38

2-399

Cold

2-34

2-390

High humidity Hot

2-37

2-397

2-35

2-394

Lightning

2-41

2-408

Sandy or dusty

2-36

2-394

Control for

2-1B

2-17

Location

1-6

1-10

Control for

2-1A

2-3

Location

1-6

1-7

1-4

1-2

1-5

1-4

Launcher/Location alinement data

2-8

2-40

Maintenance

1-2

1-1

1-6

1-7

Low state reporting

2-1C

2-22

Power-down for

2-11

2-152

Power- up following

2-10

2-133

12

1-1

Nomenclature cross - reference

1-4

1-1

Preventive maintenance checks and services

2-6

2-35

2-5

2-33

Controls and indicators

2-1C

2-22

Deenergizing

2-17

2-182

Energizing Location and description

2-14

2-169

1-6

1-6

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-2

Position of controls prior to application of power

2-9

2-127

Refuel , power-down for

2-11

2-152

Refuel , power- up following

2-10

2-133

F Fan Data link terminal module

Launcher electronics module

Nomenclature cross- reference

Features , equipment Forms

Front stowage container, location

Fuel , generator set

G

General information Maintenance forms , records , and reports

General procedures for services and inspections Generator set

Index 5

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX - Continued

Para

Subject

Page

Greasing

2-7

2-38

Guided missile , reload

2-31

2-283

Guided missile transporter , use in reload Gunner's quadrant

2-31

2-283

Storage

1-6

1-11

Use in emplacement

2-8

2-110

H Handcranks, elevation

Storage

1-6

1-8

Use in emplacement

2-8

2-103

Use in operations

2-21

2-195

Height

1-8

1-14

High humidity operations

2-37

2-397

High velocity wind

1-8

1-15

Hot weather operation

2-35

2-394

Improvement recommendations , equipment

1-3

1-1

Indicators , description and use

2-1

2-1

Input requirements , electrical power

1-8

1-15

Inspections , general procedures Intervals, preventive maintenance

2-5

2-33

2-4

2-33

2-1B

2-11

1-6

1-10

2-1D

2-28

K Key generator, electronic (also see data link terminal) Controls and indicators

Location L

Launcher base Description Location

1-6

1-12

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-3

1-5

1-4

Controls and indicators

2-1A

2-2

Deenergizing

2-15

2-175

Energizing Location and description

2-12

2-161

1-6

1-7

Position of controls prior to application of power

2-9

2-123

Preventive maintenance checks and services

2-6

2-35

Azimuth manual operations

2-23

2-202

Description

1-6

1-12

Electrically lower

2-20

2-190

Launcher electronics , assemblies included in Launcher electronics module

Launcher mechanics

Index 6

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX - Continued Subject

Para

Page

Electrically raise

2-19

2-185

Electrically rotate

2-22

2-199

Elevation handcrank operations

2-21

2-195

2-1D

2-27

1-6

1-9

2-31

2-356

Azimuth manual operation

2-23

2-202

Description

1-6

1-12

Electrically lower

2-20

2-190

Electrically raise

2-19

2-185

Principles of operation Launcher missile round distributor

Location and description Test, during reload Launcher platform

Elevation handcrank

2-21

2-195

Principles of operation

2-1D

2-28

Data

1-8

1-14

Description

1-6

1-5

Emplacement March order

2-8

2-39

2-30

2-247

Principles of operation Purpose, capabilities , and features

2-1

2-1

1-5

1-4

Launching station

Reload, guided missiles Launching station test set , nomenclature

2-31

2-283

1-4

1-3

2-1A

2-6

LCU display panel Controls and indicators

Location

1-6

1-7

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-3

Principles of operation

2-1A

2-6

1-8

1-14

Lightning safety precautions

2-41

2-408

Limits, elevation and azimuth

1-8

1-15

1-4

1-3

Length Leveling (see outrigger control panel)

Limit switches, azimuth (ccw and cw ) Nomenclature cross- reference Principles of operation Local operations , transfer to

2-1D

2-28

2-30

2-251

(also see engagement control station) 1-6

1-5

Loopback, data link terminal

2-27

2-227

Lower launcher platform

2-20

2-190

Lubrication

2-7

2-38

Location and description of major components

Index 7

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX - Continued Para

Subject

Page

M Maintenance forms , records , and reports

1-2

1-1

Major components , location and description

1-6

1-5

2-23

2-202

Manual operations Azimuth Elevation

March order, procedure

2-21

2-195

2-30

2-247

2-1E

2-30

Missile round cable test set Controls and indicators

1-6

1-6

2-31

2-356

1-7

1-13

Energizing , control for

2-1A

2-5

Location

1-6

1-7

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-3

1-4

1-2

2-1D

2-28

Location and description Use during reload Models, differences between Motor, azimuth drive (see azimuth drive motor) Motor control unit

Motors, elevation drive Nomenclature cross-reference Purpose

N Nighttime Emplacement Guided missile reload

2-8

2-41

2-31

2-285

March order

2-30

2-247

1-4

1-1

2-7

2-38

Controls and indicators

2-1G

2-32

Location and description

1-6

1-10

Nomenclature cross- reference Noninterrupt power (see over-the- road power) O

Oiling Outrigger control panel

Use for leveling

2-8

C-79

Use in connecting tractor

2-30

2-275

1-6

1-6

Outriggers, location

Over-the- road power Control for

2-1A

2-5

Deenergize in emplacement

2-8

2-64

Deenergize in power- up

2-10

2-145

Energize in march order

2-30

2-263

Energize in power-down

2-11

2-156

Input requirement

1-8

1-15

Tractor supplied

2-1B

2-10

Use in reload

2-31

2-296

Index 8

C

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX - Continued Para

Subject

Page

P Platform , launcher (see launcher platform) Pole, range (see range pole) Pointer Nomenclature cross- reference

Position of controls prior to application of power

1-4

1-3

2-9

2-123

1-8

1-15

Power (also see over-the- road power) Input requirements Power control box , canister heaters (see canister heaters

power control box) Power control panel 25

2-5

Controls and indicators

2-1A

Location

1-6

1-7

2-1B

2-17

Power distribution unit , data link terminal module Controls and indicators

Location

1-6

1-10

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-3

Controls and indicators

2-1A

2-3

Location

1-6

1-7

Power distribution unit , launcher electronics module

1-4

1-3

Power-down

2-11

2-152

Power input filter assembly, location

1-6

1-10

1-8

1-15

Controls for

2-1B

2-17

Nomenclature cross - reference

1-4

1-3

Controls for

2-1A

2-4

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-3

2-10

2-133

2-1B

2-17

Pressure switch , launcher electronics module Indicator

2-1A

2-3

Preventive maintenance checks and services

2-6

2-35

Principles of operation

2-1

2-1

1-5

1-4

2-25

2-209

Nomenclature cross- reference

Power, over-the- road (see over-the- road power)

Power requirements , input Power supplies, clock (see clock power supply) Power supplies, data link terminal module

Power supplies , launcher electronics module

Power supply, DLT (see DLT power supply) Power-up Pressure switch , data link terminal module

Indicator

Processor (see computer-to-communications interface processor) Purpose, capabilities and features

Q Quick start , data link terminal

Index 9

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX - Continued Para

Subject

Page

R Radio frequency tuner (also see data link terminal) Controls and indicators

2-1B

2-19

Location

1-6

1-10

Radio, voice , location and use

2-1

2-1

Raise launcher platform

2-19

2-185

Storage

1-6

1-7

Use in emplacement

2-8

2-103

Rates , azimuth and elevation

1-8

1-15

Rear stowage container, location

1-6

1-9

Receiver-transmitter (also see data link terminal ) Controls and indicators

2-1B

2-16

1-6

1-10

Range pole

Location

Records and reports

1-2

1-1

Reference designators

2-1

2-1

Reload , guided missile

2-31

2-285

Remote operations , transfer to (also see engagement

2-8

2-120

control station) Reporting of equipment improvement recommendations

1-3

1-1

Responsibility for preventive maintenance

2-3

2-33

1-6

1-8

2-22

2-199

Run time meter

2-1A

2-5

Emplacement

2-8

2-41

Lightning

2-41

2-408

S

Roadside stowage box , location Rotate launcher mechanics

Safety precautions

March order

2-30

2-247

Reload, guided missile

2-31

2-285

Scope of manual

1-1

1-1

Semiautomatic BITE test

2-18

2-183

Controls and indicators

2-1G

2.32

Description

1-6

1-6

Purpose

1-5

1-4

2-5

2-33

1-4

1-3

Semitrailer

Sensor switch (see travel lock sensor switch and zero lock sensor switch ) Services and inspections , general procedures for Shorting plug Nomenclature cross- reference Use in reload

2-31

2-300

Site selection and preparation

2-8

2-39

Sling , canister (use in reload)

2-31

2-320

Index 10

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX - Continued Para

Page

After leveling

1-8

1-16

Maximum ground

1-8

1-16

Description

2-1D

2-28

Location

1-6

1-12

Curbside

1-6

1-11

Roadside

1-6

1-8

1-6

1-7

1-6

1-9

Auto

2-29

2-243

Emplacement

2-8

2-113

Slave

2-28

2-235

Subject

Slope

Steadyrest

Stowage box, location

Stowage container, location Front Rear Switch , pressure (see pressure switch) Synchronizing , data link terminal

T

20

Technical principles of operation

2-1

2-1

Temperature, equipment data

1-8

1-16

1-6

1-6

1-5

1-4

Location and purpose

2-1D

2-28

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-3

Location and purpose

2-1D

2-28

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-3

Test sets (see launching station test set and missile

round cable test set) Tractor

Description Purpose Travel lockpin

Travel lock sensor switch

Tuner, radio frequency (see radio frequency tuner) Tuning, data link terminal

2-26

2-213

Turn-on, data link terminal Turntable

2-24

2-205

1-6

1-13

Location and description Nomenclature cross- reference

Principles of operation Two-stack offload

1-4

1-3

2-1D

2-28

2-31

2-332

V Vehicle positions, reload

2-31

2-286

Voice radio, location and use

2-1

2-1

Index 11

TM 9-1440-600-10

INDEX - Continued Para

Subject

Page

W Weather (see extreme weather operations) Weather shield Assembly

2-39

2-401

Disassembly

2-40

2-405

Storage

1-6

1-7

1-8

1-14

1-8

1-14

Weight Width

Winds Maximum

1-8

1-15

Operation in high winds

2-33

2-388

2-31

2-286

Engagement control handle positions

2-1D

2-27

Principles of operation

2-1D

2-29

Location and purpose

2-1D

2-29

Nomenclature cross- reference

1-4

1-3

Wrecker, use in reload

N

Zero lock plunger

Zero lock sensor switch

Index 12

By Order of the Secretary of the Army: JOHN A. WICKHAM , JR. General, United States Army Chief of Staff Official : ROBERT M. JOYCE

Major General, United States Army The Adjutant General

Distribution :

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-32 , Section III , Maintenance requirements for PATRIOT Missile System .

U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE :

1984-746-036 : 3024

Organizational

RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

SOMETHING

FL

33040

PUBLICATION TITLE Unit of Radar Set AN/MPQ- 50 Tested at the HFC

7 Sep 72

PIN-POINT WHERE IT IS

BE EXACT.

PAGE NO

Key West ,

DATE SENT 14 January 1979

PUBLICATION DATE

TM 9-1430-550-34-1

WITH THIS PUBLICATION ?

FROM: (PRINT YOUR UNIT'S COMPLETE ADDRESS) CDR, 1st Bn , 65th ADA ATTN : SP4 John Doe

THEN. JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM, CAREFULLY TEAR IT OUT. FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL

PUBLICATION NUMBER

WRONG

PARAGRAPH

9-19

FIGURE NO

TABLE NO

IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT:

"B " Ready Relay K11 is shown with two # 9 contacts . That contact which is wired to pin 8 of relay K16

9-5

should be changed to contact # 10 .

21-2

21-2

step 1C

Reads :

Multimeter B indicates 600 K ohms to 9000

K ohms .

Change to read : minimum .

Multimeter B indicates 600 K ohms

Reason : Circuit being checked could measure infinity . Multimeter can read above 9000 K ohms and still be correct .

E L P

NOTE TO THE READER:

M A S

Your comments will go directly to the writer responsible for this manual, and he will prepare To help him in the reply that is returned to you. his evaluation of your recommendations , please explain the reason for each of your recommendations , unless the reason is obvious .

All comments will be appreciated, and will be given immediate attention. Handwritten comments are e abl accept .

For your convenience, blank " tear out " forms, preprinted, addressed, and ready to mail, are included in this manual .

PRINTED NAME. GRADE OR TITLE. AND TELEPHONE NUMBER

SIGN HERE

SP4 John Doe , Autovon 222-222

ORM79 2028-2 DA , F JUL

PREVIOUS EDITIONS ARE OBSOLETE .

PS --IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS

C

RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

SOMETHING

WRONG

WITH THIS PUBLICATION ?

FROM: (PRINT YOUR UNIT'S COMPLETE ADDRESS) THEN.. JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM, CAREFULLY TEAR IT OUT, FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL!

PUBLICATION NUMBER

BE EXACT. PAGE NO

DATE SENT

PUBLICATION DATE

PUBLICATION TITLE

PIN-POINT WHERE IT IS PARAGRAPH

FIGURE NO

TABLE NO

IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT:

PRINTED NAME. GRADE OR TITLE , AND TELEPHONE NUMBER

DA1JFO RM 2028-2 UL79

PREVIOUS EDITIONS ARE OBSOLETE .

SIGN HERE.

P.S --IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS

REVERSE OF DA FORM 2020-2

PERFORATED LINE ALONG TEAR

FILL IN YOUR UNIT'S ADDRESS

FOLD BACK DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY POSTAGE AND FEES PAID DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY DOD 314 U.S.MAIL OFFICIAL BUSINESS PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE $300

Commander U. S. Army Missile Command DRSMI -SNPM ATTN : Redstone Arsenal , AL 35898

RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

SOMETHING

WRONG

WITH THIS PUBLICATION ?

FROM: (PRINT YOUR UNIT'S COMPLETE ADDRESS)

THEN.. JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM, CAREFULLY TEAR IT OUT. FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL!

PUBLICATION DATE

PUBLICATION NUMBER

BE EXACT. PAGE NO

DATE SENT

PUBLICATION TITLE

PIN-POINT WHERE IT IS

PARAGRAPH

FIGURE NO

TABLE NO

IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT:

PRINTED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE. AND TELEPHONE NUMBER

DA1, FORM JUL79 202 8-

2

PREVIOUS EDITIONS ARE OBSOLETE .

SIGN HERE

P.S --IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS .

REVERSE OF DA FORM 2020-2

PERFORATED ALONG TEAR LINE

FILL IN YOUR UNIT'S ADDRESS

FOLD BACK DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY POSTAGE AND FEES PAID DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY DOD 314

USMAIL OFFICIAL BUSINESS PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE $300

Commander

U. S. Army Missile Command DRSMI - SNPM ATTN : 35898 Redstone Arsenal , AL

IM -ID FBD

A SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PARAMETERS &DESIGNATIONS PAINTING &MARKING A GUIDE SOFTWARE USER AAB /ACA DISPLAY &CONTROL GROUP & COMPUTER CONTROL WEAPON /ACA AAA COMPUTER CCOMMAND &OORDINATION INTERLOCKS &POWER H , ARD UNIT CONTROL PERIPHERAL ,, ASS UNIT M STORAGE COPY C STORAGE & OMPUTER UNIT RECOVERY MAINTENANCE PANEL INPUT OUTPUT / UNIT CONTROL MONOLITHIC UNIT MEMORY A / CAA AAAA CENTRAL UNIT PROCESSOR A / BK AAE UNIT CONTROL INTERFACE RADAR /WEAPON / DAAACC DATA TERMINAL LINK AACA /ACCA X UNIT RROUTING INTERFACE / ADIO LOGIC /ACCB CB AA &M ODEMS COMMUNICATIONS -UHF ,V AAD ENGAGEMENT STATION CONTROL ABH SET RADAR ABA CONTROL UNIT INPUT OUTPUT / UNIT ABI UNIT INTERFACE MTR &X GEN TRIGGER GROUP & GROUP SYSTEM ANTENNA RADAR STEERING GROUP BEAM CONTROL UNIT ABF PROCESSOR ABC - XCITER ETRANSMITTER DTRANSMITTER &F- INAL AMPLIFIER RIVER ABD UNIT ABEA INPUT OUTPUT / CONTROL ABEB WAVEFORM GENERATOR ABEC EXPANSION PULSE ABEG END FRONT LENS END FRONT ABEK COMPARATOR RADAR IF T / RACK ABEE SEARCH RECEIVER ABEF GROUP CANCELLER LOBE SIDE PROCESSOR ECCM ABED ABEJ DIGITAL TRACK ABEM PROCESSOR ACTIVE -VIAMISSILE CORRELATION PROCESSORABEH ABEL POWER DC ABBA CONTROL O /UTPUT INPUT ABBB DIGITAL 1 PROCESSOR SIGNAL SIGNAL ABBC PROCESSOR 2SIGNAL DIGITAL PROCESSOR GROUP PROCESSOR 3&SIGNAL DIGITAL AB3D TESTS CROSSOVER ABG IFF SYSTEM ACD INFORMATION &COORDINATION CENTRAL AG ANTENNA GROUP MAST AFA CONTROL GROUP RELAY ROUND MISSILE AD STATION LAUNCHING SET LAUNCHING TEST STATION EQUIPMENT MBATTALION &AINTENANCE SUPPLY OPERATOR TRAINING DESTRUCTION

COVERAGE

XX

X

X 9-4935-600-14

9-1430-603-10 9-1430-604-10 9-1410-600-14 9-1440-600-10 9-4935-603-12

/-2 9-1430-602-20 9-1430-602-10-1 9-1430-803-20 9-1430-604-20 9-1410-600-14 9-1440-600-20 9-4935-603-12 9-4935-600-14 XXX XXXX

9-4935-600-14

9-1410-600-14

9-1430-601-34-23 9-1430-601-34-24

X X

9-1430-601-34-6 9-1430-601-34-7 9-1430-601-34-8 9-1430-601-34-9 9-1430-601-34-10 9-1430-601-34-11 9-1430-601-34-12 9-1430-601-34-13 9-1430-601-34-14 9-1430-601-34-15 9-1430-601-34-16 9-1430-601-34-17 9-1430-601-34-18 9-1430-601-34-19 9-1430-601-34-20 9-1430-601-34-21 9-1430-601-34-22

9-1430-601-34-5

9-1430-601-34-3 9-1430-601-34-4

9-1425-604-14-3 9-1425-604-14-4 9-1425-604-14-5 9-1425-605-14 9-1425-606-14 9-1425-607-14 9-1425-608-14

9-1425-604-14-3 9-1425-604-14-4 9-1425-604-14-5 9-1425-605-14 9-1425-606-14 9-1425-607-14 9-1425-608-14 9-1430-600-20 9-1430-600-10-1 /-2 9-1430-601-20 9-1430-601-10-1 /-2

9-1425-604-14-3 9-1425-604-14-4 9-1425-604-14-5 9-1425-605-14 9-1425-606-14 9-1425-607-14 9-1425-608-14

9-1425-604-14-2

9-1425-604-14-2

9-1425-604-14-2

9-1425-604-14-1

9-1425-604-14-1

9-1425-604-14-1

TX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X

MANUALS PATRIOT

OTHER

9-1430-602-24P 9-1430-602-34-1 /-2 9-1430-603-24P /-2 9-1430-603-34-1 9-1430-604-34-1 9-1430-604-24P /-2 9-1410-600-24P LO9-1440-600-14 9-1440-600-24P 9-1440-600-34-1 /-2 9-4935-603-24P /-2 9-4935-603-34-1 9-4935-600-24P 9-6920-600-14 43-0002-23

LO9-1430-600-14 9-1430-600-24P /-2 9-1430-600-34-1 9-1430-601-34-1 -9-1430-601-24P / 2

ORGANIZATIONALINTERMEDIATE OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE RPSTL MAINTENANCE ICC RS AMG CRG ECS MR BSME LS XXXXXXXX 9-1425-600-12 9-1425-600-12 9-1425-600-34 XXXXXXXX TB9-1425-600-14 TB9-1425-600-14 TB9-1425-600-14 XXXXXXXX 9-1425-601-14 9-1425-601-14 9-1425-601-14 9-1425-602-34 9-1425-602-12 9-1425-602-12 9-1425-603-14 9-1425-603-14 9-1425-603-14

MAJOR ITEMS

AAAC /A XCAC AAAB /AX XCAB XX X X X X XX XXX X X X X

CAD XX /A AAAD

XX /ACAE AAAE

XX XX

X